-              -   -       ---. ---         ---- - — -.                                - - - -           -— 7
0
/




I,-.
P --


xIc

~.~ —k --- -1 -*-e, —4 — ~. --- +  *  --— e ----—. —.4,.r      GENERAL LIBRARY
-OF+ UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN,
i
PRESENTED BY
i t............_____,._/__ _____.....
+
V? i


+


t              -------    -   / --- — I V AA,   8914
i   -.D.      - -O.- - - 0  0 - t  ~.   -0 ce   *- — *- -  e




SENATE,                      R&PO1UT
{No. 227.


563D CoNG~RES'S..2d,Session.-5


IN TIHE SENATE OF THE UNITED STA&TES.
REPORT
PROM THE
'I$)
AND


A P PE1:1 "NTD11X
IN RELATION TO


AWI4JIRaADSO
Attention Patron:
This volume is too fragile for any future repair.
Please handle with great care.
UNIVERSMl OF MICHIGAN LIBRARY-CONSERVATION & BOOK REPAIR


WASHI-N-GTON:
GOVE RNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
1894..




-;   X -,,
i


',,,.,-,  '.,-,..
SENATE.                      {      o R.EPORT
n.                                No. 227.


53D COXNG
2d Sessio




I1N THE SENATE OF THE UNITED STATES.
REPORT
PROM THE!4.,3,,,. '.,:
-COMMITTEE ON FORPEIGN RELATIONS
AIND


APPEINDIX
A  IP IP E 71 IN  I LX
IN RELA''ION TO
THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
FEBRUARY 26, 1894.-SUBMITTED BY AR. MORGAN.
WASHINGTON:
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
1894.




I

'; '''.J
~'. - 1~~ ~i
~c,. \.. ax


*




53D CoGRuESS,            SENATE..         EPORT
2d esion.                     _                    No. 227.
11        03
IN TiE SENATE OF THE UNITEJ STATES.
FEBRUARY 26, 1894.-Ordered to be printed.
Mr. MORGAN submitted the following report from the Committee on
Foreign Relations:
The following resolution of the Senate defines the limits of the
authority of the committee in the investigation and report it is required
to make:
"Resolved, That the Committee on Foreign Relations shall inquire and
report whether any, and, if so, what irregularities have occurred in the
diplomatic or other intercourse between the United States and Hawaii
in relation to the recent political revolution in Hawaii, and to this end
said committee is authorized to send for persons and papers and to
administer oaths to witnesses."
The witnesses were examined under oath when it was possible to
secure their appearance before the committee, though in some instances
affidavits were taken in Hawaii and other places, and papers of a scientific and historic character will be appended to this report and presented to the Senate for its consideration.
The committee did not call the Secretary of State, or any person connected with the Hawaiian Legation, to give testimony. It was not
thought to be proper to question the diplomatic authorities of either
government on matters that are, or have been, the subject of negotiation between them, and no power exists to authorize the examination
of the minister of a foreign government in any proceeding without his
consent.
The resolutions include an inquiry only into the intercourse between
the two governments, and regard the conduct of the officers of the
United States as a matter for domestic consideration in which Hawaii'
is not concerned, unless it be that their conduct had some unjust and
improper influence upon the action of the people or Government of that
country in relation to the revolution.
The future policy of the two governments as to annexation, or in
respect of any other matter, is excluded by the resolutions from the
consideration of the committee, and such matters are alluded to only as
being incidental to the investigation which was ordered by the Senate.
The inquiry as to irregularities that may have occurred in our diplomatic or other intercourse with Hawaii must relate, first, to the conduct 6f the Government as shown in its official acts and correspondence;
and, second, the conduct of its civil and military officers while they
w ere engaged in the discharge of their public duties and functions.
As a (overnment dealing with Iawaii and with any form of government in that country, whether de facto or de jure, the United States
can have no separation or break in its line of policy corresponding to




n


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


any change in the incumbency of the office of President. It is in
all respects as much the same Government in every right and responsibility as if it had been under the same President during the entire
period covered by the recent revolution in Hawaii and the succeeding
events.
This view of the situation will enable us to examine more dispassionately the conduct of our Government, and to ascertain whether it
has been such that it can be safely drawn into precedent in any future
questions that may arise in our intercourse with this or other American governments.
The right of the President of the United States to change his opinions and conduct respecting a course of diplomatic correspondence
with a foreign government is no more to be questioned than his right
to institute such correspondence; and it can not be assumed that the
opinions of one President, differing from those of his predecessor, has
any other effect upon the attitude of the Government than would follow a change of opinion in the mind of the same person if there had
been no change in the incumbency of the office. This is a view of
the situation in which all foreign nations may have an interest, under
the usages of independent powers and the international laws. But
the question now under consideration is regarded as being peculiar to
what we may term the American system. It may be true that Hawaii
can not be considered as a separate and independent power in respect
of all its relations with the United States, yet the acts of successive
Presidents of the United States which affect it must be regarded as the
acts of one President. But there are many good reasons and a long
and consistent course of dealing between the United States and Hawaii
that materially affect, if they do not entirely change, the actual relations between Hawaii and the United States and make them exceptional. When we claim the right to interfere in the domestic affairs of
Hawaii, as we would not interfere with those of a European nation, we
must also admit her right to whatever advantages there may be in the
closeness and interdependence of our relations, and her right to question us as to any conflicts of policy between Mr. Harrison and Mr.
Cleveland that may be justly said to work a disadvantage to the interests of Hawaii, if there are any.
And another principle which does not apply in our dealings with
European powers comes into application in this case to influence the
rights of Hawaii in her intercourse with the United States.
)X   Hawaii is an American state, and is embraced in the American commercial and military system. This fact has been frequently and firmly
stated by our Government, and is the ground on which is rested that
peculiar and far-reaching declaration so often and so earnestly made,
that the United States will not admit the right of any foreign government to acquire any interest or control in the Hawaiian Islands that is
in any way prejudicial or even threatening toward the interests of the
United States or her people. This is at least a moral suzerainty over
Hawaii. In this attitude of the two Governments, Hawaii must be
entitled to demand of the United States an indulgent consideration,
if not an active sympathy, when she is endeavoring to accomplish what
every other American state has achieved-the release of her people
from the odious antirepublican regim6 which denies to the people the
right to govern themselves, and subordinates them to the supposed
divine right of a monarch, whose title to such divinity originated in
the most slavish conditions of pagan barbarity.
The point at which it is alleged that there was a questionable inter



HAWAIIAN ISLANDS..I
ference by our minister and our Navy with the affairs of Hawaii was
the landing of troops from the ship Boston in Honolulu on the 16th
day of January, 1893, at 5 o'clock in the afternoon. That ship, on
which the minister was a passenger, had been off on a practice cruise
at Hilo, a distance of nearly 100 miles, since the 4th day of January.
CO; her return to the harbor a condition of affairs existed in Honolulu
which led naturally to the apprehension that violence or civil commotion would ensue, in which the peace and security of American
citizens residing in that city would be put in peril, as had been done
'on three or more separate occasions previously when changes occurred
or were about to occur in the government of Hawaii. Whatever we
may conclude were the real causes of the situation then present in
Honolulu, the fact is that there was a complete paralysis of executive
government in Hawaii. The action of the Queen in an effort to over-i
turn the constitution of 1887, to which she had sworn obedience and.
support, had been accepted and treated by a large and powerful body
of the people as a violation of her constitutional obligations, revolutionary in its character and purposes and that it amounted to an act
of abdication on her part, so far as her powers and the rights of the
people under the constitution of 1887 were concerned. This state of
opinion and this condition of the executive head of the Hawaiian
Governrhent neutralized its power to protect American citizens and
other foreigners in their treaty rights, and also their rights under the
laws of Hawaii. There was not in Honolulu at that time any efficient
executive power through which the rights of American citizens
residing there could be protected in accordance with the local laws.
It is evident that the Queen's Government at that time had no power
to prevent the landing of troops from any quarter, no power to protect
itself against invasion, no power to conduct civil government, so far
as the executive was concerned, if the effort to exert such power was
antagonized by any opposing body of people in considerable numbers.
Indeed, no effort seems to have been made to exert the civil authority
except through the presence of a small and inefficient body of policemen. The authority of the Queen was not respected by the people; it
was opposed, and no force appeared to be used for the purpose of
overcoming the opposition. It yielded to a silent but ominous opposition. Without reference to the question whether, in strict law, the
action of the Queen in her effort to overturn the constitution of 1887,
and to substitute one by a proclamation which she had prepared, was a
revolution in government, or an effort at revolution, or amounted to
an actual abdication, the result was that an interregnum existed.
If we give full effect to the contention that this interregnum occurred
because of the apprehensions of the Queen that force would be used by
the United States to compel her abdication, those apprehensions could
not have occurred before the landing of the troops from the Boston, or,
if they existed, they were idle, unfounded, and unjust toward the
United States. It was her conduct, opposed by her people, or a large
portion of them, that paralyzed the executive authority and left the
citizens of the United States in Honolulu without the protection of any
law, unless it was such as should be extended to them by the American
minister, in conjunction with the arms of the United States then on
board the Boston.
It will appear hereafter in this report that there is well-settled'authority for the position that at the moment when the Queen made public
her decision to absolve herself from her oath to support the constitution
of 1887 her abdication was complete, if the people chose so to regard
it. That constitution and the Queeu's oath to support it was the only




IV.                  HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
foundation for her regal authority and, when she announced that her
oath was annulled in its effect upon her own conscience, she could no
longer rightfully hold office under that constitution. In such mattersthe word of the Queen, once sedately uttered, fixes a condition that is
irrevocable, unless by the consent of those whose condition or rights
would be injuriously affected by its subsequent withdrawal; as in the
case of a voluntary abdication in favor of a named successor; or of a
pardon granted to a person accused or convicted of crime; or the signature to a legislative act, or declaration of war. The official act of
the chief executive of a nation is uniformly regarded as creating a condition or status which can not be altered or revoked at pleasure. Indeed, in every case, the word of the-king that works a change in existing conditions is the final act of the king. In the crime of treason and
the misprision of treason, the word that is spoken by the culprit, though
quickly repented of or recalled, has completed the crime and placed
the offender beyond the reach of all mercy except that of the sovereign
power. In this instance the sovereign power to pardon or condone the
Queen's offense resided in the people, and they lhave so far decided and
have adhered td the decision that her abdication was complete. The
recantation was two days later than the completed crime and was tenmporary and conditional, and, in the meantime, popular sovereignty had
risen to the assertion of its rights, an indignant resentment had aroused
the people, and a large body of citizens claiming to represent thenm had
inaugurated a government of the people and for the people. Whether
the people opposing the Queen were strengthened in their purpose to
accept and act upon this abandonment by the Queen bf her obligations
to keep her oath to support and obey the constitution by the presence
of the troops of the United States, or whether the Queen was dismayed
by their presence and was deterred fro.-u supporting her criminal act
by the employment of her household soldiery, (lid not alter the fact that
she had openly renounced the constitution of 1887 before the troops
were landed or any preparation was made or any order was issued to
land them, and the people were preparing to substitute the monarchy,
which was still existing in the constitution, by a ruler of their own
choice before any troops left the Boston.
Whether the people would permit the restoration of the Queen, or
whether they would constitute a new executive head of the Government
of Hawaii, was a matter then undetermined, and as to that the Government of the United States had but one concern, and that was that the
interregnum should be ended, the executive head of the Government
should be supplied, and the laws of Hawaii and the treaty rights of
American citizens should have full effect, peacefully, in the protection
of their rights and interests. When the Queen found that her Government was opposed by a strong body of the people she did not attempt
to reassemble the Legislature, but left the public safety in charge of a
committee of thirteen men, organized by those who were endeavoring
to preserve the peace and to restore the Government to its full constitutional powers by choosing an executive head. This condition of
things continued from Saturday until the succeeding Tuesday, during
all of which time the citizens of the United States residing in Honolulu
had no protection of law, except such as was guarantied to them by the
presence of the Boston in the bay of Honolulu, or the moral influence
of the American legation and consulate.
When the Kamehameha dynasty ended, the monarchy in Hawaii was
doomed to a necessary dissolution. The five kings of that family,
assisted by their premiers, who were Kanaka women, and by such nmissionaries as Judd, Bingham, Chamberlain, Coan, Goodrich, and Damon






HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


V


muintained the progress of civilization add prosperity, but when Kalakaua was elected king, the most surprising and disgraceful corruptions
infected the Government. Without detailing in this report the constant decline from bad to worse, which the evidence discloses, without
contradiction or explanation, when Liliuokalani was enthroned the
monarchy was a mere shell and was in condition to crumble on the
slightest touch of firm opposition. Under her brief rule, it was kept
alive by the care and forbearing tolerance of the conservative white
people, who owned $50,000,000 of the property in Hawaii, until they
saw that the Queen and her party had determined to grasp absolute
power and destroy the constitution and the rights of the white people.
When they were compelled to act in self-defense the monarchy disappeared. It required nothing but the determined action of what *as
called the missionary party to prostrate the monarchy, and that action
had been taken before the troops from the Boston landed.
There was then no executive head of the Government of Hawaii; it
had perished,
In landing the troops from the Boston there was no demonstration ot
actual hostilities, and their conduct was as quietsand as respectful as
it had been on many previous occasions when they were landed for the
purpose of drill and practice. In passing the palace on their way to the
point at which they were halted, the Queen appeared upon the balcohy
and the troops respectfully saluted her by presenting arms and dipping
the flag, and made no- demonstration of any hostile intent. Her attitude at that time was that of helplessness, because she found no active
or courageous support in her isolated position, which was self-imposed
and was regretted by few of her former subjects. In this condition of
Hawaii the laws for the protection of life and property were, in fact,
suspended so far as the executive power was concerned, and the citizens of the United States in Honolulu and all the islands, and their
property rights, were virtually outlawed. - The citizens of Honolulu
were not held amenable to the civil authorities, but were treated by
the Queen, as well as by the people, as if the country was in a state of
war. A policeman was shot down on the streets by a person who was
conducting a wagon loaded with arms to the place of rendezvous where
the people had assembled, and no action was taken for the purpose of
arresting or putting on trial the man who did the shooting.
In a country where there is no power of the law to protect the
citizens of the United States there can be no law of nations nor any
rule of comity that can rightfully prevent our flag from giving shelter
to them under the protection of our arms, and this without reference
to any distress it may give to the Queen who generated the confusion.
or any advantage it might give to the people who are disputing her
right to resume or to hold her regal powers. In every country where
there is no effective chi'f executive authority, whether it is a newlydiscovered island  haere only savage government prevails, or one
where the government is paralyzed by internal feuds, it is the right,
claimed and exercised by all civilized nations, to enter such a country
with sovereign authority to assert and protect the rights of its citizens
and their property, and to remain there without the invitation of anybodyuntil civil government shall have been established that is adequate,
in a satisfactory sense, for their protection.
The committee agree that such was the condition of the Hawaiian
Government at the time that the troops were landed in Honolulu from
the steam warship Boston; that there was then an interregnumn in
Hawaii as respects the executive office; that there was no executive
power to enforce the laws of Hawaii, and that it was the right of the




VI


HAWAIkAN ISLANDS.


United States to land troops u4on those islands at any place where it
was necessary in the opinion of our minister to protect our citizens.
In what occurred in landing the troops at Honolulu there may have
been an invasion, but it was not an act of war, nor did it create that
condition of the public law in Hawaii.
In the period of reconstruction, as it is called, which followed the civil
war of 1861-'65 in the United States, a very similar condition existed,
or was assumed to exist, which caused Congress to provide for vacating the gubernatorial offices in several of the Southern States and
filling them by appointments of the President.
In these States strong military bodies were stationed and general
officers of the Army took command and enforced the laws found on their
statute books and also the laws of the United States. All the civil
officers in those sovereign States were required to obey the commands
of those Army officers, and they did so, often under protest, but with
entire submission to the military power and authority of the President,
exerted through the instrumentality of the Army. That.was not war.
Yet it was the presence of military force, employed actively in the
enforcement of the civil laws, and in full supremacy over the civil
authority.
The only reason that could justify this invasion of sovereign states
by the armies of the United States was the declaration by Congress
that the executive governments in those states were not in the lawful
possession of the incumbents; that there was an interregnum in those
states as to the office of governor.
If the Queen, or the people, or both acting in conjunction, had opposed
the landing of the troops from the Boston with armed resistance, their
invasion would have been an act of war. Brt when their landing was
not opposed by any objection, protest, or resistance the state of war
did not supervene, and there was no irregularity or want of authority
to place the troops on shore.
In this yiew of the facts there is no necessity for inquiring whether
Minister Stevens or Capt. Wiltse, in arranging for the landing of the
troops, had any purpose either to aid the popular movement against
the Queen that was then taking a definite and decisive shape, or to
promote the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands to the United States.
But justice to these gentlemen requires that we should say that the
troops from the Boston were not sent into Honolulu for any other purpose than that set forth fully and fairly in the following order from
Capt. Wiltse to the officer in command of the detachment:
U. S. S. BOSTON (SECOND RATE),
Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands, January 16, 1893.
Lieut. Commander W. T. SWINBURNE, U. S. Navy,
Executive Officer, U. S. S. Boston:
SIR: You will take command of the battalion and land in Honolulu
for the purpose of protecting our legation, consulate, and the lives and
property of American citizens, and to assist in preserving public order.
Great prudence must be exercised by both officers and men, and no
action taken that is not fully warranted by the condition of affairs and
by the conduct of those who may be inimical to the treaty rights of
American citizens.
You will inform me at the earliest practicable moment of any change
in the situation.
Very respectfully,
G. C. WILTSE,
Captain, U. S. Navy, Commanding U. S. S. Boston.




HAWAIIAN ISTANDS.


VII


As between the United States and Hawaii, as separate and independent governments, that order defines the full liability of the Government of the United States in respect of landing the troops at
Honolulu.' As between the Government of the United States and its
officers, the question may arise whether that order was issued in good
faith and for the purposes declared upon its face, or whether it was a
pretext used for the purpose pf assisting in the overthrow of the
Queen's Government and the ultimate annexation of Hawaii to the
United States.
In reference to this last suggestion, the committee, upon the evidence
as it appears in their report (which they believe is a full, fair, and
impartial statement of the facts attending and precedent to the landing
of the troops), agree that the purposes of Capt. Wiltse and of Minister
Stevens were only those which were legitimate, viz, the preservation
of law and order to the extent of preventing a disturbance of the
public peace which might, in the absence of the troops, injuriously
affect the rights of the American citizens resident in Honolulu.
The troops from the Boston having rightfully and lawfully entered
Honolulu, and having carried with them the protection of the laws of the
United States for their citizens who otherwise were left without the protection of law, it was the right of the United States that they should
remain there until a competent chief executive of Hawaii should have
been installed in authority to take upon himself the civil power and to
execute the necessary authority to provide for the protection of all the
rights of citizens of the United States then in Honolulu, whether such
rights were secured by treaty or were due to them under the laws of
Hawaii.. It was the further right of the officers representing the United
States in Hawaii to remain there with the troops until all the conditions
were present to give full assurance of security to the rights of all the
citizens of the United States then in Honolulu.
Before the landing of the troops a committee of safety had been
organized that sent a request to the commander of the Boston that
troops should be landed for the purpose of preserving the public peace.
To this request no response was made, and later in the day the commander of the Boston was informed that the committee of safety had
withdrawn its request and then desired that no troops should be landed.
But, disregarding all the action of the committee of safety and acting
only upon his sense of duty to the people of the United States who were
in Honolulu, Capt. Wiltse came to the conclusion that the troops should
be landed, and he put them in a state of preparation for that purpose
by lowering the boats, filling the cartridge belts of the men, and supplying them with proper accouterments for a stay on shore. After these
preparations had been completed Minister Stevens went on board the
ship (on Monday), and had an interview with Capt. Wiltse. The evidence shows that this interview related alone to the question of the preservation of law and order in Hawaii and the protection of Americans
in their treaty rights. It seems that neither Minister Stevens nor Capt.
Wiltse then fully comprehended the fact that the United States had
the right, of its own authority, to send the troopson shore for the purpose of supplying to American citizens resident there the protection of
law, which had been withdrawn or annulled, because of the fact that
there was then anl interregnuin in the executivedepartment of the Government of Hawaii. The rights of the United States at that moment
were greater than they were supposed to be by Minister Stevens or
Capt. Wiltse, and they were not the result of treaty rights or obligations, but of that unfailing right to give protection to citizens of the




VIII


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


United States in any country where they may be found when the
local authorities have, through their own mismanagement or contrivance, rendered nugatory the power of the government toperform its
proper duties in the protection of their lives, property, and peace.
A further statement of ascertained facts may be necessary in order
to bring out more clearly the situation in Hawaii on Saturday, the
14th day of January, and to render more conspicuous the justification
of the United States in entering with its troops upon the soil of Hawaii
for the protection of all the rights of its citizens.
On Saturday afternoon arid Sunday earnest and decisive steps were
being taken by the people of Honolulu who were most prominent in
social influence and in commerce and the professions to arm the people
who resented the disloyalty of the Queen to the constitution and to
install a new executive head of the Government. This movement had
resulted in the organization of a committee of safety that proposed a
programme for the purpose of inaugurating a provisional government.
This was an open, public movement, which the Queen took no steps to
suppress. No arrests were made, and even the apprehension of arrests
seems to have been almost entirely absent from the minds of the people
engaged in this movement. An effort was made to divert those people
from their purpose, on Monday morning, by the Queen and her ministers, who caused the following notice to be posted on the streets of Honolulu:
" BY AUTHORITY.
"Her Majesty's ministers desire to express their appreciation for the
quiet and order which have prevailed in this community since the
events of Saturday, and are authorized to say that the position taken
by Her Majesty in regard to the promulgation of a new constitution
was under the stress of her native subjects.
"Authority is given for the assurance that any changes desired in
the fundamental law of the land will be sought only by the methods
provided in the constitution itself.
"Her Majesty's ministers request all citizens to accept the assurance
of Her Majesty in the same spirit in which it is given."
This paper purported to be signed by the Queen and her ministers,
Samuel Parker, minister of foreign affairs; W. H. Cornwell, minister
of finance; John F. Colburn, minster of the interior; and A. P. Peterson, attorney-general.
The Queen did not sign it in her official character by affixing the
letter R to her name, and the tenor of the paper indicates that it was,
in fact, the act of her ministers, to which she had not given her royal
assent and pledge. This paper in itself contains undeniable evidence
that the Queen had instituted a coup d'etat o0n Saturday by the promulgation of "a new constitution," as far, at least, as she could bind
herself by such an act, and that she offered the excuse for this revolt
against the existing constitution which she had sworn to support, that
she acted "under stress of her native subjects."
Passing by the fact that the existence of this "stress " is not established by any satisfactory evidence, the reference to it in this proclamation discloses her-willing connection with the purpose to disfranchise
her foreign-born subjects, that being the effect of the provisions of the
"new constitution" that she in fact promulgated, so far as she could,
but hesitated to swear to for the want of sufficient support from " her
native subjects." The assurance given that future efforts "to change"




HAWAIIAN tSLANDS.


tX


the constitution of 1887 should be conducted only in the method therein
prescribed, was no assurance that her foreign-born subjects Should be
protected in their vital liberties. To the reverse, it was a continuing
threat that they should be disfranchised.and placed at the mercy of
racial aggression, backed by the power of the crown. The declarations
of the Queen made in person to Minister Willis, on three occasions,
and at long intervals of time after the lapse of nine months of sedate
reflection, show that this assurance, given in fact by her ministers, was
only a thin disguise of her real purpose to drive out the white population and confiscate their property, and, if need be, to destroy their
lives. The people made no mistake as to her animosity toward them,
and proceeded in the same orderly manner, for which the ministers
gave them thanks in this proclamation, to designate an executive
head of the Government in place of the abdicated Queen, the abdication being completed and confirmed by the only authentic expression
of the popular will, and by the recognition of the supreme court of
Hawaii.
Another fact of importance connected with the situation at that time
is that a committee of law and order, consisting of supporters of the
Queen, had on Monday morning posted in public places in Honolulu
the following call for a public meeting and explanation of the purposes
of the Queen in abrogating the constitution of 1887 and in substituting
one which she desired and attempted to promulgate by their authority
as the organic law of the land. This proclamation was printed in the
Hawaiian language, and a translation of it is appended to this report.
It was printed in an extra edition of a newspaper called the Ka Leo O
Ka Lahui, published in Honolulu in the Hawaiian language. "The
stress of her native subjects," which is mentioned by the Queen in the
proclamation which was posted in English on the morning of January
16, is evidently expressed in the terms of this announcement and call,
anti it shows that it was based upon racial distinction and prejudice
entirely, and indicates the feeling of resentment and controversy which,
if carried into effect as the Queen proposed to carry it into effect under
the constitution which she intended to proclaim, would have resulted
in the destruction of the rights of property and lives of those persons
who were styled "missionaries" and their posterity, from whom Hawaii
had derived her enlightened civilization, Christianity, constitution,
laws, progress, wealth and position amongst the nations of the earth.
This was a threat of dangerous significance, and it shows the spirit
of the controversy that was then pervading the minds of the people of
Honolulu, and illustrates how easy it was to foment strife that would
result in the worst of evils, in a community thus divided and thus
excited. The abuse of the missionaries and missionary party in this
call shows that the Queen and her immediate followers haSl concentrated
their efforts upon the disfranchisement of all white people in Hawaii,
and the return of the Government to that condition of debasement from
which these very people and their fathers had relieved it.
The second paragraph in this call is as follows:
"THE VOICE OF THE CHIEF.
"On the afternoon of Saturday last the voice of the Sacred Chief of
Hawaii, Liliuokalani, the tabued one, speaking as follows:
"' O, ye people who love the Chief, I hereby say to you, I am now
ready to proclaim the new constitution for my Kingdom, thinking that
it would be successful, but behold obstacles have arisen! Therefore




X


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


I say unto you, loving people, go with good hope and do not be dis.
turbed or troubled in your minds. Because, within the next few days
now coming, I will proclaim the new constitution.
"'The executive officers of the law (the cabinet) knew the errors in
this new constitution, but they said nothing.
"'Therefore, 1 hope that the thing which you, my people, so much
want will be accomplished; it also is my strong desire.'"
Here is a direct accusation by the Queen against her cabinet, all of
whom, with one exception, were white men, that they had misled her
as to the effect of the constitution, and had failed to point out errors in
it which, as a pretext, led to its rejection by them, causing them 'to
refuse at the last moment to join with her in its promulgation. This
call was, in fact, a new promise which was made by the Queen, with the
evident consent of her immediate native followers, that within the
next few days now coling she would proclaim the new constitution,
notwithstanding her failure to give it a successful promulgation on the
preceding Saturday. The intensity of the Queen's opposition to the
missionaries and the white people was caused by her intention that the
Kingdom should return to its former absolute character, and that the
best results of civilization in Hawaii should be obliterated.
Civilization and constitutional government in Hawaii are the foster
- children of the American Christian missionaries. It can not be justly
charged to the men and women who inaugurated this era of humanity,
light, and justice in those islands that either they or their posterity
or their followers, whether native or foreign, have faltered in their
devotion to their exalted purposes. They have not pursued any devious
course in their conduct, nor have they. done any wrong or harm to the
Hawaiian people or their native rulers. They have not betrayed any
trust confided to them, nor have they encouraged any vice or pandered
to any degrading sentiment or practice among those people. Among the
native Hawaiians. where they found paganism in the most abhorrent
forms of idolatry, debauchery, disease, ignorance and cruelty 75 years
ago, they planted and established, with the free consent and eager
encouragement of those natives and without the shedding of blood, the
Christian ordinance of marriage, supplanting polygamy; a reverence
for the character of women and a respect for their rights; the Christian
Sabbath and freedom of religious faith and worship, as foundations of
society and of the state; universal education, including the kings and
the peasantry; temperance in place of the orgies of drunkenness that
were all-pervading; and the separate holdings of lands upon which the
people built their homes. In doing these benevolent works the American missionary did not attempt to assume the powers and functions of
political government. As education, enlightenment, and the evident
benefits of civilization revealed to those in authority the necessity of
wise and faithful counsels in building up and regulating the government to meet those new conditions, the kings invited some of the best
qualified and most trusted of these worthy men to aid them in developing and conducting the civil government. As a predicate for this
work they freely consented to and even suggested the giving up of
some of their absolute powers and to place others under the constraint
of constitutional limitations. They created an advisory council and a
legislature and converted Hawaii from an absolute despotism into a
land of law. The cabinet ministers thus chosen from the missionary
element were retained in office during very long periods, thus establishing the confidence of the kings and the people in their integrity,




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


XI


wisdom, and loyalty to the Government. No charge of defection or dishonesty was ever made against any of these public servants during the
reign of the Kamehamehas, nor indeed at any time. They acquired
property in moderate values by honest means, and labored to exhibit
to the people the advantages of industry, frugality, economy, and
thrift.
The progressive elevation of the country and of the people from the
very depravity of paganism into an enlightened and educated commonwealth and the growth of their industries and wealth will be seen at a
glance in the statements of the most important events and in the tables
showing the most important results of their work and influence, which
are set forth in the evidence accompanying this report. This array of
undisputed facts shows that, with Christianity and education as the
basis, there has come over Hawaiithe most rapid and successful iniprovement in political, industrial, and commercial conditions that has marked
the course of any people in Christendom.
In the message of President Tyler to Congress he says:
"The condition of those islands has excited a good deal of interest,
which is increasing by every successive proof that their inhabitants are
making progress in civilization and becoming more and more competent
to maintain regular and orderly government. They lie in the Pacific
Ocean, much nearer to this continent than the other, and have become
an important place for the refitment and provisioning of American and
European vessels.
"'Owing to their locality and to the course of the winds which prevail in this quarter of the world the Sandwich Islands are the stopping
place for almost all vessels passing from continent to continent across
the Pacific Ocean. They are especially resorted to by the great numbers
of vessels of the United States which are engaged in the whale fishery
in those seas. The number of vessels of all sorts and the amount of
property owned by citizens of the United States which are found in those
islands in the course of a year are stated probably with sufficient
accuracy in the letter of the agents.
"'Just emerging from a state of barbarism, the Government of the
islands is as yet feeble; but its dispositions appear to be just and
pacific, and it seems anxious to improve the condition of its people by
the introduction of knowledge, of religious and moral institutions,
means of education, and the arts of civilized life."'
In the House of Representatives this subject was referred to the
Committee on Foreign Affairs, and Hon. John Q. Adams, in concluding his report upon the subject, says:
"It is a subject of cheering contemplation to the friends of human
improvement and virtue that, by the mild and gentle influence of
Christian charity, dispensed by humble missionaries of the gospel,
unarmed with secular power, within the last quarter of a century the
people of this group of islands have been converted from the lowest
debasement of idolatry to the blessings of the Christian gospel; united
under one balanced government; rallied to the fold of civilization by a
written language and constitution, providing security for the rights of
persons, property, and mind, and invested with all the elements of right
and power which can entitle them to be acknowledged by their brethren
of the human race as a separate and independent community. To
the consummation of their acknowledgment the people of the North




Xtt   -               AWAIIAN ISLANDS.
American:Inion are urged by an interest of their own deeper than
that of any other portion of the inhabitants of the earth-by a virtual
right of conquest, not over the freedom of their brother man by the
brutal arm of physical power, but over the mind and heart by the
celestial panoply of the gospel of peace and love."
It can not be other than a proud reflection of the American people
that the free institutions of the United States gave origin and impulsive
zeal, as well as guidance, to the good men who laid these foundations
of civil government in Hawaii upon written constitutions supported
by the oaths of those in authority and loyally sustained by those of
the people who are virtuous and intelligent. Nor can the American
people condemn the firm adhesion of those whose rights are guaranteed
by constitutional law in Hawaii to the demand that is now made for
the maintenance of its permanent integrity. If nothing but a decent
respect for our national example was in question, if there was no
question in Hawvaii that concerned the people of the United States
except that of a relapse of that Government into absolute monarchy, if
there was no degradation of society involved in this falling away, no
destruction of property and liberty in contemplation, there would
still be enough in the conditions now presented there to excite the
most anxious interest of our people. Citizens of the United States with
wisdom, charity, Christian faith, and a love of constitutional government, have patiently, laboriously, and honestly built up Hawaii into a
civilized power under a written constitution, and they can justly
claim the sympathy and assistance of all civilized people in resisting
its destruction, either to gratify a wanton lust of absolute power on
the part of the Queen, or the abuse of its authority in fostering vice
and rewarding crime. The facts of recent history present broadly and
distinctly the question between an absolute and corrupt monarchy in
Hawaii, and a government in which the rights and liberties guaranteed
by a written constitution shall be respected and preserved. The facts
do not show that the people who built up this constitutional system
and have based upon it wholesome laws and a well balanced and well
guarded plan of administration have had any desire to abrogate the
organic laws, corrupt the statute laws, or to dethrone the Queen. In
every phase of their dealings with these questions their course has
been conservative, and the defense of their lives, liberty, andproperty,
and the honest administration of the government has been the real
motive of their actions. They are not, therefore, to be justly classed
as conspirators against the Government. That they turn their thoughts
toward the United States and desire annexation to this country could
not be denied without imputing to them the loss of the sentiment of
love and reverence for. this Republic that is utterly unknown to our
people.
On Monday, the 16th of January, 1893, Hawaii was passing through
the severe ordeal of a trial which was conducted by the people who
arrayed themselves on the side of the Queen and those who were organized in opposition to her revolutionary purposes. The Queen seems to
have abandoned the controversy into the hands of the people, and made
no effort to suppress the meeting of the citizens opposed to her revolutionary proceedings by calling out her troops to disperse the meeting
or to arrest its leaders. Both the meetings were quiet and orderly, but
the meeting at the arsenal was intensely earnest, and men were heard to
express their opinions freely and without interruption at both meetings, and they came to their resolutions without disturbance. Whea




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. -.o


XIII


these meetings dispersed, the Queen'^ effort to reject the constitution
of 1887 had been approved by the one meeting held on the palace
grounds and composed almost entirely of native Kanakas; the ocher
meeting had-resolved to establish a provisional government, and formel
a committee to proceed with its organization. The Queen, though thus
strongly indorsed by her native-born subjects, as she calls them, did
not venture any arrests of the alleged revolutionists, but, evidently
conscious that the revolution which she had endeavored to set on foot
had failed of efficient support, she did not use her troops or the police
or any other power in the direction of asserting her royal authority.
The meeting of the people at the arsenal was followed by organization,
the arming of the citizens, the strong array of forces, and a determined
spirit of success which has materialized into an established government
that has continued to exist for more than a year, practically without
any opposition in Hawaii, and with the recognition of many great
powers, including the United States. These events show, beyond reasonable dispute, the acceptance by the people of Hawaii of the judgment -and determination of the meeting at the arsenal that the Queen
had abdicated, that her authority had departed, that she and her
ministers had submitted to the inevitable, and that they retained no
longer any substantial ground of hope or expectation that the Queen
would be restored to her former office.
The question whether such a state of affairs as is shown by the
undisputed facts in this case constitute an abdication and created an
interregnum was passed upon in England with more care. because of
the serious results that followed the decision, than seems to have been
bestowed upon a like controversy in any other country.
The people of Great Britain have many liberties that are firmly
established in the traditions of that country, and on many occasions
they have asserted their rights, as the basis of governmental power, with
great determination and success. In 1688, when James II was on the
throne, his severe conduct, exercised through the judiciary of the Kingdom and in other ways, and a strong adhesion to the Catholic religion,
caused the people of Great Britain to accuse him of an intention to violate their unwritten constitution. He was a great and powerful king,
and had accomplished very much for the glory and honor of England.
But the people of England held him to an observance of the spirit of
his oath of loyalty to the constitution of that country, and, when they
became satisfied that he had made an effort to subvert it, they in their
Parliament passed upon the question of his abdication and held that
his intention and effort to violate the constitution robbed him of his
title to the crown and opened the door to the establishment of a new
dynasty. Blackstone, in speaking of these events, says:
"King James II succeeded to the throne of his ancestors, and
might have enjoyed it during the remainder of his life but for his own
infatuated conduct which, with other concurring circumstances, brought
on the revolution in 1688.
"The true gTound and principle upon which that memorable event
proceeded was an entirely new case in politics, which had never
before happened in our history-the abdication of the reigning monarch and the vacancy of the throne thereupon. It was not a defeasance of the right of succession and a new limitation of the crown by
the King and both Houses of Parliament; it was the act of the nation
alone upon the conviction that there was no king in being. For, in a
full assembly of the lords and commons, met in A convention upon the




XIV


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


supposition of this vacancy, both houses came to this resolution: 'That
King James II, having endeavored to subvert the constitution of the
Kingdom by ireaking the original contract between King and people;
and, by the advice of Jesuits and other wicked persons, having violated
the fundamental law and having withdrawn himself out of this Kingdom has abdicated the Government, and that the throne is hereby
vacant."'
Proceeding further, this eminent jurist says:
"For whenever a question arises between the society at large and
any magistrate vested with powers originally delegated by that society it must be decided by the voice of the society itself; there is not
upon earth any other tribunal to resort to. And that these consequences were fairly deduced from these facts our ancestors have solemnly determined in a full parliamentary convention representing the
whole society."
Further quoting from Blackstone, he says:
"They held that this misconduct of King James amounted to an
endeavor to subvert the constitution and not to an actual subversion
or total dissolution of the Government, according to the principles of
Mr. Locke, which would have reduced the society almost to a state of
nature; would have leveled all distinctions of honor, rank, offices, and
property; would have annihilated the sovereign power, and in consequence have repealed all positive laws, and would have left the people
at liberty to have erected a new system of State upon a new foundation
of polity. They therefore very prudently voted it to amount to no
more than an abdication of the Government and a consequent vacancy
of the throne, whereby the Government was allowed to subsist though
the executive magistrate was gone, and the kingly office to remain
though King James was no longer King. And thus the constitution
was kept entire, which upon every sound principle of government must
otherwise have fallen to pieces had so principal and constituent a part
as the royal authority been abolished or even suspended.
"This single postulatum, the vacancy of the throne, being once established the rest that was then done followed almost of course. For, if
the throne be at any tine vacant (which may happen by other means
besides that of abdication, as if all the blood-royal should fail, without any successor appointed by Parliament)-if, I say, a vacancy, by
any means whatsoever, should happen, the right of disposing of this
vacancy seems naturally to result to the Lords and Commons, the trustees and representatives of the nation. For there are no other hands
in which it can so properly be intrusted; and there is A necessity of its
being intrusted somewhere, else the whole frame of government must
be dissolved and perish."
The principle on which this decision in regard to the abdication of
King James II restsis still stronger when it is applied to persons who
are citizens of the United States but who reside in Hawaii, and by
the constitution and laws of Hawaii are admitted into an active participation in the conduct of government, both as officeholders and as
qualified electors. If they, in connection with the native or naturalized subjects of the Kingdom of Hawaii, unite in demanding the preservation of their constitutional rights, there should be no captious or




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


X~V


technical objections taken to the assertion of that right, or to the manner of its exercise.
In reference to all citizens of the United States residing in Hawaii
and not actual members or officers of that Government, the' spirit of
our laws, in accordance with the principles of the Constitution and the
traditions of the people, should be applied to their protection, when it
is the duty of the United States to protect them, and especially are
they entitled to the full advantage of the protection that is afforded.
under that doctrine of personal liberty and security which upholds the
authority of governments de facto. When such a government arises
out of alleged abuses and grievances and is set up in good faith by the
intelligent classes to succeed a monarchy in a state that is the only
monarchy in a sisterhood of many republics, the rules governing its
recognition are not those that seem to control in cases where the state
is a sole republic surrounded by an environment of monarchies.
In Europe, where governmental successions have no relation to the
will of the people, every presumption that can be made to support the
regal system is adopted and enforced with rigid care. The old conditions are presumed to exist in a regal government until the new government has accomplished a complete revolution and until nothing
remains to be done to secure an uninterrupted and unembarrassed
installation of its authority. Those presumptions are all in favor of
the crown and are easily applied in practical use, as the crown is a
political unit and acts with certainty in the assertion of its claims.
When the rights asserted against the crown are set up by the people,
or for the people, the act is necessarily a representative act, and the
authority of the alleged representative is severely questioned. Indeed,
it is not considered as existing in European countries until, through
bloodshed or an overwhelming exhibition of forces, its acknowledgment
is literally compelled. The reverse of this rule should obtain in that
part of the world where it is held, universally, that the right to govern
depends upon the consent of the governed and not upon a divine inheritance of power. In a controversy like that in Hawaii the presumption
is in favor of those who unite to assert the constitutional rights, of the
people, that they are acting in good faith, and that they are not seeking. personal aggrandizement, but the good of the people. When such
a popular movement engages the evident support of those whom the
people have trusted for their integrity to an extent that inspires a just
confidence of success a sufficient foundation exists, at least, for a goverftment de facto; and it is no more necessary to its validity that every
possible obstacle to its final success has been removed than it would be
necessary, on the other hand, to the permanency of the crown that
every rebellious subject of the Queen had been slain or banished and
their estates had been confiscated.
-The supporters of Liliuokalani seem to be forced into the attitude of
claiming that it is of no consequence that she may have forfeited her
right to the crown and had placed it in the power of the people lawfully to claim that this was an abdication, unless the people had overcome and removed every vestige of her power before they proclaimed
the Provisional Government. Her known purpose to press the absolute powers claimed by her in the new constitution to the extent of
the banishment or death of the white population seems not to be permitted to excuse the action of the people in displacing her, if they had
not captured her small force of policemen and soldiers before the
American minister had recognized the Provisional Government.




f


-  VI                  HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Liliuokalani did not seem to take this narrow view of the revolution
she had inaugiftated.
The banishment or death of the white people and the confiscation
of their estates was the final decree recorded in the Queen's heart and
mind, as she freely stated to Minister Willis, and until this cruel work
had been accomplished she held that her policy of revolution would
be a failure. There is some ground for hope that these were not her
sincere purposes or wishes but that in giving expression to them she
was "playing a part." As opposed to such purposes, or to a Queen
who could imagine them in the presence of the constitutional protection given to the rights and liberties of the people throughout this
hemisphere, Amiericans should not hesitate in the support of a government de facto, set up to oppose her, because she had not made a formal
surrender of a place where a few soldiers and policemen had been
stationed, who were powerless to hold it against the people then under
arms. It was an act of mercy to her and her retainers that they were
not forced into the commission of acts of violence. An interregnum
existed in the executive Government of Hawaii, which was caused by
the effort of the Queen to destroy the constitution of 1887, and by the
act of the people in accepting her will for the completed coup dVWtat,
and, in making that the occasion for supplying the executive department of the Government with a chief.
A careful investigation has failed to show that any conspiracy now
exists that is directed to the virtual displacement of the Provisional Government. The personal efforts of the Queen seem to have been directed
toward a provision for a safe and comfortable life, free from the anxieties of office and "the stress of her native subjects." Her power of
attorney to Paul Newman and his mission to the United States indicate
a reliance on the "arts of peace" rather than of war for indemnity for
the past and security for the future. The opinions, or sentiments,
expressed by her in the three interviews she had with Mr. Willis, in
which she uttered the severest denunciations against the white race in
Hawaii, and declared her willingness, if not her purpose, to confiscate
their estates and to banish or to destroy them, while they are a seeming
expression of the lofty indignation of an offended ruler, axe so unsuited
to the character of a queen crowned by a Christian and civilized people,
and so out of keeping with her character as a woman who had received
kindly recognition and personal regard from other good and refined
ladies, that they shock all right-minded people in Christendom. The
Government of the United States should willingly forbear to regard
these utterances as her official expression of such designs upon the
lives and liberties of those whom she would find in her power, upon her
restoration to the throne, and accept them as a means adopted by her
to convince Mr. Willis that her restoration to the throne was impossible, and was not in accordance with her wishes.
The President, on the first intimation of these harsh declarations of
the Queen, at once laid them before Congress, and abandoned the
further exercise of his good offices to bring about areconciliation between
her and those who were conducting and supporting the Provisional
Government.
Mr. Willis, however, regarding his instructions as continuing to
require his intercession beyond the point where the President considered that it should cease, held a second and third interview with Liliuokalani. After these interviews had closed, the Queen being still
firm in her course, Mr. Carter, a trusted friend, obtained her signature to a pledge of amnesty, and made that the basis of his proposition




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


XVII


to Mr. Dole for the abandonment of the Provisional Government, which
was summarily refused. This closed that incident. Mr. Willis, in
what he did, obeyed what he conceived to be his instructions, and being
so distant from Washington, it is a matter of regret, but not of surprise,
that there was an apparent want of harmony between his action' in continuing his interviews with Liliuokalani after the President had determined that the full duty of the Government had been performed.
The attitude of Liliuokalani at the conclusion of this proceeding is
that of waiting for a pleasant retirement from the cares of public life,
rather than of waiting for an opportunity to tlring about a hostile collision with the people who support the new order of government in
Hawaii.
In dealing with a grave subject, now for the first time presented in
America, we must consider the conditions of public sentiment as to
monarchic government, and we shall derive also material help from the
light of English history. In the Western Hemisphere, except as to
the colonial relation, which has become one of mere political alliance
chiefly for commercial reasons, and does not imply in any notable
case absolute subjection to imperial or royal authority, royalty no
longer exists. When a crown falls, in any kingdom of the Western
Hemisphere, it is pulverized, and when a scepter departs, it departs
forever; and American opinion can not sustain any American ruler in
the attempt to restore them, no matter how virtuous and sincere the
reasons may be that seem to justify him. There have been heathen
temples in the older States in this hemisphere where the bloody orgies
of pagan worship and sacrifice have crimsoned history with shame; and
very recently such temples have been erected in the United States to
abuse Christianity by the use of its sacred name and ritual. When
the arms of invaders, or mobs of the people, have destroyed these
temples, no just indignation at the cruelties that may have been perpetrated in their destruction could possibly justify their restoration.
It is a great blessing to this Western World that thenations are tobe
spared the calamities which Blackstone describes as "imbruing the
kingdom of England in blood and confusion," growing out of claims ot
succession to the crown. In almost every reign prior to'that of the
present house of Hanover, the lives and property of the people of
England, amid the greatest cruelties, have been sacrificed in settling
pretensions to the crown. It was these conflicts and this distress ot
innocent sufferers that caused the people to claim through the judges
the protection of the doctrine, that service rendered to the king who
held the scepter was lawful, although he was not rightfully in possession
of the crown. No greater liberty of the people was ever devised or
granted than the right of protection under a king defacto against aking
de jure.
Defacto governments, when they seek to supply the gap created by
an interregnum, are favored in the international law, and when they
are also based on the right of popular government in conflict with regal
government, or to prevent its reestablishment, once it has disappeared
in a State of the Western Hemisphere, it is so rooted and established in
the foundations of the rightful authority to rule that it is justly to be
ranked among the cardinal liberties of the people.
This doctrine is not new, and yet it is modern in England, where the
right to the crown and its prerogatives have bled the people for fifteen
centuries. The stringent doctrine that a defacto government must be
established firmly and in all respects before it is entitled to recognition
8, Rep. 227 —u




XVIHI


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


by another sovereign and independent power had no application to
the facts and circumstances that attended the recent revolution in
Hawaii; moreover, if the revolution there had been directed agaijst
the entire government and for the overthrow of the constitution of 1887,
and all monarchic rule, if it was a sincere, strong, earnest and successful movement of the people for the recovery of their natural right to
rule themselves, they should not be narrowly questioned and held to
rigid account for a proper and discreet performance of every act necessary to their resumption of their natural rights, but all America must
unite in the declaration that, under such circumstances, the presumptions of law should be favorable to such movements, rather than
unfriendly to the establishment by the people of the foundations of their
liberties, based upon their right to govern themselves.
The parliament of Hawaii had been prorogued by the Queen on the
14th day of January, and could not be again assembled under the constitution, except by the chief executive authority. Until that authority was supplied in some way, therefore, the Legislature could not be
reconvened. It was the establishment of that authority, the chief
executive head of the nation, which was the question at issue, and
when that was decided, an appeal to the Legislature of Hawaii for its
confirmation or ratification was not only unnecessary, but might have
resulted in a counter revolution. It was, therefore, in the interest of
peace, good order, and right government, that the people of Hawaii,
who were unopposed in their process of organizing an executive head
for the Government, should proceed to do so as they did, regularly and
in an orderly, firm, and successful manner. Thus the abdication of Liliuokalani was confirmed and has so continued from that day to this.
The Government of the United States has on various occasions recognized the succession to the executive authority as residing in the Provisional Government initiated at that public meeting at the arsenal and
consummated on the 17th day of January by public proclamation.
Then, on the 17th day of January, according to the recognition of the
United States, from which there has been no dissent or departure, the
interregnum ceased, and the executive head of the Government of
Hawaii was established. Until this was completed, on the 17th (lay of
January, by the proclamation of the Provisional Government, the
United States was still charged, under every principle of law and justice and under the highest obligation of duty, to keep her forces in
Honolulu, and to enforce, in virtue of her sovereign authority, the
rightwof her citizens under the treaty obligations and also under the
laws of Hawaii, relating to the safety of person and property and the
rights of industry, commerce, and hospitality in their free pursuit and
enjoyment. And when the Provisional Government was thus established, it rested with the lnited States to determine whether the Government of Hawaii was so far rehabilitated and so safely established
that these rights of her citizens could be intrusted to its keeping. The
recognition of such a state of affairs, within a country whose executive
department has been made vacant in consequence of domestic strife, is
quite a separate and different proceeding, both in form and effect, from
the recognition of the political independence of a government that is
complete in its organization. In the latter case, the recgllition excludes
all right of interference in its domestic affairs, while il the former it is
the right and duty of supplying the protection of law to the citizen
that makes interference necessary as well as lawful.
The independenlce of Hawaii as a sovereign State had been long
recognized by the United States, and this unhappy occasion did not




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


XIX


suggest the need of renewing that declaration. The question )resented
in Honolulu on and after the 12th of January, 1893, was whether tile
Queen continued to be the executive head of the Governmeet of
lawaii. That was a question of fact which her conduct and that of
her people placed in perilous doubt until it was decided by the proclmnation of a new executive. Pending that question there was no
responsible executive government in Hawaii. On the 17th of January
that doubt was resolved to the satisfaction of the American minister,
and of all other representatives of foreign governments in Hawaii, in
favor of the Provisional Government. This recognition did not give
to the Government of Hawaii the legal or moral right to expel the
troops of any government, stationed in Honolulu in the period of interregnum, until it had so firmly established its authority as to give to
foreigners the security to provide for which these troops had been
landed. Good faith and an honest respect for the rights of friendly
nations would certainly require the withdrawal of all further interference with the domestic affairs of Hawaii as soon as that government
had provided security that was reasonably sufficient for the protection
of the citizens of the United States. But the Government of the
United States had the right to keep its troops in Honolulu until these
conditions were performed, and the Government of Hawaii could certainly acquiesce in such a policy without endangering its independence
or detracting from its dignity. This was done, and the troops from
the Boston camped on shore for several months. The precise hour
'when or the precise conditions under which the American minister
recognized the Provisional Government is not a matter of material
importance. It was his duty, at the earliest safe period, to assist by
his recognition in the termination of the interregnum, so that citizens
of the United States might be safely remitted to the care of that Government for. the security of their rights. As soon as he was convinced
that the Provisional Government was secure against overthrow it wa&
his duty to recognize the rehabilitated State. Whether this was done
an hour or two sooner or later could make no substantial difference
as to his rights or duties, if he was satisfied that the movement was
safe against reversal. If no question of the annexation of Hawaii to
- the United States had existed, the conduct of the American minister
in giving official recognition to the Provisional Government would not
have been the subject of adverse criticism. But the presence of that
question and his anxious advocacy of annexation did not relieve him
from the duty or abridge his right to call for the troops on the Boston
to protect the citizens of the United States during ain interregnum in
the. office of chief executive of Hawaii. They were not to be put into
a state of outlawry and peril if the minister had been opposed to
annexation, nor could his desire on that subject in anyway affect their
rights or his duty. He gave to them the protection they had the
right to demand, and, in respect of his action up to this point, so far
as it related to Hawaii, his opinions as to annexation have not affected
the attitude of the U. S. Government, and the committee find no cause
of censure either against Minister Stevens or Capt. Wiltse, of the
Boston.
Afterward, on the 1st day of February, 1893, the American minister
caused the flag of the United States to be raised on the Government
building in Honolulu, and assumed and declared a protectorate over
that nation in the name of the United States. This act on the part of
our minister was without authority, aud was void for want of power.
It was disavowed by Secretary Foster and rebuked by Secretary




XX


HAWAILAN ISLANDS.


Gresham, and the order to abandon the protectorate and haul down
the flag was in accordance with the duty and honor of the United
States. To haul down the flag of the United States was only an order
to preserve its honor.
The diplomatic officers of the United States in Hawaii have the right
to much larger liberty of action in respect to the internal affairs of that
country than would be the case with any other country with which
we have no peculiar or special relations. In our diplomatic correspondence with Hawaii and in the various treaties, some of them treaties of annexation, which have been signed and discussed, though not
ratified, from time to time, there has been manifested a very near relationship between the two governments. The history of Hawaii in its
progress, education, development, aud government, and in Christianity,
has been closely identified with that of the United States-so closely,
indeed, that the United States has not at any time hesitated to declare
that it would permit no intervention in the affairs of Hawaii by any
foreign government which might tend to disturb the relations with the
United States, or to gain any advantages there over the Americans
who may have settled in that country. The United States has assumed
and deliberately maintained toward Hawaii a relation which is entirely
exceptional, and has no parallel in our dealings with any other people.
The justification for this attitude is not a matter with which the present inquiry is necessarily connected, but its existence furnishes a good
excuse, if excuse is needed, for a very lively concern on the part of our
diplomatic representatives in everything that relates to the progress of
that people.
The causes that have led to this peculiar situation are altogether
apparent. They are in every sense honorable, just, and benevolent.
One nation can not assume such an attitude toward another, especially
if the latter is, by contrast, small, weak, and dependent upon the good
will or forbearance of the world for its existence, without giving to it
a guaranty of external and internal security.
The attitude of the United States toward Hawaii, thus voluntarily
assumed, gives to Hawaii the right to regard it as such a guaranty.
In the absence of a policy to establish a colonial system and of any
disposition for territorial aggrandizement, the Government of the United
States looked with approbation and gave encouragement to the labors
and influence of their citizens in Hawaii, in laying the groundwork of
a free and independent government there which. in its principles and
in the distribution of powers, should be like our own, and ultimately
become republican in form. This has been the unconcealed wish of the
people of the United States, in which many of the native Hawaiians
have participated.
Observing the spirit of the Monroe doctrine, the United States, in the
beginning of our relations with Hawaii, made a firm and distinct declaration of the purpose to prevent the absorption of Hawaii oP the political
control of that country by any foreign power. Without stating the
reasons for this policy, which included very important commercial and
military considerations, the attitude of the United States toward Hawaii
was in moral effect that of a friendly protectorate. It has been a settled
policy of the United States that if it should turn out that Hawaii, for
any cause, should not be able to maintain an independent government,
that country would be encouraged in its tendency to gravitate toward
political union with this country.
The treaty relations between Hawaii and the United States, as fixed
by several conventions that have been ratified, and by other negotia



1AAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Xit


ti1ns, have been characterized by a sentiment of close reciprocity. In
addition to trade relations of the highest advantage to Hawaii, the
United States las so far interfered with the internal policy of Hawaii
as to secure an agreement from that Government restricting the disposal
of bays and harbors and the crown lands to other countries, and has
secured exclusive privileges in Pearl Harbor of great importance to
this Government.
This attitude of the two governments and the peculiar friendship of
the two peoples, together with the advantages given to Hawaii in commerce, induced a large and very enterprising class of people from the
United States to migrate to those islands and to invest large sums of
money in the cultivation of sugar and rice, and in other trade and
industry. The introduction of laborers from Japan and China in great
numbers gave to the governing power in Hawaii a new and very significant importance, and made it necessary, for the protection of the
interests of the white or European people and of the natives, that the
safeguards of the organic law of the Kingdom should be carefully
preserved. In the efforts to secure these guarantees of safe government, no distinction of race was made as to the native or Kanaka population, but Chinese and Japanese were excluded from participation in
the government as voters, or as officeholders.
Apprehen sions of civil disturbance in Hawaii caused the United States
to keep ships of war at Honolulu.for many years past, almost without
intermission, and the instructions that were given to our diplomatic
and consular officers and to the naval commanders on that station went
beyond the customary instructions applicable to other countries. In
most instances, the instructions so given included the preservation of
order and of the peace of the country, as well as the protection and
preservation of the property and of the lives and treaty rights of American citizens.
The circumstances above mentioned, vhich the evidence shows to
have existed, create a new light under which we must examine into the
conduct of our diplomatic and naval officers in respect of the revolution
that occurred in Hawaii in January, 1893. In no sense, and at no time,
has the Government of the United States observed toward the domestic affairs of Hawaii the strict impartiality and the indifference enjoined
by the general law of noninterference, in the absence of exceptional
conditions. We have always exerted the privilege of interference in
the domestic policy of Hawaii to a degree that would not be justified,
under our view of the international law, in reference to the affairs of
Canada, Cuba, or Mexico.
The cause of this departure from our general course of diplomatic
conduct is the recognized fact that Hawaii has been all the time under
a virtual suzerainty of the United States, which is, by an apt and
familiar definition, a paramount authority, not in any actual sense an
actual sovereignty, but a de facto supremacy over the country. This
sense of paramount authority, of supremacy, with the right to intervene in the affairs of Hawaii, has never been lost sight of by the United
States to this day, and it is conspicously manifest in the correspondence
of Mr. Willis with Mr. Dole, which is set forth in the evidence which
accompanies this report.
Another fact of importance in considering the conduct of our diplomatic and naval officers during the revolution of January, 1893, is that
the annexation of Hawaii to the United States has been the subject of
carefiul study and almost constant contemplation among Hawaiians and
their kings iince the beginning of the reign of Kamehameha I. This




XXII


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


has always been regarded by the ruling power in Hawaii as a coveted
and secure retreat-a sort of house of refuge-whenever the exigencies
of fate might compel Hawaii to make her choice between home rule and
foreign domination, either in the form of a protectorate, or of submission to some foreign sovereign.
Hawaii has always desired an escape to a freer government, when
she has to be forced to the point where the surrender of racial pride
and her standing as a nation would be the severe penalty of her
weakness. Hawaiians prefer citizenship in a great republic to the
slavery of subjection to any foreign monarchy. Annexation to the
United States has never been regarded with aversion, or with a sense
of national degradation, by the Hawaiian people. On the contrary, it
has been adopted as a feature of political action by those who have
attempted to recommend themselves to the support of the people in
times of danger.
In the revolution of January, 1893, those who assumed the sovereign
power, declaring that there was an interregnum, made it a conspicuous
part of their avowed purpose to remain in authority until Hawaii
should be annexed to the United States. This was stated as an argument for the creation of a provisional government, without which there
would be less advantage in the change of the situation. Annexation
was an avowed purpose of the Provisional Government, because it
would popularize the movement. No one could project a revolution
in Hawaii for the overthrow of the monarchy, that would not raise
the question among the people of annexation to the United States.
In the diplomatic correspondence of the United States with our ministers to Hawaii, frequent and favorable allusion is made to this subject as a matter of friendly consideration for the advantage of that
country and people, and not as a result that would enhance the wealth
or power of the United States. This treatment of the subject began
very early in the history of Hawaiian civilization, and it was taken up
and discussed by the people of the islands as a topic of patriotic inspiration. It was their habit to celebrate the anniversary of the independence of the United States as a national fete day. So that, there was
no thought of conspiracy against the monarchy in openly favoring the
project of annexation. Whether annexation is wise and beneficial to
both countries is a question that must receive the consideration of both
governments before it can be safely settled.
The testimony taken by the committee discloses the well-considered
opinion of several of our most eminient naval and military officers, that
the annexation of Hawaii is a fact indispensable to the proper defense
and protection of our Western coast and cities. But this is a matter
with which the committee is not especially charged, and reference is
made to these opinions as supporting the statement that all intelligent
men in Hawaii and in the United States, who have taken pains to consider the subject, are convinced that the question is one deserving of
thorough investigation and a correct and friendly decision. The question of annexation, however, is distinctly presented in the proclamation of the Provisional Government as one to be settled by the action
of the Government of the United States.
Commissioners to treat with the United States for the annexation of
Hawaii were sent to Washington immediately upon the adoption and
promulgation of the Provisional Government, and they negotiated and
signed a treaty in conjunction with Mr. Secretary Foster, which was
submitted to the Senate of the United States and was subsequently
withdrawn by the present administratioLn Accompanying that treaty




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


XXIII


was a paper signed by Liliuokalani, i which she stated no objection
to the project of annexation to the United States, but in which she protested earnestly against her dethronement, and alleged that the United
States, through the abuse by its diplomatic and naval officers of the
powers entrusted to them, had virtually compelled her abdication.
The President of the United States, after a further examination of the
subject, concluded that it was his duty to withdraw this annexation
treaty from the Senate for further consideration, and so notified the
Provisional Government through Mr. Willis, our present minister.
The recognition of the Provisional Government was lawful and
authoritative, and has continued without interruption or modification
up to the present time. It may be justly claimed for this act of recognition that it has contributed greatly to the maintenance of peace and
order in Hawaii and to the promotion of the establishment of free, permanent, constitutional government in Hawaii, based upon the consent
of the people.
The complaint by Liliuokalani in the protest that she sent to the
President of the United States and dated the 18th day of January, is
not, in the opinion of the committee, well founded in fact or in justice.
It appears from the evidence submitted with this report that she was in
fact the author and promoter of a revolution in Hawaii which involved
the destruction of the entire constitution, and a breach of her solemn
oath to observe and support it, and it was only after she had ascertained
that she had made a demand upon her native subjects for support in
this movement which they would not give to her, that she, for the time,
postponed her determination to carry this revolution into effect, and
made known her determination to do so as soon as she could feel that
she had the power to sustain the movement.
But the President of the United States, giving attention to Liliuokalani's claim that this Government had alarmed her by the presence of
its troops into the abdication of her crown, believed that it was proper
and necessary in vindication of the honor of the United States to
appoint a commissioner to Hawaii who would make a careful investigation into the facts and send the facts and his conclusions to the President, for his information. The commissioner, Mr. Blount, went to
Hawaii under circumstances of extreme embarrassnmet and executed
his instructions with impartial care to arrive at the truth, and he presented a sincere and instructive report to the President of the United
States, touching the facts, the knowledge of which he thus acquired.
In the agitated state of opinion and feeling in Hawaii at that time, it
was next to impossible to obtain a full, fair, and free declaration in
respect of the facts which attended this revolution, and particularly
was this difficult to obtain from the persons who actively participated
in that movement.
The evidence submitted by the committee, in addition to that which
was presented by Mr. Blount, having been taken under circumstances
more favorable to the development of the whole truth with regard to
the situation, has, in the opinion of the committee, established the fact
that the revolutionary movement in Hawaii originated with Liliuokalani, and was promoted, provided for, and, as she believed, secured by
the passage of the opium bill and the lottery bill through the Legisla
ture, from which she expected to derive a revenue sufficient to secure
the ultimate success of her purpose, which was distinctly and maturely
devised to aboli,.hthe constitution of 1887, and to assume to herself abso.
lute power, free from constitutional restraint of any serious character.




XXIV I.


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.. The fact can not be ignored that this revolutionary movement of
Liliuokalani, which had its development in the selectiol of a new
cabinet to supplant one which had the support of all the conservative
elements in the islands, was set on foot and accomplished during the
absence of the American minister on board the ship Boston during
the ten days which preceded the prorogation of the Legislature. The
astonishment with which this movement was received by the American
emigrants and other white people residing in Hawaii, and its inauguration in the absence of the Boston and of the American minister, show
that those people, with great anxiety, recognized the fact that it was
directed against them and their interests and welfare and that when
it was completed they would become its victims. These convictions
excited the serious apprehensions of all the white people in those
islands that a crisis was brought about in which not only their rights
in Hawaii, and under the constitution, Fere to be injuriously affected,
but that the ultimate result would be that they would be driven from
the islands or, remaining there, would be put at the mercy of those
who chose to prey upon their property. This class of people, who
were intended to be ostracised, supply nine-tenths of the entire tax
receipts of the Kingdom; and they were conscious that the purpose
was to inflict taxation upon them without representation, or else to
confiscate their estates and drive them out of the country. This produced alarm and agitation, which resulted in the counter movement
set on foot by the people to meet and overcome the revolution which
Lilioukalani had projected and had endeavored to accomplish. Her ministers were conscious of the fact that any serious resistance to her revolutionary movement (of which they had full knowledge before they
were ind'ucted into office) would disappoint the expectations of the
Queen and would result in the overthrow of the executive government;
and, while they had evidently promised the Queen that they would
support here in her effort to abolish the constitution of 1887 and substitute one which they had secretly assisted in preparing, when the
moment of the trial came they abandoned her-they broke faith with
her. The Queen's ministers took fright and gave information to the
people of the existence of the movements and concealed purposes ot
the Queen and of her demands upon them to join her in the promulgation of the constitution, and they appealed to the committee of safety
for protection, and continued in that attitude until they saw that the
kindled wrath of the people would not take the direction of violence
and bloodshed without the provocation of a serious necessity. Being
satisfied that they could trust to the forbearance of the people, who
were looking to the protection of their interests and had no desire for
strife and bloodshed, they began to finesse in a political way to effect
a compromise between the people and the Queen, and they induced
her to make the proclamation of her intentions to postpone the completion of her revolutionary purposes, which was circulated in Honolulu
on Monday morning. These men, whose conduct can not be characterized as anything less than perfidious, hastened to give to the President
of the United Stotes false and misleading statements of the facts leading up to, attending, and succeeding this revolution. To do this they
madedeceptive and misleading statements to Mr.Blount. Upon them
must rest the odium of having encouraged the Queen in her revolutionary intentions; of having then abandoned her in a moment of apparent danger; of having thrown themselves upon the mercy of the people,
and then of making an attempt, through falsehood and misrepresenta



HAWAITAN, ISLANDS.


Xxv


tion, to regain power in the Government of Hawaii, which the people
would, naturally, forever deny to them.
A question has been made as to the right of the President of the
United States to dispatch Mr. Blount to Hawaii as his personal representative for the purpose of seeking the further information which the
President believed was necessary in order to arrive at a just conclusion
regarding the state of affairs in Hawaii. Many precedents could be
quoted to show that such power has been exercised by the President
on various occasions without dissent on the part of Congress or the
people of the United States. The employment of such agencies is a
necessary part of the proper exercise of the diplomatic power which is
intrusted by the Constitution with the President. Without such
authority our foreign relations would be so embarrassed with difficulties
that it would be impossible to conduct them with safety or success.
These precedents also show that the Senate of the United States, though
in session, need not be consulted as to the appointment of such agents,
or as to the instructions which the President may give them.
An authority was intrusted to Mr. Blount to remove the American
flag from the Government building in Hawaii, and to disclaim openly
and practically the protectorate which had been announced in that
country by Minister Stevens, and also to remove the troops from Honolulu to the steamer Boston. This particular delegation of authority
to Mr. Blount was paramount over the authority of Mr. Stevens, who
was continued as minister resident of the United States at Honolulu,
and it raised the question whether the Government of the United
States can have at the same foreign capital two ministers, each of
whom shall exercise separate and special powers.
There seems to be no reason why the Government of the United
States can not, in conducting its diplomatic intercourse with other
countries, exercise powers as broad and general, or as limited and
peculiar, or special, as any other government. Other governments
have been for many years, and even centuries, in the habit of intrusting special and particular missions to one man representing them at a
foreign court, and to several men in combination when that was found
to be desirable. In fact, there has been no limit placed upon the use
of a power of this kind, except the discretion of the sovereign or ruler
of the country. The committee fail to see that there is any irregularity
in such a course as that, or that the power given to Mr. Blount to withdraw the troops from Honolulu or to lower the flag of the United States
was to any extent either dangerous or interrupting to any other lawful
authority existing there in any diplomatic or naval officer. There may
be a question as to the particular wording of the order which Mr. Blount
gave to Admiral Skerrett for the lowering of the flag and the withdrawal of the troops, but that is a hypercriticism, because the substantial fact was that Mr. Blount executed the command of the President
in communicating to Admiral Skerrett such order, as the order of the
President of the United States. Mr. Blount's authority had been made
known to Admiral Skerrett; his instructions had been exhibited to
Admiral Skerrett; and they both understood that what Mr. Blount
was then doing had received the sanction of the President of the United
States before Mr. Blount had entered upon the discharge of his ministerial functions, and that his actwould receive the unqualified approval
of the President of the United States. That being so, the mere form
in which the order was addressed to Admiral Skerrett seems to be a
matter of no serious consequence.




xxvr


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The control given to Mr. Trist over the military operations in Mexico,
when war was flagrant, was far greater than that which was confided
to Mr. Blount. The secret orders given to the commanders of the
Army and of the Navy on that occasion are set out in the appendix to
this report.
When Mr. Willis arrived in Honolulu he was received by the Provisional Government, to which he was accredited, and an interchange
of the usual courtesies was had between them. He carried instructions,
as minister of the United States, which did not concern the Government of Hawaii until they had been attended with a certain result
which he endeavored to bring about. That result was that Liliuokalani -
should agree that, in the event of her restoration to the throne, not by
the action of the President of the United States, but in any other event,
or by any agreement, she would bind herself to grant full and free
amnesty to all persons who had been engaged in opposition to her
alleged authority. When that agreement had been obtained Mr. Willis
was instructed to submit it to the Provisional Government and ascertain whether they Would agree to restore the Queen to the throne under
those circumstances and upon those conditions.  If this was intervention, it was in the interest of Americans in Hawaii. It was an
exaction upon Liliuokalani which would forbid, under the penalty of war,
that should she acquire the throne by whatever means. that she should
openly disavow any purpose to inflict any pains and penalties upon
those who had supported the Provisional Government. Liliuokalani,
after several efforts on the part of Mr. Willis to obtain her consent
to this proposition, finally signed it without the assent of her min-.isters, and it was attested by Mr. Carter, who was a personal and
political friend. Her declaration or agreement thus signed and delivered to Mr. Willis was by him presented to the President of the Provisional Government (who was also minister of foreign affairs), and ~
the question whether or not it would be accepted by the Government
of Hawaii was submitted to him. Whereupon the President of the
Provisional Government declined to accept the proposition; declined
to yield the power which had been vested in him as the chief executive of Hawaii; and nothing more was done either to induce him, or to
compel him, to consent to, or to assist in, the restoration of Liliuokalani to the throne or the restoration of the Monarchy.
If, in this course of proceeding, the President of the United States
had intended to compel obedience to what is termed his "decision" in
the matter by using the force of the United States to assist the Queen
in being enthroned, that would have been an act of war, entirely beyond
his power, and would not have received the sanction of any considerable part of the American people, and would have no warrant in international law. But such was not the intention of the President, as is
shown by contemporaneous acts, by his declarations, and by his subsequent treatment of the subject. Therefore, the question between the
United States and Hawaii touching the propriety of an intervention in
the domestic affairs of Hawaii to the extent of gaining the final decision and agreement of both parties upon these propositions is one that
is strictly within the accepted right or authority of a sovereign to tender his good offices to reconcile the conflicts of two or more factions,
or parties, that may be opposed to each other within any country. The
tender of good offices has often been voluntarily made in the interest
of humanity) of peace, of law, and of order, or at the suggestion of one
of two belligerent powers actually engaged in war. Sometimes it has




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. -
e


XXVII


been made at the suggestion of that party in a government, engaged
in actual hostilities, which had the evident power to crush its opponent
by prosecuting the war to extremities. In such cases the intervention ~
has often been accepted as a merciful interposition, and it has been considered an honor by other governments that they should be requested,
under such circumstances, to exercise their good offices in favor of procuring peace through a submission to inevitable results. WVhen the
tender of good offices is made at the request of both of the contending
parties it is difficult to conceive how any sovereign of a foreign country
could refuse to act in such matter.
In the public act by which the Provisional Government of Hawaii was
established there was a distinct declaration that that Government was
to continue until Hawaii was annexed to the United States. That
declaration, apart from every other consideration, would have justified
the United States in an interference for the protection of the Provisional Government which would not have been tolerated under other
circumstances. That declaration created an intimacy of relationship
between the United States and the recognized Government of Hawaii
which is entirely exceptional, and which placed within the reach and
control of the United States very largely, if niot entirely, the disposal
of those questions collateral to that of annexation which might have
interfered with the peaceful and appropriate solution of any difficulty
which might arise in its execution. So that the Provisional Government of Hawaii, having thus thrown itself into the arms of the United
States in the first declaration of its existence, can not justly complain
that the United States should scrutinize, under the authority thus
given, all its pretensions of right thus to dispose of an entire country
and people. And Liliuokalani, having reference to the same project of
annexation, of which she was fully cognizant, made complaint that the
United States had assisted in driving her from her throne by bringing
its troops on shore in military array at a time when there was no necessity for it, distinctly announced at the moment of her final and avowed
abdication that she would abdicate provisionally and would await the
decision of the United States as to whether that abdication and the
destruction of the Kingdom and the annexation of Hawaii to the United
States should become completed facts. Under such circumstances the
President of the United States, believing that the information then in
possession of the Government was not sufficient to justify summary
annexation, could not have done justice to himself, to his country, to
the people of Hawaii, to the Provisional Government, or to Liliuokalani,
without having made an effort to use his good offices for the purpose
of ascertaining whether it was practicable that the Queen should be
restored to her autlhority, leaving the question to be determined by the
people interested in Hawaii whether such restoration would be acceptable to them or not. If Liliuokalani had been restored to her throne
by the consent of the membership of the Provisional Government, upon
the terms and conditions of the proposition which she signed and
delivered to Mr. Willis, the President of the United States would not
have been in any sense responsible for her restoration, would not have
espoused the monarchy, nor would he have done anything that was
contradictory of American sentiment, opinion, or policy. He would
only have been the mutual friend, accepted, really, by both parties,
whose intervention would have secured, with their consent, the final
solution of that question. In the absence of such committal on?Mis
part to the claims of Liliuokalani or resistance on his part to the




XXVIII


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


recognized rights of the Provisional Government. there is no reason for
withholding approval of the conduct of the President of the United
States in thus accepting and executing a function which he was entitled
to perfoi m, in submitting the question, in due and final form, to the
contending parties or factions in Hawaii, whether they preferred to
maintain the authority of the Provisional Government, with whatever
results may follow from that, or a return to the monarchy under Liliuokalani.
Therefore your committee conclude to report that the President of
the United States has not, in this particular, in any wise been a party
to any irregularity or any impropriety of conduct in his high office.
The committee find nothing worthy of criticism in the negotiation
of the treaty of annexation with the Provisional Government of
Hawaii.
The revolution in Hawaii had the effect of displacing one chief of
the executive department and substituting another.  Except the
Queen and her cabinet, no officer of the Government was removed.
The legislative body, including the house of nobles and house of
representatives and their presiding officers, remained in commission.
The supreme court and all other judicial magistracies and the officers
of the courts were left undisturbed, and, when the interregnum ended,
they puisuied their duties without change or interruption; commerce
with foreign countries and between the islands was not in any way
prevented, and the commercial and banking houses were open for business, which resumed activity when the executive head of the Goverlment was again in the exercise of lawful authority.
The Government had not been displaced and another substituted, but
only a department which was left vacant had been rehabilitated.
When this was done and the fact was recognized, the Government of
Hawaii was as competent to treat of annexation to the United States
as it had ever been, or as it ever will be, until the United States shall
decide that it will annex no more territory unless with the consent of
the people to be annexed, to be ascertained by a plebiscite.
Complaint is made also that this project of annexation was attempted
to be consummated in too great haste.
That raises a question of due consideration; for, if the people of both
countries desired it, or if, according to every precedent to be found in
the various annexations of countries and States to the United States,
the respective governments desired it, speedy action in completing the
cession was desirable for many obvious reasons, among which the injurious disturbance of commerce and danger to the public peace growing out of a protracted agitation of so grave a matter, are conspicuous.
But this is a question of long standing, which has been under favorable consideration by the kings and people of Hawaii and the Government and people of the United States for more than fifty years.
It is well understood, and its importance increases with every new
event of any consequence in Hawaii, and with the falling-in of every
island in the Pacific Ocean that is captured by the great maritime
powers of Europe. The committee have copied, in the Appendix to
this report, portions of the remarks of Hon. William, F. Draper in the
House of Representatives on the 4th of February, 1894, which refer in
a very clear and concise way to the progress of foreign intervention in
the Pacific Ocean by European powers. The committee also present
the following message of President Grant to the Senate, with the
accompanying letter of Hon. Henry A. Peirce, then our minister to




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


XXIX


Hawaii, which shows that the subject of cession and annexation have
been on several occasions carefully considered by the governments of
Hawaii and the United States.
[Confidential.-Executive B.-Forty-second Congress, first session.]
Message of the President of the United States, transmitting a copy of a
dispatch relative to the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands, addressed
to the Department of State by Henry A. Pierce, minister resident of
the United States at Honolulu.
APRIL, 7, 1871.-Read and, with the dispatch referred to the Committee on Foreign
Relations, ordered to be printed in confidence for the use of the Senate.
To the Senate of the United States:
I transmit confidentially, for the information and consideration of
the Senate, a copy of a dispatch of the 25th of February last, relative
to the annexation of the Hawaiian Islands, addressed to the Department of State by Henry A. Pierce, minister resident of the United
States at Honolulu. Although I do not deem it advisable to express
any opinion or to make any recommendation in regard to the subject
at this juncture, the views of the Senate, if it should be deemed proper
to express them, would be very acceptable with reference to any future
course which there might be a disposition to adopt.
U. S. GRANT.
WASHINGTON, April 5, 1871.
Mr. Pierce to Mr. Fish.
No. 101.]  LEGATION OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA,
Honolulu, February 25, 1871.
SIR: Imllressed with the importance of the subject now presented
tor consideration, I beg leave to suggest the inquiry whether the period
has not arrived making it proper, wise, and sagacious for the U. S.
Government to again consider the project of annexing the Hawaiian
Islands to the territory of the Republic. That such is to be the
political destiny of this archipelago seems a foregone conclusion in
the opinion of all who have given attention to the subject in this
country, the United States, England, France, and Germany.
A majority of the aborigines, creoles, and naturalized foreigners of
this country, as I am credibly informed, are favorable, even anxious for
the consummation of the measure named.
The event of the decease of the present sovereign of Hawaii, leaving
no heirs or successor to the throne, and the consequent election to be
made by the legislative assembly of a king, and new stirps for a royal
family, will produce a crisis in political affairs which, it is thought, will
be availed of as a propitious occasion to inaugurate measures for
annexation of the islands to the United States, the same to be effected
as the manifest will and choice of the majority of the Hawaiian
people, and through means proper, peaceful, and honorable.
It is evident, however, no steps will be taken to accomplish the
object named without the proper sanction or approbation of the U. S.
Government in approval thereof.
The Hawaiian people for fifty years have been under educational
instruction of American missionaries, and the civilizing influences of




xxX


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


New England people, commercial and maritime. Hence they are puritan and democratic in their ideas and tendencies, modified by a tropical climate. Their favorite songs and airs are American. Sherman's
"Marching Through Georgia" and "John Brown's Soul is Marching
On" are daily heard in the streets and in their schoolrooms. The
fifteenth amendment to the Constitution of the United States has
made the project of annexation to our Union more popular than ever
both here and in the United States.
The native population is fast disappearing; the number existing is
now estimated at 45,000, having decreased about 15,000 since the
census of 1866. The number of foreigners in addition is between
5,000 and 6,000, two-thirds of whom are from the United States, and
they own more than that proportion of foreign capital, as represented
in the agriculture, commerce, navigation, and whale fisheries of the
Kingdom.
This country and sovereignty will soon be left to the possession ot
foreigners, 'to unlineal hands, no sons of theirs succeeding." To
what foreign nation shall these islands belong if not to the great Republic? At the present those of foreign nativities hold all the important
offices of government and control legislation, the judiciary; etc. Well
disposed as the Government now is towards the United States and its
resident citizens here, in course of time it may be otherwise, as was the
case during our civil war.
I now proceed to state some points of a more general character,
which should influence the U. S. Government in their decision of
the policy of acquiring possession of this archipelago, their geographical position occupying, as it does, an important central,
strategical point in the North Pacific Ocean, valuable- perhaps necessary, to the United States for a naval depot and coaling station, and
to shelter and protect our commerce and navigation, which in this hemisphere is destined to increase enormously from our intercourse with
the 500,000,000 population of China, Japan, and Australia. Humbolt
predicted that the commerce on the Pacific would, in time, rival that
on the Atlantic. A future generation, no doubt, will see the prophecy
fulfilled.
The immense injury inflicted on American navigation and commerce
by Great Britain in the war of 1812-1814 through her possessions of
Bermuda and other West India Islands, as also that suffered by the
English from French privateers from the Isle of France during the
wars between those nations, are instances in proof of the necessity of
anticipating and preventing, when we can, similar evils that may issue
from these islands if held by other powers. Their proximity to the
Pacific States of the Union, fine climate and soil, and tropical productions of sugar, coffee, rice, fruits, hides, goatskins, salt, cotton, fine
wool, etc., required by the West, in exchange for flour, grain, lumber,
shooks, and manufactures of cotton, wool, iron, and other articles are
evidence of the commercial value of one to the other region.
Is it probable that any European power who may hereafter be at
war with the United States will refrain from taking possession of this
weak kingdom, in view of the great injury that could be done to our
commerce through their acquisition of them?
It is said that at a proper time the United States may have the
sovereignty of these islands without money and without price, except,
perhaps, for purchase of the Crown and public lands, and moderate
annuities to be given to the five or six high chiefs now living with
uncertain elaims as successors to the Crown.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


XXXI


His Hawaiian Majesty, although only in his forty-first year, is liable.to a sudden decease, owing to frequent attacks of difficulty in breathing and danger of suffocation from congestion caused by pbesity. His
weight is 300 pounds. He is sole survivor of the royal race of Kamehameha; unmarried, no heir, natural or adopted; possesses the constitutiolal prerogative of naming his successor, but it is believed he will
not exercise it, from a superstitious belief his own death would follow
immediately the act.
Prince Alexander and Lott Kamehameha (the former subsequently
became the fourth Hawaiian King and the latter the fifth) and Dr. G.
P. Judd, my informant, visited England in 1850 as Hawaiian commissioners.
Lord Palmerston, at their interview with him, said, in substance,
"that the British Government desired the Hawaiian people to maintain
proper government and preserve national independence. If they were
unable to do so he recommended receiving a protectorate government
under the United States or by becoming an integral part of that nation.
Such," he thought, "was the destiny of the Hawaiian Islands arising
from their proximity to the States of California and Oregon and
natural dependence on those markets for exports and imports, together
with probable extinction of the Hawaiian aboriginal population and its
substitution by immigration from the United States." That advice
seems sound and prophetic.
The following historical events in relation to these islands are thought
worthy of revival in recollection:
February 25, 1843.-Lord George Paulet, of Rler Britannic Majesty's
ship Carysfort, obtained, by forceful measures, cession of the Hawaiian
Islands to the Government of Great Britain, July 31, 1843. They were
restored to their original sovereignty by the British Admiral Thomas.
November 28, 1843.-Joint convention of the English and French
Governments, which acknowledged the independence of this archipelago and reciprocally promised never to take possession of any part
of same. The United States Government was invited to be a party to
the above but declined.
August, 1849.-Admiral Tromelin, with a French naval force, after
making demands on the Hawaiian Government impossible to be complied with, took unresisted possession of the fort and Government
buildings in Honolula, and blockaded the harbor. After a few weeks'
occupation of the place the French departed, leaving political affairs
as they were previous to their arrival.
January, 1851.-A French naval force again appeared at Honolula,
and threatened bombardment and destruction of the town.
The King, Kamehameha III, with the Government, fearing it would
be carried into effect, and in mortal dread of being brought under
French rule similar to that placed by the latter over Tahiti, of the
Society Islands, executed a deed of cession of all the Hawaiian Islands
and their sovereignty forever in favor of the United States of America.
The document in a sealed envelope was placed in charge of Mr. Severance, United States commissioner here, with instructions to take
formal official possession of the soil of these islands on occasion of the
first hostile shot fired by the French. On learning the facts the latter
desisted further aggressive acts and departed from the country.
Since that period the French authorities have pursued a conciliatory
course in their relations with the Hawaiian Government, and fully of
opinioni it is said, that a secret treaty exists between the United States
Government and that of Hawaii, by which these islands pass into the




xxn                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS...                            / ~
possession of the former in case of aggressions made upon them thereafter by any hostile powers.
In 1854 tlhe administration of President Pierce authorized the
United States commissioner, Mr. Gregg, to negotiate a treaty with the
Hawaiian authorities for the cession of the sovereignty of these islands
to the United States; but Mr. Gregg succeeded only in obtaining a
protocol for a treaty, by which the United States were to extend a
protectorate government over them. The matter in that form did not
meet with the approval of Mr. Secretary Marcy, and further negotiations ceased.
I omitted to state in proper sequence that the deed of cession of 1851
was, by order of the Secretary of State, Mr. Webster, returned to the
Hawaiian Government.
In conclusion, I herewith inclose Annual Review of the Agriculture
and Commerce of the Hawaiian Islands for the year 1870, published by
the Pacific Commercial Advertiser, February 25, 1871. Additional
copies will accompany my dispatch No. 102. Permit me to refer you to
a lithographic map, published in 1867 by UJ. S. Bureau of Statistics, as
showing in convenient form the relative position of these islands to the
continents of America, Asia, etc.; also, steamship lines radiating therefrom.
With great respect, your obedient, humble servant,
HENRY A. PIERCE.. Hon. HAMILTON FISH,
Secretary of State, Washington, D. C.
A President informed as to the history of his country could find no
difficulty in dealing with the question of the annexation of Hawaii to the
United States on the ground that it is new; and a minister to Hawaii
who should fail to inform his Government of the political changes in
Hawaii that would affect that question would neglect his duty.
It is not a just criticism upon the correspondence of Minister Stevens
with his Government that he earnestly advocated annexation. In this
he was in line with Mr. Marcy and nearly every one of his successors
as Secretary of State, and with many of Mr. Stevens's predecessors as
minister to Hawaii. His letters to his Government were written under
the diplomatic confidence that is requisite to secure freedom in such
communications, and were not expected to come under the scrutiny of
all mankind. They show no improper spirit and are not impeachable as
coloring or perverting the truth, although some matters stated by him
may be classed as severe reflections. Whatever motives may have
actuated or controlled any representative of the Government of the
United States in his conduct of our affairs in Hawaii, if he acted within
the limits of his powers, with honest intentions, and has not placed the
Government of the United States upon false and untenable grounds,
his conduct is not irregular.
But, in his dealings with the Hawaiian Government, his conduct was
characterized by becoming dignity and reserve, and was not in any
way harsh or offensive. In the opinion of the committee, based upon
the evidence which accompanies this report, the only substantial irregularity that existed in the conduct of any officer of the United States,
or agent of the President, during or since the time of the revolution of
1893, was that of Minister Stevens in declaring a protectorate of the
United States over Hawaii, and in placing the flag of our country
upon the Government building in Honolulu. No actual harm resulted




HAWAIIAN 1SLAN-DLS.;             XiXXI
from this unauthorized act, but as a precedent it is not to be considered as being justified. The committee have not considered it
iecessary to present any resolutions stating the conclusions that are
indicated in this report, and ask that they be discharged from the further
consideration of the resolutions under which this report is made.
We are in entire accord with the essential findings in the exceedingly. able report submitted by the chairman of the Committee on Foreign Relations, But it is our opinionFirst. That the appointment on the 11th day of March, 1893, without the advice and consent of the Senate, of Hon. James H. Blount as
"special commissioner" to the Hawaiian Government under letters
of credence and those of instruction, which declared that " in all matters affecting relations with the Government of the Hawaiian Islands
his authority is paramount" was an unconstitutional act, in that such
appointee, Mr. Blount, was never nominated to the Senate, but was
appointed without its advice and consent, although that body was in
session when such appointment was made and continued to be in session for a long time immediately thereafter.
Second. The orders of the Executive Department by which the naval
force of the United States -in the harbor of Honolulu was in effect
placed under the command of Mr. Blount or of Mr. Willis were without authority or warrant of law.
Third. The order given by Mr. Blount to Admiral Skerrett to lower
the United States ensign from the Government building in Honolulu
and to embark the troops on the ships to which they belonged, was an
order which Mr. Blount had no lawful authority to give. Its object
was not to terminate a protectorate. That relation had been disavowed by the administration of President Harrison immediately upon
receiving information of its establishment. The flag and troops, when
such order was given by Mr. Blount, were in the positions from which
he ordered them to be removed for the purpose of maintaining order
and protecting American life and property. - Their presence had been
effectual to those ends, and their removal tended to create, and did
create, public excitement and, to a degree, distrust of the power of the
Provisional Government to preserve order or to maintain itself. That
order of Mr. Blount was susceptible of being construed as indicating
an unfriendly disposition on the part of the United States toward the
Provisional Government, and it was so construed, particularly by the
people of Hawaii.
In the light of subsequent relations between Mr. Blouxt and his successor, Mr. Willis, with the Queen, whose office had become vacant by
her deposition and abdication under the attack of a successful revolution, this order and its execution were most unfortunate and unteward
in their effect. Such relations and intercourse by Messrs. Blount and
Willis with the head and with the executive officers of an overthrown
government, conducted for the purpose of restoring that g*vernment
by displacing its successor, were in violation of the constitution ad of
the principles of international law and were not warranted by the circumstances of the case.
Fourth. The question of the rghtfulness of the revolutien, of the
lawfulness of the means by which the deposition and abdication of the
Queen were effected, and the right of the Provisional Government to
S. Rep. 227 —m




/.     '  *..
XXXIV                HAWAIIAN ISLANDM.
exist and to continue to exist was bonclusively settled, as the report
so forcibly states, against the Queen and in favor of the Provisional
Government, by the act of the administration of President Harriso
recognizing, such Provisional Government, by the negotiation by that
administration with such Provisional Government of a treaty-of annexation to the United States; by accrediting diplomatic representation
by such administration and by the present administration to such Provisional Government; therefore, it incontrovertibly follows that the
President of the United States had no authority to attempt to reopen
such determined questions, and to endeavor by any means whatever to
overthrow the Provisional Government or to restore the monarchy
which it had displaced.
While it is true that a friendly power may rightfully tender its good
offices of mediation or advice in cases such as that under present consideration,. it is also true that the performance of such offices of mediation or advice ought not to be entered upon without the consent previously given by both the parties whom the action or decision of the
friendly power may affect. Such consent was not given in the present
instance. The Provisional Government never so consented; it was never
requested to consent. It denied the jurisdiction of the present administration on every proper occasion. Therefore the proceedings by the
President, which had for their result his request and monition to the
Provisional Government to surrender its powers, to give up its existence and to submit to be displaced by the monarchy which it had overthrown, had no warrant in law? nor in any consent of one of the parties
to be affected by such proceedings.
Fifth. The avowed opinion of the President of the United States,
in substance, that it is the duty of this Government to make reparation to the Queen by endeavoring to reinstate her upon her throne by
all constitutional methods, is a clear definition of the policy of the
present administration to that end. The instructions to Messrs. Blount
and Willis must be construed to be other and more ample forms of expression of that policy. No other presumption is permissible than that
their actions at Honolulu were with intent to carry out that avowed
policy. These considerations make immaterial any discussion, in this
connection, of the personal intentions, circumspection, or good faith of
these gentlemen in the performance of the task to which 'they had been
plainly commanded by the present administration.
JOHN SHERMAN.
WM. P. FRYE.
J. N. DOLPH.
CUSMAN K. DAVI.




ADDITIONAL VIEWS SUBMITTED BY MEMBERS OF THE
COMMITTEE.
The undersigned, members of the Committee on Foreign Rela —
tions, submit herewith the following views adverse to the report of the
committee, upon the subject of the recent political revolution in Hawaii.
Agreeing as we do with the conclusions submitted by the chairman
of the committee that no irregularities were committed either in the
appointment of Special Commissioner Blount or in the instructions
given him by the President, and without denying or conceding in any
manner the correctness of the facts as claimed, or of the statements as
made, in said report concerning other matters therein mentioned we
especially dissent from that portion thereof which declares that the
only substantial irregularity in the conduct of Mr. Stevens, the late
minister, was his declaration of a protectorate by the United States
over Hawaii. We are of the opinion also that there are no valid reasons and no course of dealing in our past relations with those islands
which justifies interference by the United States with the political
internal affairs of Hawaii any more than with those of any other independent state or nation in this hemisphere. We can not concur, therefore, in so much of the foregoing report as exonerates the minister of
the United States, Mr. Stevens, from active officious and unbecoming
participation in the events which led to the revolution in the Sandwich
Islands on the 14th, 16th, and 17th of January, 1893. His own admissions in his official correspondence with this Government, his conduct
for months preceding the revolution, as well as the facts established
by the evidence before the committee, clearly justify such a conclusion.
On the other hand, we are not inclined to censure Capt. Wiltse,
commanding the United States war-ship Boston, or the officers of that
vessel. Their position was one of extreme delicacy and difficulty, and
we appreciate their anxiety to afford protection to the lives and property of American citizens. The force of United States marines of the
Boston with their ordinary arms stationed at the American legation,
and at the consulate in Honolulu would have effectually represented
the authority and power of the United States Government, and would
have afforded whatever protection American interests might have
required; and at the same time would have avoided the appearance
of coercion or duress, either upon the people of Honolulu or the Queen
in the controversy between them. This is our opinion, after a careful
examination of all the facts and circumstances disclosed in the evidence. But, as we have observed, the position was a delicate and
difficult one. Perhaps if we had been on the ground in the presence
of the minister, unler the influence of his advice and counsel, and
of the environments and conditions surrounding Capt. Wiltse, his
officers and men, we might have landed the forces as he did; but a less
formidable array would have removed from the Queen the exeuse for
asserting that she and her government were overawed by the United
States forces, to which she claims under protest to have surrendered,
XXXV




XXXVI


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
I..


n- ad at the same time have afforded all necessary protection to the
lives and property of our citizens at that port, if they were in any.jeopardy.
The moral support and good offices of this Government, or of any.
government, is always permissible in promoting the moral tone and political improvement of the government of foreign countries on terms of
amity-with their own; but there is nothing in international law, in
sound public policy, or-in our past history and traditions which justifies
a representative of this Government in interfering officiously or improperly in the domestic or political affairs of at foreign country, whatever
may be the character of its rulers, its form of government, or its political condition. We have enough to <do to attend to our own business.
We can not, therefore, avoid the conviction that the inopportune zeal
of Minister Stevens in the project of annexation of the Sandwich
Islands to the United States caused him to exceed the proper limits of
his official duty and of his diplomatic relations to the government and
people of those islands. His conduct as the public representative of
this Government was directly conducive to bringing about the condition
of affairs which resulted in the overthrow of the Queen, the organization of the Provisional Government, the landing of the United States
troops, and the attempted scheme of annexation; and upon this conclusion his conduct is seriously reprehensible and deserving of public
censure.
M. (. BUTLER,
DAVID TURPIE,
JOHN M. DANIEL,
GEORGE GRAY,
Members of Minority.
FEBRUARY 22, 1894.
-   The question of annexation is not submitted for the consideration of
the committee, except as it incidentally affects the main question discussed; but it may not be improper for me to say, in this connection,
that I am heartily in favor of the acquisition of those islands by the
Government of the United States; and in a proper case and on an appropriate occasion I should earnestly advocate the same. But I am unwilling to take advantage of internal dissentions in those islands, for
which I believe we are in some measure responsible, to consummate at
this time so desirable an object,
M. C. BUTLER..
I concur in the above.
DAVID TuuprI,




APPENDIX TO THE REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE.
L THE FOLLOWING IS THE TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL POSTER
REFERRED TO BY MR. HOES IN HIS STATEMENT.
[Translation.]
THE VOICE OF THE PEOPLE.
1. A mass meeting will be held in front of the opera house, outside
of the Palace yard, at 2 o'clock this afternoon, Monday, January 16, to
consider the condition of the country.
By order
COMMITTEE OF LAW AND ORDEI.
THE VOICE OF THE CHIEF.
2. On the afternoon of Saturday last the voice of the sacred chief
of Hawaii, Liliuokalani, the tabned one, speaking as follows:
" Oh, ye people who love the chief, I hereby say to you, I am now
ready to proclaim the new constitution for my Kingdom, thinking that
it would be successful; but behold obstacles have arisen. Therefore I
say unto you, loving people, go with good hope, and do not be disturbed or troubled in your minds, because within the next few days
now coming I will proclaim the new constitution.
"The executive officers of the law (the cabinet) knew the errors in
this new constitution, but they said nothing.
"Therefore, I hope that the thing which you, my people, so much
want will be accomplished; it also is my strong desire."
And her last order was that we should pray to God to bless this
Kingdom and the throne of Hawaii.
STUBBORNNESS.
3. From the day of the passage of the lottery bill until the prorogation of the Legislature the members of the Reform party in the House
have been refractory. It is seen that this is the Missionary party. This
is a childish act, showing the lack of principle of the Reform party and
the unexampled pride of the missionaries. The missionaries are the
parents of these actions; and their reason for so doing is because of
their regret and vexation by reason of the failure of their schemes in
the Legislature. The National party is not this way. If the Reform
party is successful the Hawaiian party does not show its disappointment, but, with its customary patience, continues on working for the
good of all without feelings of strife.
The foreign members of this session have shown their wicked
intentions, their causeless jealousy, when the majority of the people,. R   22 ---11
8. Re1. 227 —1




2                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
the Hawaiian party, voted as they wished. During all the bribery there
has grown up a united determination on the part of the National party
to hold their prerogatives and carry out the desires of their constituents who elected them. Great is our contempt for this causeless
opposition of the missionaries and their friends, and for the first time
we are able to congratulate the Hawaiian members on account of their
unanimity during these few. days.
DIFFERENT VIEWS.
4. We hear that the representatives of the foreign countries have
met and decided to help the Queen's cabinet and support her, except
the American minister. The Annexationists are seeking some pretext
to injure the Queen, and order the American naval forces on shore to
protect their property without knowing what they are afraid of, for
the ghosts which they are conjuring up will act as they acted in 1887.
OH, YE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE.
5. To-day a public meeting has been called by the missionaries of
the Reform party and those who are deceived by them at Manamana,
with the intention of injuring the Queen because of her love for the
people in consenting to promulgate a new constitution, to depose her
from being Queen, and to turn the monarchy into a republic. Therefore, those who love the country, those who are born in the country,
stand fast in support of the monarchy and do not let one true Hawaiian
go to this meeting to which you are invited. Oh, all ye true Hawaiians,
let us support our Queen, and consecrate our lives for the benefit of
our Queen and the peace of the land. All of the people who love the
chief are invited to go straight to the meeting in front of the opera
house at 2 o'clock this afternoon. One loving heart in our breasts
throughout the land, oh, descendants of Kamehameha.
THE HELPERS OF THE CABINET.
6. The banks of Bishop and Spreckels are ready to help the Government with money. Certain merchants are also ready to support the
Government. It is apparent that it is only certain missionaries who are
secretly meeting and seeking a riot as a reason for landing the men of
war when there is no reason.
LET THE PEOPLE BE READY.
7. To give their thanks to day at the meeting to be held at 2 this
afternoon in front of the Opera House, to their Queen, who wanted to
execute the desires of her people, but by reason of obstacles she could
not lawfully do so. On account of this love of our Queen, and what
she tried to do under her spirit of love, but she could not accomplish
it, and when she saw that it could not be done she expressed her regret
with sorrow, and instructed the committee of the people to go and wait,
and their desires would be carried out in accordance with the right,
and for them to keep the peace.
MASS MEETING!
8. The meeting which is to be held in front of the opera house is to
be held by the party which supports the Government, and the subjects
of the Queen are invited to attend and listen to the voices of the




HAWAIIAN ISLKNDS.                    S
leaders of the people. We are being plotted against without reason.
The independence of Hawaii is being assaulted by the wicked and
refractory ones because the Queen listened to the pleadings of her awn
people to give a new constitution. She has left this thought to her
cabinet, and thanks are due for this loving thought of the chief in
leaving to them this desire of the people of the land, and they have
restrained the love of the chief until such time as it may seem good.
Because it can not be helped, we had better be patient and listen to her
words: "I regret that your desires are not complied with, but you must
go and keep the peace, and the time will come when your desires will
be satisfied."
I hereby certify that the foregoing is a correct translation of the
accompanying extra issued by the Ka Leo o Ka Lahui, a Honolulu
newspaper, published in Honolulu in the Hawaiian language, on January 16, 1893.
LORRIN A. THURSTON.
II. BY ORDER OF THE COMMITTEE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS
OF THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY TO COMMODORE PERRY, DATED
APRIL 15, 1847, WERE MADE PART OF THE RECORD.
[Confidential.]
NAVY DEPARTMENT,
Washington, April 15, 1847.
Commodore M. C. PERRY,
Commanding the Home Squadron:
SIR: The successes which have recently crowned our arms would
seem to justify the expectation that the Government of Mexico would
feel disposed to submit proposals for peace. That there may be no
unnecessary delay in acting on such proposals, if they shall be made,
the President has directed Nicholas P. Trist, esq., of the State Department, to proceed to the headquarters of the Army or to the squadron,
as he shall deem most convenient, and be in readiness to receive any
proposition for a settlement of the questions at issue. Mr. Trist is
' clothed with such diplomatic power as to authorize him to enter into
arrangements with the Mexican Government for the mutual suspension of hostilities. If he shall communicate to you in writing that the
contingency has occurred, you will act in accordance with his directions
and suspend actual hostilities until further orders from the Department,
unless the enemy shall continue or recommence them. In doing so
you will not relinquish any position which you may occupy, or abstain
from any change of position which, in your judgment, may be necessary for the security or health of your command.
You will afford to Mr. Trist every facility and accommodation in your
power and a speedy passage to New Orleans when he may desire to
return. You will not relax the vigor of your operations while he may
remain in Mexico, unless he directs you to suspend them, but during.
that time it is desirable, if it does not conflict with your arrangements,
that you shall be in the harbor of Vera Cruz, or as accessible as may be.
You will be pleased to make your communications to the Depart.
ment as frequent as you may find opportunity.
I am, very respectfully, your obedient servant,
JOHN Y. MASON




4


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


U. S. FLAGSHIP MISSISSIPPI,
Anton Lizardo, May 8, 1847.
SIr: I have received by Mr. Trist your confidential communication
of the 15th instant, and in a personal interview with that gentleman
have made the requisite arrangements for carrying out the wishes and
intentions of the Department.
It is highly necessary that I should no longer delay a visit to the
eastern coast as far as Laguna and Campeche. This I can do before any
communication of interest can be received from Mr. Trist, and we both
agree that it is better for me to make the visit now, that I may be at
Vera Cruz about the time he shall have been informed of the result of
his mission; but to prevent any inconvenience I shall leave a steamer
at Vera Crnz to bring me any communication that Mr. Trist might
transmit during my absence.
The Potomac will also be left at Vera Cruz.
With great respect, I am, sir, your most obedient servant,
M. C. PERRY,
Commanding Home Squadron.
Hon. JOHN Y. MASON,
Secretary of the VNavy, Washington, D. C.
III. ALSO THE FOLLOWING TREATY OF ANNEXATION MADE IN THE
TIME OF KAMEHAMEHA III, WHICH FAILED OF THE KING'S SIGNATURE BY REASON OF HIS DEATH, THE ORIGINAL BEING ON
FILE IN THE OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE.
[Confidential.]
Treaty of annexation concluded between His Majesty the King of the
Hawaiian Islands and the United States of America.
His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands, being convinced
that plans have been and still are on foot hostile to his sovereignty
and to the peace of his Kingdom, which His Majesty is without power
to resist and against which it is his imperative duty to provide in
order to prevent the evils of anarchy and to secure the rights and
prosperity of his subjects, and having, in conscientious regard thereto
as well as to the general interests of his Kingdom, present and future,
sought to incorporate his Kingdom into the Union of the United States
as the means best calculated to attain these ends and perpetuate the
blessings of freedom and equal rights to himself, his chiefs, and his
people, and the Government of the United States, being actuated solely
by the desire to add to their security and prosperity and to meet the
wishes of His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands and of his
Government, have determined to accomplish, by treaty, objects so
important to their mutual and permanent welfare.
For that purpose His Majesty, Kamehameha III, King of the
Hawaiian Islands, has granted full powers and instructions to Robert
Chrichton Wyllie, esq., his minister of foreign relations, his secretary at war and of the navy, member of his privy council of state,
member of the house of nobles, and chairman of the commissioners of
his privy purse, and the President of the United States has invested
with like powers David Lawrence Gregg, esq., commissioner ot
said States to the said Kingdom; and the said plenipotentiaries, after
exchanging their full powers, have agreed to and concluded the fol.
lowing articles:




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS                      5
ARTICLE I.
His Majesty, the King of the Hawaiian Islands, acting in conformity
with the power vested in him by the constitution of his Kingdom, and
with the wishes of his chiefs and people and of the heads of every
department of his Government, cedes to the United States his King:
dom, with all its territories, to be held by them in full sovereignty,
subject only to the same constitutional provisions as the other States
of the American Union. This cession includes all public lots and
squares, Government lands, mines and minerals, salt lakes and springs,
fish ponds, public edifices, fortifications, barracks, forts, ports, and
harbors, reefs, docks, and magazines, arms, armaments, and accouterments, public archives, and funds, claims, debts, taxes, and dues existing, available, and unpaid at the date of the exchange of the ratifications of this treaty.
ARTICLE II.
The Kingdom of the Hawaiian Islands -shall be incorporated into
the American Union as a State enjoyin. the same degree of sovereignty as other States, and admitted as such, as soon as it can be done
in consistency with the principles and requirements of the Federal
Constitution, to all the rights, privileges, and immunities of a State as
aforesaid, on a perfect equality with the other States of the Union.
ARTICLE III.
His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands, his chiefs and subjects of every class, shall continue in the enjoyment of all their
existing personal and private rights, civil, political, and religious, to
the utmost extent that is possible under the Federal Constitution, and
shall possess and forever enjoy all the rights and privileges of citizens
of the United States on terms of perfect equality, in all respects, with
other American citizens.
ARTICLE IV.
The decisions of the Board of Land Commissioners, made and not
appealed from at the date of the final ratification of this treaty, shall be
and remain forever valid and undisturbed; and all titles to real estate,
which are now or shall have then been declared valid under the laws of
the Hawaiian Kingdom, shall be held to be equally valid by the United
States, and measures shall be adopted by the United States for the
speedy and final adjudication of all unsettled claims to land in conformity with the laws and usages under which they may have originated.
ARTICLE V.
All engagements of whatsoever kind, affecting the rights of corporations or individuals, validly construed and lawfully incumbent upon
the King's Government or the Hawaiian nation to pay and discharge,
shall be respected and fulfilled in is prompt, full, and complete a manner as they would have been respected and fulfilled had no change of
sovereignty taken place.
ARTICLE VI.
The public lands hereby ceded, shall be subject to the laws regulating the public lands in other parts of the United States, liable, how



6                     HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
ever, to such alterations and changes as Congress may from time to
time enact. The grants of land for the promotion of education here.
tofore made by the Government of the King of the Hawaiian Islands,
shall be confirmed by the United States, which, in addition thereto,
shall grant and set apart, for the purposes of common schools, seminaries of learning, and universities, so much of the public lands and of
the proceeds thereof, as may be equal, proportionally, to the grants for
such purposes in any of the States of the Union.
ARTICLE VII.
The laws of the Hawaiian Kingdom, so far as they are compatible
with republican institutions, and conformable to the Constitution of the
United States, shall be and remain in full force and effect until modified, changed, or repealed by the legislative authority of the State contemplated by this treaty.
ARTICLE VIII.
In consideration of the cession made by this treaty, and in compensation to all who may suffer or incur loss consequent thereon, the
United States shall pay the aggregate sum of $300,000 as annuities,
to the King, the Queen, the Crown Prince, those standing next in succession to the throne, the chiefs, and all other persons whom the King
may wish to compensate or reward, to be apportioned as may be determined by His Majesty, the King, and his Privy Council of State, which
amounts, to be apportioned as aforesaid, shall be paid ratably, without
deduction or offset on any ground or in any shape whatever, to the
parties severally named in such apportionment, at Honolulu on the
1st day of July of each successive year so long as they may live. -It
is, however, expressly agreed upon, that on the demise of his present
majesty, the annuity of the immediate heir to the throne shall then be
increased to the same amount before allowed and paid to the King
himself.
As a further consideration for the cession herein made and in order
to place within the reach of the inhabitants of the Hawaiian Islands the
means of education, present and future, so as to enable them the more
perfectly to enjoy and discharge the rights and dutiesconsequent upon
a change from monarchical to republican institutions, the United
States agrees to set apart and pay over for the term of ten years the
sum of $75,000 per annum, one-third of which shall be applied to constitute the principal of a fund for the benefit of a college or university,
or colleges or universities, as the case may be, and the balance for the
support of common schools, to be invested, secured, or applied as may
be determined by the legislative authority of the. Hawaiian Islands
when admitted as a state into the Union as aforesaid.
ARTICLE IX.
Immediately after the exchange of the ratifications of this treaty the
President of the United States shall appoint a commissioner who shaH
receive in due form, in the name of the United States, the transfer of
the sovereignty and territories of the Hawaiian Islands, also all public
property, archives, and other things hereinbefore stipulated to be conveyed, and who shall exercise all executive authority in said islands
necessary to the preservation of peace and order and to the proper




HAWAIIAN ISLA!",


7


execution of the laws until the state contemplated in this treaty can be
duly organized and admitted as such state; and until the arrival of
such commissioner all departments of His Majesty's Government shall
continue as now constituted.
ARTICLE X.
This treaty shall be ratified by the respective high contracting parties and the ratifications exchanged at the city of Honolulu within
eight months from the date hereof, or sooner if possible; but it is agreed
that this period may be extended by mutual consent of the two parties.
In witness whereof we, the undersigned, plenipotentiaries of His
Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands and of the United States
of America, have signed three originals of this treaty of annexation in
Hawaiian and three in English, and have thereunto affixed our respective official seals.
Done at Honolulu, this -  day of -, in the year of our Lord one
thousand eight hundred and fifty-four.
SEPARATE AND SECRET ARTICLE.
Whereas it is desirable to guard against the exigencies declared in
the preamble to the foregoing treaty, and to secure the King of the
Hawaiian Islands, his chiefs and all who reside under his jurisdiction,
from the dangers therein referred to and expressed, it is hereby provided and expressly agreed that at any time before the final exchange
of the ratifications of said treaty, if the same shall be duly ratified on
the part of His Majesty the King, and satisfactory notice thereof given
to -the commissioner of the United States, it shall be competent for
His Majesty, by proclamation, to declare his islands annexed to the
American Union, subject to the provisions of such treaty as negotiated,
and the commissioners of the United States for the time being shall
receive and accept the transfer of the jurisdiction of the said islands,
in the name of the United States, and protect and defend them by the
armed forces.of the United States as a part of the American Union,
holding the same for and in behalf of his Government, and exercising
the jurisdiction provided for in said treaty, with the understanding,
however, that in case the said treaty is not finally ratified, or other
arrangement made, by the free consent and to the mutual satisfaction
of the contracting parties, the sovereignty of the islands shall immediately revert, without prejudice, to His Majesty, or his immediate
heirs in the same condition as before the transfer thereof; and it is
further understood and agreed that this article shall be as binding for
all the ends and purposes herein expressed as if it formed a part of
the foregoing treaty.
IV. ALSO THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS FROM HON. W. L. MARCY,
SECRETARY OF WAR, TO MAJ. GEN. WINFIELD SCOTT, COMMANDING
THE ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES IN MEXICO.
WAR DEPARTMENT,
Washington, D. C., January 18, 1894.
SIR: As requested in your letter of the 13th instant, I have the
honor to transmit herewith a copy of a confidential letter, dated April
14, 1847, addressed by the Secretary of War to Maj. Gen: Winfield




8


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Scott, commanding U. S. Army in Mexico, and advising him that
Nicholas P. Trist, esq., has been commissioned by the President of the.United States to proceed to the headquarters of the Army in Mexico,
or to the naval squadron, for the purpose of receiving any proposal
which the enemy may make for peace with the United States, and
informing Maj. Gen. Scott as to the diplomatic powers with which Mr.
Trist is clothed under his instructions.
Attention is invited to House Ex. Doe. No. 56, Thirtieth Congress,
first session, "Correspondence between the Secretary of War and Generals Scott and Taylor, and between Gen. Scott and Mr. Trist," which
contains all the information in possession of this Department on the
subject.
Very respectfully,
DANIEL S. LAMONT,
Secretary of War.
Hon. JOHN T. MORGAN,
Chairman. Committee on Foreign Affairs, U. S. Senate.
[Confidential.]
WAR DEPARTMENT,
Washington, April 14, 1847.
Maj. Gen. WrFIELD SCOTT,
Commanding the Army of the United'States, Mexico:
SIR: The signal successes which have attended our military operations since the commencement of the present war would seem to justify
the expectation that Mexico will be disposed to offer fair terms of
accommodation. With a view to a result so desirable, the President
has commissioned Nicholas P. Trist, esquire, of the State Department,
to proceed to your headquarters, or to the squadron, as to him may
seem most convenient, and be in readiness to receive any proposal
which the enemy may see fit to make for the restoration of peace.
Mr. Trist is clothed with such diplomatic powers as will authorize
him to enter into arrangements with the Government of Mexico for the
suspension of hostilities. Should he make known to you, in writing,
that the contingency has occurred in consequence of which the President is willing that further active military operations should cease,
you will regard such notice as a direction from the President to suspend
them until further orders from this Department, unless continued or
recommenced by the enemy; but, in so doing, you will not retire from
any place you may occupy, or abstain from any change of position
which you may deem necessary to the health or safety of the troops
under your command, unless, on consultation with Mr. Trist, a change
in the position of your forces should be deemed necessary to the success of the negotiation for peace. Until hostilities, as herein proposed,
shall be intermitted, you will continue to carry on your operations with
energy, and push your advantages as far as your means will enable
you to do.
Mr. Trist is also the bearer of a dispatch to the Secretary of Foreign
Affairs of the Government of Mexico, in reply to one addressed to the
Secretary of State here. You will transmit that dispatch to the commander of the Mexican forces, with a request that it may be laid before
his Government, at the same time giving information that Mr. Trist,
an officer from our Department for Foreign Affairs, next in rank to its




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS..k


9


chief, is at your headquarters, or on board the squadron, as the case
may be.
You will afford Mlr. Trist all the accommodation and facilities in your
power to enable him to accomplish the objects of his mission.
Very respectfully, your obedient servant,
W. L. MARCY,
Secretary of War.
P. S.-Should a suspension of hostilities take place, you will lose no
time in communicating the fact to Maj. Gen. Taylor.
V. ALSO THE FOLLOWING TREATY OF RECIPROCITY BETWEEN THE
UNITED STATES AND HAWAII, DATED AND SIGNED THE 20TH OF
JULY. 1855. BUT WHICH WAS NOT RATIFIED BY THE SENATE.
[Confidential. Executive, No. 7. Special session.]
TREATY BETWEEN THE UNITED STATES AND HIS MAJESTY THE
KING OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
March 9, 1857, on motion by Mr. Mason, referred to the Committee on Foreign
Relations, and ordered to be printed in confidence for the use of the Senate.
The United States of America and His Majesty the King of the
Hawaiian Islands, equally animated by the desire to strengthen and
perpetuate the friendly relations which have heretofore uniformly existed
between them, and to consolidate their commercial intercourse, have
resolved to enter into a convention for commercial reciprocity. For this
purpose the President of the United States of America has conferred
full powers on William L. Marcy, Secretary of State, and His Majesty
the King of the Hawaiian Islands has conferred like powers on the honorable William Little Lee, chancellor and chief justice of the supreme
court of those islands, a member of his Hawaiian Majesty's privy council
of state and cabinet, president of the board of land commissioners, and
His Majesty's envoy extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary to the
United States of America.
And the said plenipotentiaries, after having exchanged their full
powers, which were found to be in due form, have agreed to the following articles:
ARTICLE I.
For and in consideration of the rights and privileges granted by His
Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands in the next succeeding article
of this convention, and as an equivalent therefor, the United States of
America hereby agree to admit all the articles named in the following
schedule, the same being the growth or produce of the Hawaiian Islands,
into all the ports of the United States of America free of duty:
Schedule.
Muscovado, brown, clayed, and all other unrefined s gars.
Sirups of sugar; molasses.
Coffee; arrowroot.
Live stock and animals of all kinds.
Cotton, unmanufactured.
Seeds, and vegetables not preserved
Undried fruits not preserved.
I* l. -0 -.




10


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS


Poultry: eggs.
Plants, shrubs, and trees.
Pelts; wool, unmanufactured.
Rags.
Hides, furs, skins, undressed.
Butter; tallow.
ARTICLE II.
For and in consideration of the rights and privileges gr anted by the
United States of America in the preceding article of this convention,
and as an equivalent therefor, His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian
Islands hereby agrees to admit all the articles named in the following
schedule, the same being the growth or produce of the United States
of America, into all the ports of the Hawaiian Islands free of duty:
Schedule.
Flour of wheat.
Fish of all kinds.
Coal.
Timber and lumber of all kinds, round, hewed, and sawed, unmanufactured, in whole or in part.
Staves and heading.
Cotton, unmanufactured.
Seeds, and vegetables not preserved.
Undried fruits, not preserved.
Poultry; eggs.
Plants, shrubs, and trees.
Pelts; wool, unmanufactured.
Rags.
Hides, furs, skins, undressed.
Butter; tallow.
ARTICLE III.
The evidence that articles proposed to be admitted into the ports of
the United States of America or the ports of the Hawaiian Islands
free of duty, under the first and second articles of this convention, are
the growth or the produce of the United States of America or of the
Hawaiian Islands shall be a certificate to that effect from the American or Hawaiian consul or consular agent of the port from which such
articles are exported, or, in case there shall be no such consul or consular agent resident in such port, a certificate to that effect from the
collector of the port.
ARTICLE IV.
The present convention shall take effect as soon as the law required
to carry it into operation shall have been passed by the Congress of
the United States of America and the convention shall have been
approved by His Majesty the King of the Hawaiian Islands in council.
The convention shall remain in force for seven years from the date at
which it may go into operation, and further, until the expiration of
twelve months after either of the high contracting parties shall give
notice to the other of its wish to terminate the same, each of the high
contracting parties being at liberty to give such notice to the other at
the end of the said term of seven years, or at any time afterwards.




HAWAIIAN     ISLAND.                             1
ARTICLE V.
The present convention shall be duly ratified, and the ratifications
aall be exchanged at Honolulu within eighteen months from the date
ereof, or earlier if possible.
In faith whereof the respective plenipotentiaries have signed this
onvention, and have hereunto affixed their seals.
Done, in triplicate, in the English language, in the city of Washigton, this twentieth day of July, anno Domini one thousand eight
undred and fifty-five.
W. L. MARCY. [SEAL.]
W. L. LEE.       [SEAL.]
[Confidential. Executive, No.7. Thirty-fourth Congress, first session.]
8essage of the President of the United States, communicating a treaty between the United
States and the King of the Hawaiian Islands.
January 3, 1l56, read first time, and, on motion by Mr. Mason, referred to the Comnittee on Foreign Relations.
January 10, 1856, ordered to be printed in confidence for the use of the Senate.
To the Senate of the United States:
I transmit to the Senate for consideration, with a view to ratification,
t treaty between the United States and His Majesty the King of the
Eawaiian Islands, signed in Washington, the twentieth day of July,
A. D. 1855.
FRANKLIN PIERCE.
WASHINGTON, December 27, 1855.
VI. ALSO THE FOLLOWING REPORT ON THE PHYSICAL FEATURES,
FACTS OF LANDING, SUPPLIES, CLIMATE, DISEASES, ETC., OF THE
HAWAIIAN      ISLANDS, PREPARED         BY  CAPT. GEORGE        P. SCRIVEN,
OF THE SIGNAL CORPS, ASSISTED            BY LIEUT. J. Y. MASON BLUNT,
OF THE FIFTH      CAVALRY, WITH THE ACCOMPANYING MAPS.
Report on    the physical features, ports of landing, supplies, climate,
diseases, etc.
[Compiled from the best available sources for the information of the Army.]
CONTENTS.
Page.
Location, distances from the Pacific coast...................................  12
Communications with the United States........'.............................  12
Names, areas-.............................................................. 13
General physical characteristics.............................................  13
Soils.......................................................................  14
Climates...................................................................   14
Earthquakes...............................................................  15
Population, characteristics, religions, education.......................... 15-17
Laws, military forces, police.................................................  17
Language, Government.................................................... 17,18
Business, currency, finance, commerce...................................  18, 19
Products, resources, vegetation..............................................  19
Industries..............................................................  19
Diseases (other than leprosy)..............................................  20
Manner of life, clothing.....................................................  20.   **. *:'.
~eI- el~*




12                    HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Individual characteristics of islands:
Oahu —.-                                                   21
Coa st..............................................................  21
Coa~st  --. ---- ---- --- -. --- - - - - - - - - - - - - ----—.. -.......... -- ----—. —.  21
Interior.-... ---........-...........-.....-..................  21
Cities, towns, and ports, Honolulu..-........................  22
Other than Honolulu......-..............  25
Hawaii --.....-..-.. - —....-,,,-... —...-..  --.  26
Coast -.... —.-............-........... —..-...........  26
Interior...........-.......................................  26
Cities, towns, and ports...........................................  28
Mani -—.......................-... —.......-          30
Coast... ----..........-... —....... —. --- —. —.-.-......  30
Interior. --- —.. ---.................. --------.. ---.-. —.....-......  31
Cities, towns, and ports...............................  31
Kauai. —....-...,-,, --- — -—. ---- ------ --,, --- —-------—, --------- --  33
Kauai                                                    ' 33
Coast.-.. ---. --- —---—........-.....-.... --- —---. —....  33
Interior ----—..... --  —........... - --—.... — ---—. -—. --- -—.  33
Cities, towns, and ports. -, --. —........ --- —----....-.. --- —--—...  34
Molokai............ --- ——... ----- -—.. —...... --—. —... --- ——......  35
Coast, ----  -   -  —............. ---...-.- -. --- —-----..  35
Interior....... ----. —.. --- —.....- -.... —......... —.....-.........  35
Cities, towns, and ports.....-.... —... ----—... --- —---  36
Lanai.... ----......-........ --- —-.......... — ---—.............. —..   36
Niihaun... ---....... --- - ------ —................-......... --- -...  36
Cities, towns, and ports -.............-................-.. 36
Kahulaui -... ---................ --- —---- ----------  37
Kaula  -...-...... ---.-...-.. ----. -—. —. —... ---. —.. ---... —.  37
Lenua. ---........ —..... —....-7... ---... —.-.. ---..-......-.. —   37
Molokini.-...........-....... — -—.-..-.....  —.......... -------.  38
Communications.........-........ --- —. -—.... --- ——....-....-.   38
Railroads..-....-... --- --—. --- —----.................  38
Roads............................... —.................................  39
Telegraphs, telephones.. —........ —..... --- —---—. --- —-.  39
Inter-island steamers and vessels -..-... ---........... --- —......  39
Leprosy.................. -.. -....................................  39
Report on the Hawaiian Islands.
The Hawaiian Islands lie between parallels 180 50' and 230 5' north
latitude, and between meridians 154~ 40' and 161~ 50' west from Greenwich. A line drawn through the axis of the group would approximate
roughly the segment of a 'circle convex towards the northeast; the
chord connecting the most widely separated points would have a length
of about 400 statute miles.
Honolulu, the capital and chief city, lies 2,080 miles from San Francisco; approximately 3,800 miles from Auckland; 4,500 miles from Sydney; and 4,800 miles from Hongkong.
Mean time Honolulu noon is equivalent to 10h. 31m. 26s. Greenwich
mean time.
COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE UNITED STATES.
San Francisco to Honolulu.-The Australia of the Oceanic Steamship
Company and the Zealandia (W. J. Irwin) leave San Francisco and
return every other Tuesday.
The Oceanic Steamship Company's steamers Alameda, -Mariposa;
and the Union Steamship Company's steamer Monowai, leave San Francisco for New Zealand via Honolulu once a month.
Time.-San Francisco to Honolulu, seven days.
Sailing vessels, with good passenger accommodations, run regularly
from San Francisco to Honolulu.:.. -'..' ~




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS                    13
Sailing time. —San Francisco to Honolulu, ten to eighteen days.
Pacific mail steamers, San Francisco to China and Japan, stop at
Honolulu every other trip.
"A new company sends its first steamer this month (February, 1893),
from Tacoma and Seattle to Honolulu. Steamers of the Occidental
and Oriental line to China and Japan [N. Y. Tribune, February 16] are
due to stop at Honolulu."
Steamers of the Oceanic and Pacific Mail companies are under the
United States flag.
POSITION, AREAS, AND GEOGRAPHICAL FEATURES.
The strategic value of the islands and their geographical position
are indicated on the accompanying chart (A). In general the islands
are mountainous, covered with verdure, and in parts, especially of
Hawaii, possessing very considerable areas of forest, whose vegetation
is that of the tropics.
The Hawaiian group is composed of eight inhabited, and of four
uninhabited islands. [Chart B.] The names and dimensions of the
inhabited islands are:


Name.                                     Length. Breadth.         Area
Miles.     Miles.   Square miles.
Hawaii.............................................................          90         74           3, 950
Oahu.....         —.........................................               46         25             530
Maui......-......................................................48                30             620
Kalai...............................-..........                  25         22             500
Molokai...........................................................            40          7             190
Lanai.................................... —.....9......... -..             17          9             100
Niihau............................................................  20       7              90
ahulaui..........................................................   11          8              60


The first five of these islands contain the bulk of the population as
well as the chief industries.
Three of the four uninhabited islands of the group are Kaula, Lenua,
and Molokini.
The total area of the inhabited islands is about 6,040 square miles.
"All of these islands are volcanic. No other rocks than volcanic are
found upon any of them, excepting a few remnants of raised sea beaches
composed of consolidated coral sands. All the larger ones are very
mountainous.
"The culminating points of the island Hawaii are Mauna Kea, 13,900
feet, and Mauna Loa, 13,700 feet," the highest points of the group. -
"In general the island group consists of the summits of a gigantic
submarine mountain chain, projecting its loftier peaks and domes above
the water." *
On the island of Hawaii the volcanic forces are still in operation; on
the other islands they are extinct.
None of the mountains are of sufficient height to reach the line of
eternal snow.
* See Hawaiian volcanoes, Capt. C. E. Dutton, U. S. A. Capt. (now Major) Dutton
adds: "Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea, referred to their true bases at the bottom of the
Pacific, are therefore mountains not far from 30,000 feet in height." Maj. Dutton is
freltqently quoted in the following paragraphs relating to the physical characteristics of tie islands.




J14


HAWAIIAN ISLAND.


SOIL.
"Only a small proportion of the area of the islands is capable of sustaining a dense population. The most habitable tracts are near the
seacoast, and only a part or even a small part of these are really fertile.
"The interior portions are mountainous and craggy, with a thin soil,
admirable in a few localities for pasturage, but unfit for agriculture.
"Many parts of the shore belt are arid and almost barren. Others
are covered with lavas too recent to have permitted the formation of
soil, and still others are trenched with ravines so deep and abrupt that
access is difficult.
" Deep rich soils at altitudes adapted to the growth of the sugar cane
probably form less than the fortieth part of the entire area.
"Shallower soils, however, are a little more extensive and yield other
crops of tropical staples in abundance."
CLIMATE.
The climate of the Hawaiian Islands is warm but salubrious, the temperature equable, and the sky usually clear. In the shade it is never
hot and seldom chilly, and there is so little humidity in the air that it
is rarely sweltering, though during the months of January, February,
and March the wind blows strongly from the southwest, and the atmosphere is damp and unpleasant. After such seasons the arid westerly
slopes are clothed with verdure and the capacity of the pastures vastly
increased.
"Upon the islands themselves it may be said that there are almost as
many climates as there are square leagues, and the differences of climatic conditions exhibited by localities separated only half a dozen
miles are extreme.
" As a general rule the windward sides are excessively rainy, the precipitation frequently exceeding 200 inches in a year. The leeward sides
are generally arid, but to this there are some striking exceptions; whenever the land barrier is low enough to permit the trade winds to blow
over it thelee of the barrier is invariably dry and sometimes is as parched
and barren as the sage plains of the Rocky Mountains; the winds throw
down their moisture copiously as they rise to the dividing crest and
descend hot and dry; but when the barrier is lofty enough to effectually
oppose the drift of the air, the lee becomes subject to the simple alternation of daily land and sea breeze. As the sea breeze comes in and
ascends the slope it sends down rain; as the land breeze floats down
ward and outward it is dry and clear.
"The sea breeze sets in a little before noon and the land breeze goes
out a little before midnight.
"Relatively to human comfort, the climate is perfection. It is never
hot, and at moderate altitudes it is never cold. The heat of summer
is never sufficient to bring lassitude, and labor out of doors is far more
tolerable than in the summer of New England or Minnesota."
When the mountains are low, as in Oahu, the rains extend over them
and maintain copious streams for irrigation of the leeward lands where
little rain falls. Very much more rain falls on the windward northeast sides of the large islands. At Hilo in Hawaii as much as 20 feet
has been measured in one year. At Honolulu the mean annual rainfall for five years ending 1877 varied from 32-30 to 46-40 inches, giving
an average of 38 inches.




HAWAIIAN ISLAND&                           15
Hurricanes and typhoons are said to be infrequent. There is, however, at Kawaihae, in the island of Hawaii, a wind called the mumuka
which rushes violently down between the mountains, and is dangerous
to shipping. When hurricanes occur on the island of Maui, great
damage to the sugar crop ensues.
The temperature varies from 550 in winter to 700 in summer for the
early mornings, and attains an average maximum of 75~ in the winter
and 850 in the summer for afternoon heats.
There is no rapid, sudden change; cold or hot waves are unknown.
During the heat of the day the sun-heated lava and rocks create a
strong draft, loaded with vapor from the ocean; this vapor, at 2,000
feet elevation, forms a continuous cloud bank, covering the mountains.
Hail sometimes falls in the vicinity of Hawaii.
Table from Pacific Coast Commercial Record showing temperatures in Honolulu:
Maximum temperature for 1891 in Honolulu................................... 89c
Minimum temperature for 1891 in Honolulu................................... 54~
Maximum daily range of the year........................................... 22~
Average weekly maximum from July 1, to October 1..............-..........  86~
Tablefrom "Vistas of Hawaii" showing temperature for 1890:
Date.                        6a.m. p...9 p.m.
0     S    0
January 7..........7.............7...........................  67 77
February 4.......68                                          72    69
M arch  4......................................................................  66  76  69
April 1..................................................................  67  78  71
May  6..............-.........-.......-..............  69  78  70
June 3....................................................................  73  78  74
Juie 3 ----.. ---- - - -- - - --- --- --------------------------— ~ -~~-~.   -. --- ----- -~~ — --  73  78 1  74
July 1........................................................................  73  82  75
August 5....................................................................  72  84 75
September 2..............,,............................,,,,, 72  83  75
October 7......................8..................  75    76
November 4..71 80 72
December  2..................................................................  71 7 8  72
December  2-.. ---..... --- —-------------—...... —. ----. --- —--  69  78  72


From the above it is evident that the climate of the Hawaiian
Islands is in general that of a mild summer. The hottest months are
July and August, when the thermometer sometimes rises to 900, but
this is considered unusual. Frost is unknown; rains are warm; and
the days and nights are of so nearly the same temperature that little
daily change of clothing is necessary.
EARTHQUAKES.
Earthquakes are of common occurrence in the islands, but they
usually have their center of disturbance in Hawaii. In the islands to
the northwestward the shocks are infrequent and feeble. The shocks
are seldom of a very alarming or destructive character, but small or
moderate tremors are frequent.
POPULATION.
The total population of the Hawaiian Islands in 1890* was 89,990, of
which 58,714 are males, 31,276 females.
* Statesman's Year Book, 1893,




16


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


Latest official census of the Hawaiian Islands.
[Taken December 28, 1890.]
BY DISTRICTS AND ISLANDS.


Hawaii:
Hilo............    9, 935
Puka.... ---. —. --- —-—...-   834
Kau-     ---—. --- —---         2, 577
North Kona —. --- —-----—. 1, 753
South Kona.............. 1,812
North Kohala............... 4,303
South Kohala................  538
Hamakua —.............          5,002
26,754
Mani:
Lahaina..................... 2,113
Wailukn..-.............. 6,708
Hana........................ 3,270
Makawoo.............. 5, 266
17,357
Molokai......................... 2,632


Lanai............                    174
Oahu:
Honolulu.-........... —.22,907
Ewa...................... 2,155
Waianae -...-......-.......  903
Waialna.-..-......2...... 1,286
Koolauloa...................    1, 444
Koolaupoko.................. 2,499
31, 194
Kauai:
Waimea......... ---......... 2,523
/ Niihau.....................       216
Koloa-........ —.............. 1,755
Kawaihau.................. -2, 101
Hanalei......................, 472
Lihue.............  2,792
11, 859


BY NATIONALITY-1890 AND 1884 COMPARED.
1890.      1884.                                     1890.     1884
Natives......................    34,436     40,014   Norwegian.................         227         392
Half-castes..................     6,186      4,218   Britons...................   1,344       1,282
Chinese. —.........-.....        15, 301    17, 937  Portuguese.......                 8, 602      9,377
Americans...................      ],928      2,066   Germans...................       1,034       1,600
Hawaiian-born, foreign par-                           French......................        70         192
ents........-.              7,495      2,040   Other foreigners............       419        416
Japanese.....................    12, 360       116   Polynesian..................       588         956
Total population 1890...........................................           89,990
Total population 1884.................................................................... 80,578
Population by nationality and sex of the Hawaiian Islands, and also of the principal township districts.
[Compiled from the latest census, 1890.]


Nationalities.         Honolulu, Wailuku, Lahaina,
Oahu.    Maui.   Maui.


Natives, males............................
females...................
Half-castes, males......................
females.....................
Chinese, males...........................
females...-.......-........
Hawaiian-born, foreign parents, males...
femnales
Americans, males.........................
females......................
British, males...........................
A  females..........................
Germans, males......................
females.......................
French, males............................
females.........................
Portuguese, males.......................
females......................
Japanese, males..........................
females........................
Norwegians, males......................
females....................
Polynesians, males......................
females...................
All others, males......................
females.......................
Total..............................


4,494
4, 068
1,257
1,346
3,950
457
1,250
1, 236
767
431
529
267
261
105
25
23
933
799
277
111
55
21
49
23
151
22


1, 260
1,178
267
248
1,202
33
254
215
65
23
53
5
29
5
7
402
326
842
183
31
11
22
14
36
32


687
599
199
101
89
5
41
39
15
11
7
4
7
29
24
249
40
33
15
7
2


Hilo,   Lihe,
Hawaii. Katai.
1,076      411
900      310
175       49
189       61
1,264      347
19        9
537      203
513      177
90       11
27        7
68        8
16        2
27      163
7      108
4.........
869      237
686      195
2,703      363
708       60
6...... 6
22       23
8       17
27       16
3
9 935    2,792


Population whole
islands.


18,364
16,072
3,085
3,101
14,552
779
3,909
3,586
1, 298
630
982
362
729
305
46
24
4,770
3,832
10,079
2,281
155
72
404
184
371
48


I I             I.I


22,907     6,708    2,1131


89, 0










HAWAIAN ISLANDS                      17
CHARACTERISTICS, RELIGION, EDUCATIOn.
The natives are a good-tempered, light-hearted, pleasure-loving people. It is probable that little difficulty is found in governing them as,
of themselves, they are not inclined to turbulence nor disposed to
revolt against any form of government. Like children, they are easily
led and controlled. Eveh when the Hawaiian Islands were discovered,
the people were by no means savages, but had an organized state of
society. After discovery, civilization made progress as rapidly, it is
said, with these people as with the Japanese; and in twenty-five years
after the landing of the missionaries (1820), the whole people had, in a
great measure become Americanized. But to-day, except politically as
the one-time owners of the islands, the natives are but an unimportant
element of the people and their consent or opposition Could have but
little influence upon the course of events. They are a peace-loving
race, and, in a military sense, are not worth consideration, but they are
brave individually and make, it is said, excellent seamen. Little resistance could be anticipated from them even in defense of their country.
RELIGION.
All forms of religion are tolerated. According to the latest statistics there are:
Protestants..........................-..... 29,685
Roman  Catholics..................................................... 20, 072
Mormons.................................  3, 576
Hebrews, less than.................. -.......................... aso   100
EDUCATION.
Education is general.
There are 178 schools, with 10,000 pupils, of whom 5.559 are natives
and 1,573 half-castes. In 1890-'92 326,922 was allotted for public
instruction. (Sum allotted for public instruction, 1892-'94, $210,600.
Statesman's Year Book, 1893.)
LAWS.
The laws are modeled on those of the United States. There is a
supreme court of justice, and, in addition, circuit judges and justices
of the peace.
MILITARY FORCES AND POLICE.
The military forces authorized by law consist of the household
guards, fixed at 65 men. It is reported that all but 16 of these men
have been discharged, that number being retained as a guard for the
deposed queen (February, 1893). Volunteer military organizations
are prohibited by law.
There is also an organized police force.
LANGUAGE.
The language is very largely made up of vowels, giving to the spoken
tongue a pleasant liquid sound somewhat difficult to acquire. The
consonants all have the English sound, the vowels that of the German
3. Rep. 227 -2




18


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


vowels, except i, which is the same as the German ie.- there are no
silent letters in the written Hawaiian language.
English is very generally spoken throughout the group.
GOVERNMENT.
Under the great chief Kamehameha the islands of the Hawaiian
group became consolidated into a kingdom about the beginning of the
present century, and continued; with occasional interference, from
European powers, as an independent nation under the rule of the
descendents of the first great chief.
At the beginning of the present year the Government was a constitutional monarchy, ruled by a queen aided by a cabinet consisting of
4 ministers, and by a legislature composed of 24 members of the house
of nobles and 24 representatives. These, with the- ministers, made a
total of 52. Members of both houses were elected by a popular vote.
An educational qualification was necessary for all voters, and a property qualification for electors for nobles. In January of this year the
revolution occurred which resulted in the present Provisional Government.
BUSINESS.
Business is almost entirely carried on by foreigners, principally
Americans, British, Germans, and Chinamen. 'Many of the principal
offices are filled by foreigners or by native-born whites.
CURRENCY.
Gold and silver coins of all nations are current as legal tender at
real or nominal value. From 1884 only United States gold coins have
been legal tender for more than $10; no paper money exists excepting
in form of treasury certificates for coin- deposited.
FINANCE.*
The budget is (was) voted for a biennial period. The following table
shows the revenue and expenditures in dollars for the last five financial
periods:
1882-84.  1884-286.  1886-'88.  1888-90.  1890-'92.
Revenue................  $3,092,085  $3,010,655  $4, 812, 576  $3, 632,197  $4,408,033,
Expenditures.............  2, 216, 406  2, 988, 722  4, 712,285  3,250, 510  4,095,891


The revenue is largely derived from customs ($1,204,305, 1890-'92)
and internal taxes ($963,495, 1890-'92), while the largest item  of
expenditure was for the interior ($1,641,848, 1890-'92). The debt,
March, 1892, was:
Bonded debt...................................................$2, 314, 000
Due depositors' postal-savings bank......903,% 162
Interest varies from 5 to 12 per cent.
Statesman' Year Book, 1893.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,


19


COMMERCE-EXPORTS AND, IMPORTSSugar and rice are the staple industries, while coffee, hides, bananas,
and wool are also exported.
The following table shows the commerce and shipping for five years:
peaors.             mpots. Native ex- Customs Ships en-. ports.  receipts. tered. T[O""l~
1887....................................-...  $4,944,000  $9,435,000  $595,000  254  210,783
1888..........................................  4,541.000  11,631,000  546,000  246  221,148
1889..........................................  5, 439, 000  14, 040,000  550, 000  288  223,57
1890...........................................  6,962,000  13,143, 000  696, 000  295  230.120
1891...........................................  39,000  10,259.000  660,000  310  284,155
The chief exports in 1891 were:
Sugar.-.................................... pounds..  274,983,580
Rice  -................................................... do...  4,900,450
Bananas................................................. bunches-.  116, 660
Wool. —........... —.... --- —....... —........ --- pounds..  97,119
The imports are mainly groceries, provisions, clothing, grain, timber,
machinery, hardware, and cotton goods.
Ninety-one per cent of the trade is with the United States.*
PRODUCTS, RESOURCES, VEGETATION.
Besides sugar and rice, the staple products, coffee, bananas, oranges,
and other fruits are largely grown. Food products are abundant,
especially of the kind suitable to a hot climate.
The native food consists largely of the taro plant, of which the best
varieties are grown in shallow ponds of fresh water. It is stated that
about 40 square feet of taro will yield enough to supply one man for
a year, this being his principal food. From this plant is made the poi,
which is the ordinary food of the Kanaka.
The sweet potato grows even amongst the rocks and flourishes
abundantly in good soil, while the common potato sometimes grows
well, though is often injured by worms.
Wheat and corn are grown; the former was once cultivated for
export. Flour is made, but it is said that the islands now receive all
their cereal products from California.
The quality of the coffee raised is said to be equal to the choicest.
The climate is also very favorable to the growth of the long staple
sea-island cotton; but as this variety must be picked by hand the high
price of labor in the islands renders its culture unprofitable.
Tropical fruits of nearly all kinds grow in the greatest abundance,
the orange, lemon, lime, mango, pineapple, chirimoya or custard apple,
the alligator pear, pomegranate, and guava, all of which are exotic.
The banana is indigenous, and is the most abundant of all fruits;
besides it there are the ohia apple-a fruit peculiar to the Pacific
islands, soft, juicy, and mildy acid-many varieties of palms, the
choicest trees of India, the caoutchouc, the papaya, the traveler's tree
of Madagascar, and other foreign plants.
INDUSTRIES.
"The chief industry of the islands is the cultivation of sugar cane.
For this the soil (although the area is limited) seems better adapted
'Statesman's Year Book, 1893.




20                    HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
- than any other in the world. The yield will average about 5,000
pounds of sugar to the acre, and choice fields sometimes yield twice
that amount. Large amounts of American capital have heen invested
in the plantations and in the accessory commerce."
Large flocks of sheep and herds of cattle are found. These animals
are raised chiefly for their wool and hides. On the island of Lanai
great flocks of sheep pasture, while in Hawaii considerable numbers of
wild cattle are still found in the mountains;* wild goats and wild hogs
also exist in great numbers, and it is said that wild horses and asses
are also found.
DISEASES (OTHER THAN LEPROSY).
It is asserted that diseases, other than leprosy, are not as troublesome as in most places considered healthful. Malarial fevers are
thought to be infrequent, nevertheless in the monthly table (March,
1891) the greatest number of deaths for the year, 89, is recorded as due
to "fever."
Consumption (probably imported cases) comes next with 74; "old
age" next with 59. Amongst the other more important causes of death
are diarrhea, 29; dysentery, 15. From diseases of the liver but 2 died,
while 25 died of disease of the heart.
From this it would seem that the diseases common to the tropics —
fever and stomach troubles-are to be guarded against. Rheumatism
is prevalent in many of the damper localities; smallpox occasionally
appears; and measels has on one or two occasions carried off many of
the natives, owing to their manner of life, but this disease is now easily
controlled when it makes its appearance. Lung and chest troubles are
almost unknown to natives of the islands. In fact, the Hawaiian Islands
are regions of unusual healthfulness.
The general health of the natives is steadily improving; leprosy,
now largely under medical control, is gradually being stamped out., ce Leprosy.)
MANNER OF LIFE, CLOTHING.
The whites live, of course, much as they live at home, and usually in
well-constructed houses of European style. The natives live as a rule
in grass huts, upon native food, largely taro and fruit, and wear clothing
of light cotton stuff, a straw hat, but shoes rarely.
Woolens are not in general use, but very light flannels are recommended for strangers at all seasons.
At night blankets are rarely needed, but a light blanket is often comfortable. Houses have no fireplaces.
For troops clothing for all seasons should be light flannel drawers
and shirts, wide straw hats or helmets, and the light quality of outer
garments issued to troops on the southern stations.
Ample tentage should be provided for use in localities where heavy
and sudden rainfalls are frequent, and light blankets should be carried.
The ration should be suited to the requirements of a warm climate.
DDescended from the animale introduced by Vancouver in 1792.




HAWAIIAN ISLAND.


21


IND1VID UAL CHARACT'ERISTICS OF THE EIGHT INHABITED ISLANDS
OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
'ISLAND OF OAHU (Map C).
This island has the form of an irregular quadrangle; it lies 23 miles
northwest of the nearest island of the group, Molokai. Length about
46, breadth about 25 miles,
Oahu, though not the.largest, is the most important of the Hawaiian
group, as it contains Honolulu, the capital, chief seaport, and principal
city.
Coast.-The greater part of the island is surrounded by a coral reef
often half a mile wide.
The windward side of the island presents a gigantic cliff hardly accessible, except at one point reached by a road cut with great labor from
the mountain side; but the leeward side descends from the mountain
to the sea in very moderate slopes deeply cut by ravines.
The northeastern coast of the island is generally a rugged plateau
descending by gentle slopes to the water. When viewed from the
ocean, this coast appears to be formed of detached hills rising steeply
and covered with woods. The intervening valleys are fertile and well
cultivated. From the southeast extremity of the island, called Makapuu
Point, to the Mokapu Peninsula, the coast is often marked by scattered
islets and rocks; and beyond, the peninsula is indented by a considerable bay extending to Kaoio Point, thence to Kahuku, the northern
point of Oahu. Along this part of the coast is a narrow strip of land,
varying from a half to 2 miles in breadth, only a few feet above the
level of the sea. It is very fertile, and has a gradual ascent to the foot
of the mountains.
From Kahuku to the village of Waimea lies a level plain from 2 to 6
miles wide, and but slightly above the level of the sea. It is a good
pasture, and at many of its frequent holes and crevices may be seeb
streams of clear and cool fresh water making their subterranean way
from the mountains to the outlets in the sea below low-water mark.
The southwest side of the island is composed chiefly of craggy mountains, some descending abruptly to the sea, others terminating a small
distance from it; thence a low border of laud extends to a shore formed
by sandy beaches, bounded by rocks on which the surf beats heavily.
The southwest extremity is Laeloa, or Barber Point; thence the shore
continues low, flat, and covered with bushes to the entrance of Pearl
River, about 12 miles from Honolulu.
Some of the land in this vicinity is of extreme fertility.
Interior. —Two parallel ranges of hills traverse Oahu from southeast
to northwest, separated by a low plain. The highest point is Kauia,
4,060 feet, in the west range. The east range is much longer than the
other, and its ridge is very broken; lateral spurs extend from many
ravines on the land side, but for 30 miles on the other side the range
presents to the sea a nearly vertical wall without a breaks There are
few craters in the loftier heights; volcanic activity seems to have ceased;
but several groups of small cones with craters, some of lava, some of
tufa, exist. Valleys are numerous, with lateral ravines, in which water
courses and cascades are found.
A chain of mountains rises near the center of the east part of the
island to 3,175 feet, and descends near the middle into the Ewa Plain,
which divides this range from the distant and elevated mountains that




22                    HAWAIIAN ISLAND&
rise in a line parallel with the southwest shore. The Ewa Divide lies 5
miles west of Honolulu. This Ewa Plain is nearly 20 miles in:length
from Pearl River to Waialua, and in some parts is 9 or 10 miles across;
its soil is fertile, and watered by a number of rivulets running along
deep water courses emptying into the sea.
Plain of Honolulu.-This plain is some 10 miles in length, and in
some parts 2 miles in width from the sea to the foot of the mountains.
The whole plain is covered with rich, alluvial soils, in places 2 or 3
feet deep. Under this lie volcanic ashes and cinders 14 to 16 feet deep,
resting on a stratum of solid nonvolcanic rock, a kind of sediment
deposited by the sea, in which branches of white coral, bones of fish
and animals, and several varieties of marine shells have been found.
A number of wells have been dug to a depth of 12 to 13 feet in the
substratum of rock, always reaching good clear water,.which, though
free from salt or brackish taste, rises and falls with the tide.
Inland from Waikiki, near Honolulu, and reached by the Punahou
road, lies the Manoa Valley, whose upper portion divides into numerous
canyons.
There is a broad valley called Nuuanu, bounded by a mountain wall
20 miles in length, which rises from the green, rolling plain below.
Less than 5 miles from Honolulu, in a westerly direction, lies the
valley of Moanalua. Here are fine rice fields, cocoanut groves, and
fish ponds.
In the district of Waianae the bases of the mountain lie farther from
the sea and a narrow valley, presenting a fertile and cultivated aspect,
seems to wind for some distance through hills.
In the Waialua bay district the soil is sandy and poor, but a short
distance inshore an agreeable change takes place.
CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, OAHU.
Honolulu.
Honolulu is the capital and principal port of the Hawaiian Islands,
and is situated on the south side of Oahu, on a narrow plain at the
foot of the eastern range of mountains.
The aspect of the country around Honolulu, as seen from the roads,
is barren; and the plain on which the town stands is destitute of verdure. This plain extends east and west from the town, while behind it
the land rises gradually towards the Nuuanu Valley. Several cratershaped hills are in sight, one of which, named -Punch Bowl Hill, 498
feet high, lies close to the northeast side of the town.
The central part of Honolulu consists of regularly laid out streets,
on either side of which stand houses and warehouses of European style,
frequently placed within spacious, inclosed gardens. The outer portions of the town are chiefly composed of grass huts inhabited by
natives. Honolulu would, probably, burn easily to the ground.
Amongst the principal buildings are the spacious Government houses,
in which all the public offices are inclosed, the King's palace, a fort,
two hospitals, several churches and chapels belonging to the different
religious denominations, custom house, sailors' home, and several
schools.
Hospitals.-There is a quarantine hospital on the west side of the
harbor, and a good general hospital to which sailors and others are
admitted at $1.25 per diem.
Shops. —There are foundries, workshops, and shipyards, where conaiderable repairs can be effected.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                       23
Patent slip.-A patent slip-has been constructed by the Government
on the east side of the harbor opposite the outer light house. This slip
can take a vessel of 1,700 tons.
The harbor is formed by an opening in the coral reef, about 150 yards
wide at the entrance and 300 yards wide off the town, and rather more
than a mile in length. Though small it is capable of accommodating
a good number of vessels. Depth on bar is 30 feet.
Wharves.-The railway crosses the flats on the north side of the harbor and terminates at two wharves, with 19 feet of water alongside
each of them. The west wharf is used by ships.
There is in the harbor altogether 1,900 feet of wharf frontage, with a
depth of 21. feet, and 700 feet with depths of from 17 to 19 feet, and
about 1,200 feet with less depth.
Tides —The tidal streams are regular, running six hours each way.
The flood is to the westward. Springs rise from 2~ to 3 feet.
Supplies.-Supplies of all kinds are plentiful. Beef, mutton, fowls,
eggs, vegetables, and fruit can be obtained at moderate prices.
Water can be procured from the shore in a tank. It is good, but very
expensive, even in the inner anchorage being $2.50 a ton. This for
ships.
Implements and building materials (with the exception of timber,
which is good and moderate in price) are excessively costly in Honolulu. The demand for and sale of articles required for the equipment
of ships have greatly diminished.
Probably material for repair of arms, equipments, and munitions of
troops could be obtained with difficulty, Or not at all.
Water and lighting.-Honolulu has an abundant supply of excellent
water-pure, free from limestone or alkali, soft, and adapted to all the
uses of the city. It is brought from reservoirs at the upper end of the
lovely Nuuanu Valley, and conveyed by pipes through the business
and principal residence districts. The city is lighted by electricity,
the power for the generation of which is derived from the reservoirs
referred to. Both the water and lighting systems are controlled by the
Government.
Coal.-Welsh or Australian coal of good quality can be obtained from
European firms. About 15,000 tons is the quantity generally kept in
stock.
Climate.-The climate of Honolulu is generally very pleasant and
healthful, especially when the northeast trade wind prevails. The
southerly and southwesterly winds are called by the natives the " sick
winds," because they are followed by small ailments, gastric maladies,
and intermittent fevers, as is the case with the sirocco in Europe.
The following table* gives meteorological observations taken at
Honolulu, 1876:
Mean thermometer.
Months.           MeNo tnmot. Rami     Prevailing winds.
Noon. Midnight. days.
January.....................................  78  70  16 I NE., force 8, maximum.
Feoruary.....................................  78  69  10  NE., force 3, average.
March...................................   75  72  15 S.. force 3, calm at ght.
April.....................................  77  71  15 NE., force4, lightatnight.
May....................         79      72  11 NE., force 4.
Jun........................80            73    5 NE., force 3.
July.......................................... 80  75  13  NE., calm   at night
August.....................................  81i  75  15  NE.
September...............................   81  75  5  NE., 21days; B., 9 days.
Pacific islands. Sailing directions. Admiralty.




24


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


The barometer generally falls below 30 during southerly winds.
Population.-Honolulu has a population of 23,000 or 24,000, of various
nationalities, consisting principally of whites, natives, Chinese, and
Portuguese. Of these the whites are the controlling element in commercial, manufacturing, and general affairs, though there are several
business houses in the hands of the Chinese. The Portuguese are
chiefly engaged in manual labor.
The most intelligent class of Hawaiians are employed in government
or commercial positions; of the lower classes of the natives some are
laborers; others exist by fishing, farinig, and various occupations.
Of the whites, Americans or those of American descent largely predominate in numbers and influence, though those of German and
British extraction are very prominent.
Horses, carriages, etc.-Hacks are very common in Honolulu. They
are stationed at the corners of all the main thoroughfares, and the fare
to any part of the city is 25 cents. The horses in use are said to be
superior to those of many large cities. There are four livery stables,
well equipped with saddle and carriage animals.
Hotels. —The Royal Hawaiian has accommodations for 150 guests,
electric lights, electric bells, water from artesian wells; Eagle hotel;
Arlington; Waikiki Villa, at Waikiki, 3 miles from Honolulu, connected
by tram cars from Honolulu.
Tram cars.-About 12 or 14 miles of tram-car lines exist. These cars
are drawn by mules or horses. The cars are of American make.
Telephones.-There is said to be an excellent system of telephonic
communication; two companies; rates low; 1,300 telephones in use.
Public buildings.-Iolani Palace, in King street, said to have cost
$500,000.
Aliiolani hall, the main Government building, in which the Legislature meets.
The Queen's hospital, intended for the relief of afflicted Hawaiians
of both sexes, gratis.
The opera house, seating capacity 1,000.
The Lunalilo home, a home for aged Hawaiians.
The insane asylum, from 50 to 75 inmates.
The Oahu jail. Prisoners are required to do road work and other
labor in and around Honolulu.
The fish market.
The Royal Mausoleum.
Honolulu Free Library, contains 10,000 volumes, on general subjects.
Young Men's Christian Association building.
Post office building.
Police station house for the reception of petty offenders.
Current publications.-Pacific Commercial Advertiser, frequency of
publication unknown.
The Hawaiian Gazette, a weekly publication.
The Kuokoa, a weekly publication.
The Bulletin, an evening daily.
Ka Leo, native, daily and. weekly.
Holomua, native, weekly.
Elele, native, weekly.
Monthly publications.-The Friend, The Anglican Churchman, The
Planter's Monthly, The Paradise of the Pacific.
A Tourist's Guide is issued annually.
The Hawaiian Annual.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


25


The Hawaiian Gazette Publishing Company possesses a very complete printing establishment.
Manufacturing.-Honolulu Iron Works, incorporated 1877. Number
of hands employed, usually about 200. This institution is said to be
equipped with excellent appliances in al its departments.
Honolulu Steam Rice Mills-Large quantities of rice milled for home
and foreign use.
Hawaiian Carriage Manufacturing Company.-Manufacture to order
and attend to all kinds of repairing; deal in and keep on hand wagon
makers' supplies.
Hopper's Planing Mill and Iron Works.-Extensive plant, said to
execute all kinds of work in wood and iron.
Enterprise Planing Mill.-Sash, doors, etc.
Lucas Bros.-Sash, doors, etc.
Hawaiian Gazette.-Bookbinding, etc.
Press Publishing Company.-Well equipped printing house.
Tahiti Lemonade Works.-For manufacture of all kinds of aerated
waters.
Another establishment of the same kind.
The usual number of blacksmith and wagon shops, cooperages, etc.
Banking houses.-Bishop & Co.; Claus Spreckles & Co., whose California correspondent is the Anglo-California bank.
The mercantile houses are numerous.
CITIES OF OAHU (OTHER THAN HONOLULU).
Kanehoe, in the Kulau district, the principal place on its side of the
island, situated near Waialai harbor, just beneath the Pali, back of
Honolulu. No details of settlement. The climate here is cooler by a
few degrees than on the leeward side, and frequent showers keep up
the verdure.
Waialua, a large village, lies at the northern end of the plain which
separates the two ranges of mountains. No details.
Waianae, nearly in the middle of the southwest- coast. of the island,
a village lying at the base of the mountains in a narrow valley, fertile
and cultivated. The shore here forms a small sandy bay, and on the
southern side, between two high rocky precipices, in a grove of cocoanut trees, stands the village.
Pearl City, situated on the south side of the island, is a large, irregularly-shaped lagoon or inlet, greatly cut up by projecting points and
islands. This is Puuloa River and Pearl Lochs, where the United
States Government has acquired certain rights.* On the west side of
the channel lies Puuloa village, in the neighborhood of which are large
salt works. Along the inshore side of the Pearl Lochs is a strip of
very fertile land of variable breadth, part of which is under cultivation;
behind the land rises gradually to the Ewa plain.
Pearl City is said to be one of the pleasantest spots on the island,
made accessible by the building of the Oahu Railroad. It is situated
*In 1887 a treaty betweef Hawaii and the United States was made which agreed
that, on condi t ion of the remission of duties on certain articles of Hawaiian produce,
the United States was ceded the exclusive right to establish and fortify a naval station in the Hawaiian Islands. Pearl Harbor was designated as the station.
In 1889 an enlargement of the treaty provisions, so as to confer special advantages
upon both parties, was proposed by the United States. It was suggested that the
cession of a naval station be perpetual as well as exclusive. Another provision was
proposed, viz, to allow the United States to land troops in Hawaii whenever necessary to preserve order. These provisions have not so far been taken advantage of by.
the United States.




26                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
int the midst of a highly productive and fertile district, 12 miles distant
from Honolulu, and is now a beautiful town, with an abundant supply
of pure artesian water, with wide streets, a substantial station, and
several modern residences already built, and with improvements going
on as rapidly as a large force of workmen can push them to completion.
The Oahu Land and Railroad Company founded the town.
Water supply.-Pearl City is said to have facilities for supplying
10,000 inhabitants. There is now an artesian well which flows to a
height of 28 feet, and has a capacity, when pumped, of 2,000,000 gallons
per day. The water from this well will be pumped into a reservoir 100
feet high, and be used to supply the peninsula.
There is another reservoir on the more elevated ground, 200 feet
above sea level, with a capacity of 1,500,000 gallons, which can be
increased to 16,000,000 as soon as necessary. This is supplied from
mountain streatns.
Pearl City consists of 2,200 acres of land, which was owned in. fee
simple by the Oahu Railroad and Land Company, 18,000 acres adjoining which is held by the same company under a fifty-year lease, and is
being sublet for fruit-growing purposes. Three companies have recently
beenJincorporated, two of them with a capital of $30.000 each, and have
rented a choice portion of this land, which will be planted principally
in bananas and pineapples.
The 2,200 acres which the town proper comprises, includes the whole
of the peninsula extending into the harbor, and the lots on the mainland, the latter of which are on a gradual slope of land inclining toward
the mountains.
The site of Pearl City has long been a favorite spot where boating,
bathing, and fishing can be enjoyed under the most favorable circumstances. A good breeze is always blowing from the ocean. The temperature of the water is perfect for bathing all the year round.*
Diamond Hill.-About 3~ miles southeast of Honolulu; a signal
station for incoming vessels.
Waikiki.-A village lying about 1 mile northwest of Diamond Hill.
There is no anchorage in front of it.
ISLAND OF HAWAII. (MAP D.)
In shape the island of Hawaii is a wide triangle, sides 85, 75, and 65
geographical miles. Almost the whole surface is a gentle slope from
one of the four volcanic mountains: Mauna Kea, on north, 13,805 feet,
the highest peak in the Pacific Ocean; Mauna Loa, on south, 13,600
feet; Mauna Hualalai, on west, 8,275 feet; and Mauna Kohala, on northwest, 5,505 feet. The slopes on the west are so gentle that the base of
terminal.cones may be reached on horseback. In the Mahukona district the face of the country is regular, ascending gradually from coast
to summit of highland.
The plain lying between the mountains of Hawaii is many square
miles in extent.
Coast.-The south point of the island of Havfii, called Ka Lae, is
very low, rising with a gentle slope to the hills behind. The southern
side of the island is much drier and the country more open and free
from forest than on the north, where, indeed, the forests are very dense.
From the south to Kumukahi, theeast point of Hawaii, there are no
bays or good anchovages.t The coast is exposed to wind and swelL
*Pacific Coast Commercial Record.  t E cept the small bay at Kaaaln.




HAWAIIN ISLA&ND                       27
From the east point almost to Hilo —Bay the coast is precipitous, and
against it the sea continually beats with violence; thence for thirty
miles the shore is remarkable for the number of streams (85), running
at the bottom of ravines, 1,800 to 2,000 feet deep, which furrow the side
of Mauna Kea and render travel along its coast verylaborious. Ridges
between the ravines, terminating at the sea in precipices from 100 to
500 feet high, oblige the road to run inland. The northeastern coast is
very generally steep and rocky, though here and there are small bays or
breaks in the cliffs where the natives are able to land their canoes.
|  polu Point is the northern extremity of the island. Behind it lies
an extensive plain in good state of cultivation, rising gradually to the
foot of the mountains.
From the north point of the island the west coast is at first barren,
owing to want of rain; the face of the country is regular, ascending
gradually from the coast to the summit of highland in the interior.
From Kawaihe Bay to the village of Kailua there is no anchorage or
shelter.  '
Kealakekua Bay, where stands the monument to Capt. Cook, R. N., is
the best anchorage of the south coast; but south of it lies a rugged,
lava-covered shore, where large masses of rock, miles in extent, often
form perpendicular cliffs against which the sea beats with fury.
This formation extends half a mile into the interior, and as the distance from the sea increases the soil becomes richer and more productive.
The face of the country within this rocky barrier is rough and covered
with blocks of lava more or less decomposed, but at a distance of 2
miles from the coast begins to be well covered with woods of various
kinds, which are rendered almost impassable by an undergrowth of
vines and ferns.
The interior of the island of Hawaii is a strange blending of fertility
and desolation. In the valleys are often found regions of extraordinary
richness, that are reached only by crossing arid districts strewn with
rocks and bowlders, or overlaid by recent streams of lava still uncovered
by soil.
Barren wastes are succeeded by vegetation so dense as to be almost
impenetrable, or by pleasant grass lands lying near forests of the peculiar koa tree, which is characteristic of this island. The trees in the
koa forests frequently grow close together from a soil carpeted with
long rich grass; they are large in size, of hard, dark wood, and were
formerly greatly used to make the canoes of the islanders.
The density of the forests is proportional to the amount of rainfall,
which, upon the windward side of Hawaii, is phenomenally great.*
On Hawaii is found a peculiar grass, said to have been brought to
the island by accident. In its green state it is hardly fit for pasture.
Cattle and horses eat it, but it apparently affords very little nourishment, though more when cured. So dense and high is this grass that
it is difficult to ride through it. Another, and perhaps the best variety
of grass, comes from Mexico; it is called, locally, manianan grass, and
wherever it grows forms the richest and most velvety sward imaginable. It is highly nutritious and animals are very fond of it.
Such being the character of the interior of the island, roads are in
general bad, and communication difficult.
* Maj. Dutton says that this may attain to more than 300 inches annually in the
aterior of H. waii; 240 inches have been measured at Hilo.




28


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, HAWAII.
Hilo.-Hilo, or Byron Bay, on the northeast side of Hawaii, is the
only anchorage on the northeast coast; the bay is about 7~ miles wide
and 3 miles deep. It is fully exposed to the northeast. trade wind.
The scene which the island presents, as viewed from the anchorage
in Hilo Bay, is novel and beautiful; the shores are shielded with extensive groves of cocoanut and bread fruit trees, interspersed with plantations of sugar cane, through which numerous streams are seen hurrying to the ocean. To this belt succeeds a region some miles in width,
free from woods, but clothed in verdure, while beyond is a wider belt of
forest, whose trees, as they rise higher and higher from the sea, change
their character from the vegetation of the tropics to that of the polar
regions. Above all tower the snow-capped summits of the mountains.*
On the coast of the bay near Cocoanut Island lie the creek and village of Whyeatea, where landing may be effected in all weathers.
There are two piers to the northward of the entrance of the creek,
alongside the northernmost of which ships drawing 15 feet of water can
lie. The shore then turns westward along a sandy beach for nearly 1
mile to the bottom of the bay, where the town of Hilo is situated.
Hilo is the principal town in Hawaii, and ranks next to Honolulu in
importance and population. The town may be easily recognized from
the seaward by the tall white square towers of the Roman Catholic
church and the pointed white spire of the Protestant church. There are
also several other large buildings, both public and private, such as a
court-house, schools, governor's house, stores, etc.
There are several sugar plantations in the vicinity of Hilo on which
the town is mainly dependent for prosperity.
Besides sugar and molasses, Hilo exports hides, tallow, goatskins,
arrowroot, rice, and a small amount of coffee.
As before stated, the rainfall here is very great, and accounts for
the luxuriant verdure of the district.
The Hawaiian Government steam vessels communicate with Hilo from
Honolulu once a week, and schooners ply constantly between the two
ports. (See Communications and Appendix I.)
Supplies.-Supplies of nearly all descriptions can be obtained: Beef,
10 cents per pound; bread, about 9 cents, and vegetables at 6 cents.
A small pier has been built in front of the town, but in 1888 the sand
had washed up and closed it as a landing place. The only landing
place is at Whyeatea.
Close to the west of the town is Waterfall Creek, the mouth of
Wailuku River, and about 2 miles from the entrance is Cocoanut Point.
There is a good watering place up this creek which is generally easy of
access, except when the wind is blowing hard from seaward; on such
occasions the surf is high, and the rocky bar at the entrance becomes
dangerous for boats to pass. The water is excellent and abundant.
Hilo Bay is a safe anchorage, and next to Honolulu may be considered the best in the Hawaiian Islands. With a strong trade wind
there is a slight sea, unpleasant enough for boats but not sufficient to
endanger the safety of a ship. The westerly wind, which is felt most,
seldom blows strongly.
A well-sheltered anchorage can be picked up anywhere under the
lee of Blonde Reef in from 5 to 7 fathoms. A vessel drawing 15 feet or
Pacific Islands Vol. n, Hydrographic Office. Admiralty.




HAWALI   ' ISLAND&                  29
less may anchor so as to be quite under the lee of Cocoanut Island and
Keo Kea Point.
Mahukona.-A small village with anchorage off it about 6 miles south
of Upolu Point. The place is becoming important, through the energy
of a Mr. Wilder, who has made a most convenient landing place, and
constructed a railway 15 miles long to bring sugar from the Kohala'
district round the north end of the island.
The cargo boats lay along the side of the pier and are laden and
cleared very quickly by means of a steam "crab" which works a truck
up and down the incline.
There is no water in the place. All the fresh water has to be brought
from Kohala by train. An attempt to obtain artesian water failed.
The anchorage is indifferent, and with winds to the westward of
north or south would be untenable. Freight is disembarked and shipped at night, during the greater part of the year.
The soil along the shore is barren for 3 or 4 miles inland owing to
the want of rain. The face of the-country is regular, ascending gradally from the coast to the summit of the high land.
Kawaihae village is situated in a grove of cocoanut trees, just behind
a sandy point near the center of the bay of the same name. The village consists (1891) of a general store, 2 or 3 houses, and several
huts along the shore. In front of the village is a pier for boats.
So much of the soil of this district as lies along the coast, though
rich, is badly watered; 7 or 8 miles inland from Kawaihae Bay it
becomes exceedingly rocky and barren.
The climate is upon the whole unpleasant, especially at Waimea,
about 9 miles eastward of Kawaihae, in consequence of the exceedingly strong trade wind, which brings with it a mist toward sunset.
This wind rushes furiously down between the mountains which bound
the valley of Waimea and becomes very dangerous to the shipping in
the bay. It is called by the natives mumuku, and is foretold by an
illuminated streak seen far inland, believed to be caused by the reflection of the twilight on the mist that always accompanies the mumuku.
The principal exports of the district are hides, tallow, and beef.
On approaching the anchorage a good landmark is a conspicuous
mound situated a short distance south of the village. Another conspicuous landmark is a white tomb in the form of a pyramid.
There is a coral reef in front of the village, but a boat passage exists
around the north end and close to the shore, where landing is easy.
With strong westerly winds the anchorage would be very exposed
and unsafe. The sea breeze from the westward lasts all day, and the
northeast trade or land breeze sometimes blows strong all night.
Supplies.-Beef may be obtained here at 6 cents a pound; potatoes are
abundant, and plenty of fish may be caught with the seine.
'he watering place, which is in a small sandy bay, is only a pool of
rain water collected in a hole, and would require 500 feet of hose to
pump into a boat. In the summer the water becomes somewhat stagnant and unfit for drinking; in winter more rain falls, and it then
becomes a stream.
Settlement-Kailua Bay.-The bay affords a good anchorage at most
seasons of the year. (In 1841 the residence of the governor of Hawaii
Island was established here, and great advances were being made in the
civilized arts and industries.) There is a most convenient landing place
on a sandy beach on the west side of the bay, formed by the jutting out
of two points, between which is a small cove protected from the surf by
rocks.




30                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Rain seldom falls here except in showers, and a rainy day once in the
year is looked upon as remarkable. This, together with the absence of
all dew, prevents the existence of much cultivation. There grows,
nevertheless, a coarse vegetation sufficient to pasture a few hundred
goats, and a mile back from the shore the surface is covered with herbage which maintains cattle, etc.; 2 miles in the interior there is sufficiedt moisture to keep up a constant verdure.
The temperature is mild and equable. During the winter the thermometer ranges from 640 to 850; summer, 680 to 860.
The prevailing winds are the land and sea breezes, which are very
regular; the most severe gales are those from the southwest, which last
from a few hours to two or three days, and render anchorage unsafe.
On approaching Kailua Bay, the town may be recognized by the 2
churches and the cocoanut groves on the shore to the westward.
There is a most convenient landing place, as noted above.
Kona.-Settlement near Kealakekma Bay, situated west side Hawaii;
best anchorage on that coast. Climate mild, 620 to 760 in winter, 700
to 860 in summer. Strong winds are seldom felt. During day, cool
sea breeze; during night, land breeze. It was at Kealakekua Bay that
Capt. Cook was killed (1779). On west of Kanwalda Cove is a village
of same name, where the monument to Cook now stands. The shore
all around the bay is rocky, making landing dangerous when there is
a swell setting in, except at Kealakekua village. Here there is a fine
sandy beach, with burying place at one extremity and a small well of
fresh water at the other. The bay is easy of access; but anchorage is
not good, owing to the great depth of water and foul bottom. Kanwalda Cove, though exposed to winds south and southwest, may be considered safe anchorage, except in winter.
Kona is a village a few miles inland, and is considered one of the
most healthy spots in the whole group, and especially beneficial to people suffering from weakness or disease of lungs or chest. It is said
that many visitors come here from California to pass the winter, and
there are one or two commodious boarding houses for their accommodation.
From the landing place, about half a cable southwest of Cook's monument, there is a good road leading to Kona.
Supplies.-Beef, fowls, sweet potatoes, and plantains can be obtained
in Kealakekua; also water at Napupu, a village south of Kealakekua;
but the tank is falling to decay, and the water is brackish in all wells
in the vicinity of Kanwalda Cove.
ISLAND OF MAUI. (Map E.)
The island of Maui lies northwest of Hawaii. The channel which
separates them has a width of 28 miles.
The island is 48 miles long in a west-by-north and east-by-south direction; it is divided into two oval-shaped peninsulas, connected by a low
isthmus 6 miles across, and only a few feet higher than the beach.
The whole island, which is volcanic, was probably produced by the
action of the two adjacent volcanoes.
Coast.-The southwest point of Maui, Cape Hanamanioa, is formed
iy rugged, craggy rocks.  From here along the coast 25 miles to
Alau islet the whole shore is rugged and offers no anchorage or
shelter. From seaward the land appears to ascend abruptly; it is
densely covered with trees and vegetation, while here and there a few




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


31


habitations appear. Alau islet, lying off the east coast of Maui, is very
small. Kauiki head, the eastern point of Maui, is-an old crater which
is connected by a low spit to the mainland, and at a distance appears
like an island.
Near this peninsula lies Hana harbor, from which a coast that affords
no shelter extends for 31 miles.
The north coast of East Maui is a succession of deep ravines, which
gradually diminish in breadth as they ascend, and are finally lost in
the flanks of the mountains; traveling along the coast, in consequence,
becomes almost impossible. Cascades several hundred feet in height,
but having little volume of water, are seen falling into these ravines.
The east coast of West Maui is an abrupt precipice several hundred
feet in height, terminating at Kahakuloa Point, the northern extremity
of the island. The southern side of West Maui has a forbidding appearance. The shores, however, are not so steep and rocky as elsewhere,
and have generally a sandy beach.
Off Makena, near the southwest extremity of the island, lies a small
barren islet called Molokini, only visited by fishermen who dry their
nets on its barren surface.
Interior.-The eastern peninsula of Maui, the larger of the two, is
lofty; but though the mountains are often seen above the clouds, they
are never covered with snow.
East Maui rises in an unbroken mountain.
East Maui, although mountainous, has much cultivated land; and
the rich volcanic soil of the Kula district, on the southwest side of the
island, raises abundant crops of potatoes. Wheat and other grains
are also cultivated.
West Maui has many sharp peaks and ridges, which are divided by
deep valleys, descending towards the sea, and opening out into sloping
plains of considerable extent in the north and south sides.
The highest peak of West Maui is Mauna Ika, 6,130 feet.
The connecting isthmus consists of sand, which is constantly shifting and is thrown up in dunes; this region is naturally dry, but during nine months of the year affords fine grazing, feeding large herds
of cattle that are mostly owned by foreigners.
The productions of Maui are those of the other islands, with the
addition of a few fruits, such as grapes, etc.
The highest point of Maui, named Kolakole, is 10,030 feet above the
sea. It is destitute -of trees to the height of about 2,000 feet; then
succeeds a belt of forest to the height of about 6,500 feet, and again
the summit is bare.
The crater of Haleakala is a deep gorge, open at the north and east,
forming a kind of elbow. The inside is entirely bare of vegetation.
The natives have no tradition of an eruption.
Though arid and sandy in appearance, the soil of the isthmus connecting the two parts of the island is good, deep, and exceedingly fertile
where irrigation has been introduced. At Spreckelsville, in the northern part of the peninsula, lie the largest sugar estates of the island.
CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, MAUI.
Hana Harbor.-The anchorage is well protected from the wind and
sea and is very convenient. There is a town here. Details unknown.
iahului Harbor.-Situated between the coral reefs on the northern
side of the low isthmus joining the two peninsulas. Channels about
3j cables wide, 4 cables deep, fully exposed to the northward.




I. 82


HAWAUAN ISLANDS.


KahulI. '-An important place for exporting the produce ofthe northern part of Mani; there are railways connecting it with Wailnuk  to
the westward, and Spreckelsville and Haiku on the east. (See Communications.)
There was being built in 1881, out from the shore near the customhouse, a jetty which it was proposed to extend as far as the edge of
the reef.
Anchorage may be obtained in from 21 to 7 fathoms.
Wailuku.-A flourishing village about 2 miles northwest of Kahului. Here there is a female seminary occupying an extensive range
of coral buildings, beautifully situated on an inclined plane, with high
precipices behind. It is considered one of the best organized establishments in the Hawaiian Islands.
Lahaina.-A town situated on the west side of West Maui, and at
one time a flourishing place much frequented by whaling vessels for
refitting and for obtaining supplies, but now only visited by vessels
loading with sugar, which is grown on the estates in the vicinity.
The town is built along the beach for a distance of three-fourths of
a mile. It is principally composed of grass houses situated as near
the beach as possible. It has one principal street, with a few others
at right angles to it. From seaward the town may be recognized by
some conspicuous buildings, especially Government House, which is
near the beach and has a tall flagstaff before it. The seminary of
Lahainaluna is situated on the side of the mountain above the town.
Off the town there is an open roadstead which is completely sheltered from the trade wind by the high land of Maui, but the holding
ground is reported indifferent.
Supplies.-Supplies of all sorts can be obtained here-beef, vegeta-'
bles, fruit, and water in abundance.
Landing.-The landing place is at a small pier, extending from the
light-house, and protected by a breakwater.
The tide is irregular, generally running northwest sixteen hours out
of the twenty-four.
Patoa.-A roadstead (so called by Vancouver) situated on the southern side of West Maui. "The anchorage at Patoa is abreast of the
easternmost of these valleys, which appeared fruitful and well culti-.vated."
Kamalalaea Bay settlements.-The bay is on the west side of Maui,
lying between two peninsulas, the western side formed by rocky cliffs
and precipices. Nearly in the middle of this side is a village called
Mackerrey, off which is an anchorage in 7 fathoms. No details known.
Maalaea.-Near the head of Kamalalaea Bay, in the northeast corner, is the small village of Maalaea. Here there are some houses for
storing sugar. Besides sugar there is a great quantity of wheat,
maize, and potatoes grown in this district, and supplies of fresh provisions are obtained in plenty from Wailuku, which is about 6 miles
distant.
The anchorage off this place is not good, as the trade wind blows
across the low isthmus in heavy gusts, and communication with the
shore by boats is sometimes interrupted.
There is a small pier here for loading schooners and boats can
always go alongside, the channel leading to the landing place being
about 20 yards wide, between two coral reefs.
Makena, or Makees Landing.-A small indentation in the west coast
of East Maui, near the southwestern extremity of the island. It




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                    33
derives the latter name from a planter whose estate is situated on the
side of Mauna Haleakala, on a plateau 2,000 feet above the sea and
about 5 miles east of the landing place. Near the landing are a stone
church and several ouses. The anchorage is exposed to the'heavy
squalls which occasionally blow over the low isthmus in the center of
Maui, and landing is at times impracticable for ships' boats owing to
the heavy surf. The holding ground is not good.
ISLAND OF KAUAI. (Map F.)
Kauai lies 64 miles west by north of Oahu, and is separated from it
by the Kaieie Waho channel. This island is of volcanic formation,
somewhat circular in shape, 25 miles long and 22 miles wide, and rises
in the center to a peak 5,000 feet in height.
Coast.-From the seaward the northeast and northwest sides appear
broken and rugged, but to the south the land is more even; the hills
rise with a gentle slope from the shore, and at some distance back are
covered with woods.
The southern point of the island is a bold, barren, rocky headland,
falling perpendicularly into the sea.
Ninini Point, north point of Nawiliwili Harbor, is low, level, grassy
land, sprinkled with volcanic bowlders extending from a range of low
hills that stretch along the coast at a short distance from the beach,
which extends northward to Wailua.
Along the coast from Wailua sugar cane appears to be cultivated in
large quantities, especially in the vicinity of Wailua and Kanala Point,
where there are several factories.
From this point to Hanalei Bay are several small villages scattered
along the coast near the mouths of mountain streams which are closed
by sand bars. The land near the sea is flat and very fertile, but soon
rises to the mountains behind. The rivers as well as the sea abound
in fish.
The northwest coast of Kauai, forming the district Na Pali, has a
very rugged appearance, rising to lofty abrupt cliffs that jut out into
a variety of steep rocky points destitute of both soil and verdure, but
terminating nearly in uniform even summits, on which, in the valleys
or chasms between them, are several patches of green. Here and
there a stream running from the lofty mountains behind finds its way
to the ocean.
Mana Point, the western extremity of Kauai, is a long, low sand spit,
commencing at the foot of a high range of mountains, and from it a
sandy plain extends to the town of Waimea. This plain is from
quarter to a mile wide and 150 feet above the sea, whence it rises gradually to the mountains.
It has a sunburnt appearance and is destitute of trees, except on the
low grounds where the cocoanut thrives. The sea here abounds in fish.
Between Waimea and Kaloa Bay, the south point of Kauai, extends a
series of sunburnt hills and barren plains. sloping gradually, to the
shore from the mountains, and here and there intersected by ravines.
There is no cultivation, and the soil only produces a kind of coarse
grass quite unfit for pasture.
Interior.-The island of Kauai is considered one of the most pleasant
of the group. Portions of it appear better adapted to agriculture than
the other islands, and the coffee and sugar plantations on the weather
ep, 2237 —




34'


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


side, which is well watered with streams and by frequent rains, are
very productive; but the lee side is dry and adapted to cultivation
only in valleys.
CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, KAUAI.
Nawiliwili Bay village.-The harbor of Nawiliwill is a small cove on
the southeast side of the island, at the head of a bay of this name.
The greater part of the harbor is blocked by shoals and reefs.
At Nawiliwili Bay is a large village; the soil in the vicinity is rich,
producing sugar cane, taro, beans, sweet potatoes, etc.
There is a small pier in the northwest corner of the harbor, where
landing may be easily effected; but the pier should be approached with
caution, as a reef extends from the shore to the southward of it for
two cables in an easte ly direction.
The local mail steamer runs to this point. (See Communications.)
Wailua.-Formerly a place of some importance, 5~ miles from Ninini
Point, situated on a small river of the same name, in a barren sandy
spot, surrounded by an extremely fertile district. The river, in common
with the others along this coast, is closed at the mouth with sand bars,
but inside is deep and navigable by canoes for several miles.
Coast villages.-From Kanala Point, north and west, 14 miles to
Hanalei Bay, there are several small villages scattered along the coast,
near the mouth of mountain streams closed by sand bars.
Hanalei.-Situated near the bottom of a bay of this name.
Anchorage ground in the bay is spacious in fine weather, but there is
only room for about three vessels in bad weather under the lee of the
reef near the eastern point of the bay.
A landing is generally effected inside the mouth of the river.
Supplies.-Supplies are plentiful-beef, vegetables, and fruits may be
obtained in abundance. Water may be procured by sending boats into
the river, which is easy of access in fine weather, and a short distance
from the mouth the water is perfectly fresh. The town is very picturesquely placed; the mountains rise to a height of from 3,000 to 4,000
feet, and are clothed with verdure from base to'summit, with numerous
rills running down their precipitous sides.
In front of the town is a good beach where great quantities of fish
may be caught with a seine.
The district derives its name from the numerous rainbows formed by
passing showers. The rains are so frequent as to clothe the country in
perpetual green.
On the eastern side of the entrance is a conspicuous dark bluff-head,
with two sandy beaches a short distance to the eastward.
A little way to the southward of this bluff is the mouth of a small
river, in front of which is a bar that may be crossed by boats at half
flood; inside, the bar carries a depth of from one to three quarters
of a fathom and is navigable for several miles for boats drawing 3
feet. About 4 cables from the mouth of the river, on the northern
bank, is a large farm, called "Charlton farm," owned by the English
consul, who keeps a large number of cattle of good breed.
Waimea village.-Situated on Waimea Bay, southwest coast, placed
at the mouth of river of the same name, which runs about 15 miles
inland. At one time a populous native town, but now (1891) only a
small village of little importance. It contains a church.
Boats may ascend the river for about three-quarters of a mile; this
X the only water here that is not brackish. A little to the eastward




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


35


of the village a shoal projects. The trade winds, deflected by the
mountains, often raise a surf which renders landing at times very
unpleasant, sometimes impracticable.
Waimea Bay should be approached with caution, as reefs extend to
the southward. There is a railroad from Waimea to Kekaha. No
details known.
Kaloa Bay village.-About 1 mile west of the south point of Kauai
is a slight indentation of the coast, where there is a considerable village called Kaloa, off which anchorage may be obtained but in a very
exposed position.
The country around the village of Kaloa is much broken by hills
and inactive craters; but the soil is good, though dry and very stony,
and is capable of cultivation in many places. There is a sugar plantation here, and there are several large cattle ranches in the vicinity.
The village may be recognized by many high buildings and two
churches; it extends from the beach to a distance of 2 miles up the
slope of a hill. Between the village and Makanueua, the southern
extremity of the island, there is a low point running out into a rocky
ledge that somewhat protects the anchorage.
There is a good landing place at Kaloa, in a small cove protected by
a reef extending about 1 cable from shore; an artificial creek has been
made at the head of this cove, with sufficient space for one boat to enter.
Supplies.-Supplies of beef, vegetables, and fruit may be obtained in
abundance.
ISLAND OF MOLOKAI. (Chart B.)
Molokai is situated north of Lanai, from which it is separated by
Pailolo Channel, 6~ miles wide.
It is apparently formed by a chain of volcanic mountains about 40
miles long and 7 miles broad. The mountains are high and broken by
deep ravines and water courses; the sides are clothed with verdure and
ornamented with shrubs and trees.
Coast.-Lae o Ka Laau, the southwest extremity of Molokai, is a
low black point. On the south side of the island are several small
harbors, the best of which is Kaunakakai, midway between the two
extremes.
From this point to the southeast extremity of the island the distance
by the coast is about 21 miles, thence northward to Kalaua, the northeast point, about 2 miles.
Some 16 miles from Kalaua, and on a peninsula projecting about 2
miles into the sea, is placed the leper settlement of the Hawaiian
Islands.
Interior.-One-third of the island of Molokai, towards the west end,
is a barren waste not susceptible of cultivation, except in the rainy season. It has in consequence but few inhabitants, who are engaged
mostly in fishing.
The eastern two-thirds is almost one entire mountain, rising gradually from the south until it attains an elevation of 2,500 feet, while on
the north it is almost perpendicular. On the south side there is a
narrow strip of land not exceeding a quarter of a mile in width, where
dwell the greater part of the population. The soil is very rich, but
owing to the want of moisture few plants will thrive even here. Resort
is therefore bad to the uplands, which are found to be susceptible of
the highest degree of cultivation.




36                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, MOLOKALKaunakakai.-A town or village situated on the south side of Molokai,
midway between the extremes. There are outer and inner anchorages:
former not good, latter limited.
No supplies are to be obtained at Kaunakakai. No details of town
known.
Kalanao.-Situated near the center of the north coast of Molokai, at
the base of very precipitous mountains, The leper establishment was
erected here about 1865. The anchorage is to the southward of a low
point, extending from the foot of two remarkable, steep mountains.
It can not be considered safe, being exposed to a heavy swell; landing
at Kalanao, always difficult, is at times dangerous.
$upplies.-No supplies can be obtained.
ISLAND OF LANAI, OR RANAI. (Chart B.)
Lies 16 miles northwest of Kahulaui, and is separated from West
Maui by Auau Channel, 7~ miles wide. Lanai is a dome-shaped island,
about 17 miles long and 9 miles broad. Large fissures are visible on its
sides.
The center of this island is much more elevated than Kahulaui, but
is neither so high nor so broken as any of the other islands.
Great part of it is barren, and the island in general suffers much
from the long droughts which prevail. The ravines and glens, notwithstanding, are filled with thickets of small trees.
The island is volcanic; the soil shallow and by no means fertile. The
shores abound with shellfish.
Sheep in large numbers, it is said, are pastured here.
CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, LANAI.
No towns noted; probably none exist.
ISLAND OF NIIHAU. (Chart B.)
The island lies 17 miles west-southwest of Kauai, from which it is
separated by Kumukahi Channel. It is about 20 miles long by 7 miles
broad.
This island is mostly lowland, except on the eastern side, where it
rises directly from the sea to a height of 1,500 feet, and is rocky and
unfit for cultivation. On the western side is a level plain from 2 to 4
miles wide, where the natives cultivate yams, fruits, sweet potatoes, etc.
The soil being dry, the yams grow to great size. The natives are few
in number and very poor; they live almost entirely on the western side
of the island.
Of late years Niihau has been used as a sheep run, and in 1875 there
were said to be about 70,000 sheep on the island.
The eastern shore of Niihau is rocky and wholly destitute of shelter,
but on the western shore there are several open roadsteads.
CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, NIIHAU.
Yam Bay.-An open roadstead about a mile and a half south of Kona
Point, where, in fine wewather anchorage may be 0btained, There is




HAWAIAN ISLANDS.                     37
only one place in the bay where boats can effect a landing in safety
when the sea sets in, a common occurrence; this is on the western side
behind a small reef of rocks that lies a little way off the beach; even
here it is necessary to guard against sunken rocks. No inhabitants
noted.
Cook anchorage.-On the southwest of Niihau, about 4 miles south of
Kona Point; is exposed to the heavy northwesterly swell; the bottom
is composed of large rocks, with patches of sand.
Near the beach are a few huts, a church, and a derrick for loading
and unloading boats.
Landing.-The landing place is protected by some rocks forming a
breakwater in the northeast part of the bay, and is situated just inside
a lava patch which from seaward appears like a point. Landing can
be effected easily in moderate weather, but with a heavy swell it is
impracticable.
Supplies.-Whalers call here occasionally for fresh meat, but the
sheep being bred for wool only, very little meat can be procured; and
only a limited quantity of vegetables and fruit.
Fresh water can only be procured during the rainy season, when the
water courses are full; at other times of the year there is no water but
what the natives have collected it wells in the rock for their own use;
these wells are chiefly near the south end of the island.
Caution.-As the rollers set in with but little warning at Cook anchor.
age, sailing vessels should proceed to sea on first indications of them.
These rollers generally last from three to four days.
ISLAND OF KAHULAUI. (Chart B.)
Called also Tahurowa, separated from East Maui by Alalakeiki Channel, 6 miles wide, is about 11 miles in length and 8 miles wide.
It is low and almost destitute of every kind of shrub or verdure,
excepting a species of coarse grass. The rocks of which it is formed
are volcanic, but nothing is known of any active or extinct craters on
the island.
At one time this island was used as a penal settlement; but it is
now chiefly used as a sheep run, the soil of decomposed lava being of
too poor a quality for cultivation.
CITIES, TOWNS, AND PORTS, KAHULAUI.
No towns noted; probably none exist.
ISLAND OF KAULA. (Chart B.)
This island, called also Tahura, lies 17 miles southwest one-half west
from Niihau. It is a small, elevated, barren rock, destitute of vegetation, and uninhabited; It is visited to collect the eggs of sea birds,
which abound.
ISLAND OF LENUA. (Chart B.)
Lenua, or Egg Island, lies off the north point of Niihan. It is a
small, rugged, barren rock, apparently destitute of soil and without
sign of habitation.




N


38                    HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
ISLAND OF MOLOKINI. (Chart.)
A small islet of the island of Maui, which see.
COMMUNICATIONS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
RAILROADS.
There are, according to the Statesman's Year Book for 1893,56 miles
of railway in the islands of Hawaii, Maui, and Oahu. These roads
were built principally for the transportation of products from the interior
to the seaports.
RAILROADS OF OAHU.
Oahu Railroad. -This line extends from Honolulu, 19 miles, to Ewa
plantation; passing around Pearl Lochs, with a branch along the peninsula to Pearl City, and a spur extending into a quarry at Palama.
Roadbed good. It is proposed to run the railroad completely around
the island.                    %
Depots.-There is an excellent depot at Honolulu; also turntable.
Stations, with suitable houses, at intervals along the line. A fine depot,
also turntable, exists at Pearl City.
Wharfage.-The company's wharf at Honolulu is 60 feet wide and
200 feet long and is ample for present needs. Products can be unloaded
directly from cars to vessels and vice versa.
Rolling stock, etc.-The rolling stock and equipments are of the most
approved and modern style.
At the port of Waianae, in northwest portion of Oahu, there are several small railroads, in all about 4 or 5 miles, branching to plantations
in the interior and along the coast. About these there are, however,
no obtainable data.
RAILROADS OF HAWAII.
In Hawaii, from Mahukona to the Kohola district, some 15 miles of
railroad exist.
RAILROADS OF MAUI.
In the island Maui a little railway of very narrow gauge now connects Wailuku and Kaluilui. The railway also extends 3 miles further
eastward to the sugar mills of the great plantation of Sprecklesville, in
all 13 miles.
(The distances between these places are given from the overland distance tables in the Hawaiian Annual for 1893.)
Data concerning gauge, quantity of rolling stock, etc., as well as reliable maps, are at present unobtainable.
RAILROADS OF KAUI.
On the island of Kani there is (according to the Hydrographic Office
chart of Waimea Bay) a railroad from Waimea village to Kekaha. No
details known.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,


39


ROADS.
There are a few well-constructed roads on the Island of Oahu, leading
from Honolulu to places of interest to tourists; but in general the roads
on the island are not good, being frequently heavy with sand and
muddy in wet districts. No positive information obtainable.
TELEGRAPHS.
There are telegraphs round the island of Oahn as well as in Hawaii
and Maui. Oahu and Hawaii are connected by telegraphic cable.
Total length of telegraphs, 250 miles.
TELEPHONES.
Telephones are in general use in Honolulu and probably elsewhere
on the islands.
POSTAL SERVICE.
For Hawaiian Islands postal service and post-offices.
INTER-ISLAND STEAMERS AND VESSELS.
There are 22 coasting steamers plying between the ports of the island,
of which 9 belong the Inter-Island Steam Navigation Company, 7 to
the Wilder Steamship Company, and the remainder to various private
owners.
There are also 25 sailing vessels belonging to various firms and owners.
There are, besides, 2 steam and 6 sailing merchantmen and traders
of Hawaiian register plying between the islands and foreign ports.
LEPROSY.
In his report to the Hawaiian legislative assembly of 1884, the president of the board of health makes the assertion that " Hawaii has to
meet a calamity of widespread disease. * * At least 2 per cent
of her entire native population is attacked by a fearful and supposed
incurable malady [leprosy], of an exceptional character, that demands
separation and isolation." In the same report it is shown that the
appropriation of $90,000, for the segregation and care of lepers, voted
in 1882, for the biennial period closing March 31, 1884, had fallen short
of the demands upon the health authorities. The Hawaiian law has
provided for the strict segregation of lepers since 1865, and the district
of Kalawao on Molokai, a territory of about 5,000 acres, was selected
at that time for the leper settlement.
It is asserted that up to 1882 at least, the law requiring segregation
was not carried out with vigor, but it is shown that under the partial
enforcement of the law during sixteen. years prior to June 1, 1882,
2,602 cases, an average of 162-62 cases per year, had been sent to the




40


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


lepez settlement. The biennial report of the president of the board of
health for 1890 states that "the work of collecting and segregating
lepers had been carried on with firmness and impartiality, and that the
number of lepers collected and sent to Molokai for the biennial period
closing March 31, 1890, was 798. Of these 2 were of British and 2
were of American birth." The report shows that $331,057.80 was
expended by the board of health during the biennial period, and it is
asserted " that the maintenance of the leper establishment is the almost
bottomless pit into which more than three-fourths of the money appropriated is cast."
It is hopefully claimed, however, "that its requirements are on the
wane, and judging from the most reliable information obtainable there
are but very few undoubted cases of leprosy now at large in the country,
and they will come under the care of the board as rapidly as it is possible to get control of them." In proof of this it is stated that on the
31st of March, 1888, it was estimated that there were then at large
throughout the Kingdom 644 lepers, while at the date of the report
under consideration, March 31, 1890, "according to the best information obtainable, there are * * * about 100 persons supposed to be
affected by the disease still at large who have not been before the
examining board." The reasons why these suspected lepers have not
been examined are stated to be that some very bad and unmistakable
cases are hiding in fastnesses of the mountains, while some mild cases
change their residence so often as to baffle the efforts of the officers of
the law for their arrest.
In regard to the contagious character of the disease and the precautions necessary to be taken it is claimed by Surg. Tyron, U. S.
Navy,* that the spread of the disease in the Hawaiian Islands is due,
or was due at that time, 1883, to the general belief that "the disease
is only slightly contagious, and its treatment as such from the beginning, allowing free individual intercourse, with weak enforcement of
the laws for its suppression."s
That leprosy has not always been regarded by the authorities of the
Hawaiian Islands as eminently contagious is shown by the following
extracts from the report of the president of the board of health to the
legislative assembly of 1884. He says: "Such a characterization is
entirely uncalled for, is not warranted by experienced medical opinion,
and the violent and hasty segregation which it would inspire is a wrong
to a suffering community." "The confirmed leper should be separated
from the community, but there should be no alarm in consequence of
the temporary presence in the street of a leper, or on account of any
ordinary intercourse with a sufferer from the disease."
On the other hand the report of the board of health for 1890 declares
in the most emphatic manner that " complete, thorough, and absolute
segregation offers the only safeguard" against the ravages of leprosy.
The same report asserts that if, from the time when leprosy was first
recognized as an established fact in the islands, the policy of absolute
segregation had been firmly decided upon and unflinchingly pursued,
* * * Hawaii would be as free from leprosy to-day as any civilized
nation." The report concludes with the hopeful words: "It is safe to
say that if we do not relax our efforts we have seen the worst of leprosy in this country." The average leper population of the leper settlements in Molokai for the two years ending March 31, 1890, was
1,035.
* American Journal Medical Science, April, 1883.




HAWAIIAN ISLA.                   41
A. Lutz, M. D., a specialist employed by the Hawaiian Government
as "government physician for the study and treatment of leprosy,"
reports, under date of April 1, 1890, as follows: "The infection from one
person to the other furnishes probably the largest number of patients;
heredity, if it really exists at all, is quite secondary, being perhaps only
simulated by family infection. The influence of vaccination appears
most doubtful."
From the Sanitary Instructions for Hawaiians, by the chairman of
the sanitary committee of the Hawaiian legislature, the following statement of predisposing causes of leprosy and rules to be observed is
made up:
"Be careful that where the operation of vaccination is performed
pure vaccine is used."
"Avoid a leprous bedfellow as you would a pit of fire."
"Eat regularly and of the best obtainable food.7"
" Avoid dark, damp, badly-ventilated rooms."
"Never lie down to repose in damp or dirty clothing, and keep the
body clean."
"Nearly all the lepers come from among the poor, who have fared
badly and have lodged in damp and ill ventilated huts."
"Take care of the first symptoms of leprosy. The moment numbness of feeling, or any marks or swellings that indicate leprosy are
observed, a physician should be consulted."
Venereal diseases favor the attack of leprosy. "If two men, one
perfectly well and clean in body and the other diseased with venereal
virus, were each brought into intimate contact with a leprous individual, the diseased man would be affected and become a leper far sooner
than the sound man."
Dr. Lutz, Hawaiian Government physician for the treatment and
study of leprosy, was encouraged to declare, under date of April, 1890,
that he believes "we shall * * * see cures, which may be attributed, not to extraordinary chance, but to our methods of treatment." It
appears, however, from later reports, that the study of leprosy by specialists employed by the Government was soon abandoned. Dr. Lutz
resigned September, 1890, without having effected a permanent
cure.
The president of the board of health reports to the legislative assembly, session of 1892, on the subject of the study of leprosy by Government specialists, as follows: " In deference to the oft-repeated requests,
* * * the board of health opened correspondence with the leprosy
commission of England and with Dr. E. Arning, of Hamburg, Germany, with a view of * * * continuing the study and treatment
of leprosy." The substance of Dr. Arning's reply is: "That the scientific work connected with the etiology and pathology of leprosy can,
with surer prospects of success, be carried on here in its European
centers, and this is actually being done; there are a number of bacteriologists * * * at work on this intricate question and slowly
unraveling knot on knot towards its solution."
The report of the board of health for 1892 states that on " December
31, 1890, there were 1,213 lepers in the custody of the board, that being
the highest number ever reached, and on March 31, 1892, there were
only 1,115, a decrease of 98 during the period." In regard to the segregation of lepers the report affirms that at this date, March 31, 1892,
" there are very few known lepers at large, with the exception of perhaps 17 at Kalalau, aui, but there are about 60 suspects at liberty in




42


H AWATIAN ISLANDS.


Honolulu,- and some in the outer districts, and more or less of them
will, in time, become confirmed cases."
The same report shows that the cost of the " segregation, support,
and treatment of lepers " for the biennial period closing March 31,1892,
was $224,331.88.
In regard to venereal diseases, so well known as prevalent in the
Hawaiian Islands, the statement is made in the Medical Record for
April, 1889, that the "effects of hereditary immunity  * * * has
resulted in the production of a much milder form of the disease in the
course of three or four generations. At the present day syphilis in the
Sandwich Islands is comparatively a benign disease, and furnishes but
a small contingent to the sum of mortality." The writer, Dr. P. A.
Morrow, states that " not only has the disease moderated in severity,
but, according to the testimony of numerous physicians, * * * it
has materially decreased in frequency." The writer also asserts the
"comparative rarity of hereditary transmission" of syphilis in the
islands, and explains it by the fact that the native Hawaiians of to-day
are a sterile race. "In some of the districts the percentage of births
does not exceed 2 per 1,000 instead of 28 per 1,000, as it should be, to bal.
ance the mortality rate."


NOTE.-The maps and charts mentioned in this paper omitted.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


43


VIL ALSO THE FOLLOWING LECTURE, DELTIVEED AT THE U. S.
NATIONAL MUS1EUM, FEBRUARY 9. AND MARCH 15, 1884 BY CAPT. C.
E. DUTTON, OF THE U. S. ARMY, IN WASHINGTON, D. C.
[Ordnance notes-No. 343, Washington, April 23, 1884.]
THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS AND PEOPLE.
Lectures delivered at the U. S. National Museum February 9 and March
15,1884, under the auspices of the Smithsonian Institution and of the
Anthropological and Biological Societies of Washington.
[By Capt. C. E. Dutton, Ordnance Department, U. S. A., on U. S. Geological duty.]
LADIES AND GENTLEMAN: The Hawaiian Islands are the summits of
a gigantic submarine mountain range. If the waters of the Pacific were
removed from their vicinity we might behold a range of mountains as
long as our Appalachian system, from Lake Champlain to Chattanooga,
and quite as wide, with summits five times as high as Mount Washington. The summits of Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea are nearly 14,000 feet
above the ocean, and their bases are from 15,000 to 18,000 feet beneath
it. Referred to the bottom of the ocean these mountains are higher
than the Himalayas. Standing upon the northeastern coast of Hawaii
the crest of Mauna Kea is less than 20 miles away, and is nearly 3 miles
above us. At a distance of 30 miles at sea the ocean floor is about 3*
miles below us. I am not aware of any other place in the world where,
along a line less than 50 miles in length, may be found a difference in
altitude of more than 6 miles.
The Hawaiian group consists of four larger and four smaller islands.
The largest island is named Hawaii. It has a length of about 90 and a
width of 70 miles. Its area is nearly 4,000 square miles, being a little
less than two-thirds of the area of the entire group. It is not, however,
the most populous, for that distinction belongs to the islands of Oahu,
on which is situated the principal town and capital, Honolulu, which is
the center of trade and the seat of the Government.
Only a small portion of each island is capable of sustaining a dense
population. The interiors are mountainous and generally rough, craggy,
and cut with profound gorges of the wildest description. The habitable portions are near the seacoast, forming a ring around each island;
but only a part of each ring is habitable or cultivable. Some portions
are arid and barren; others are covered with recent floods of lava, and
still others are bounded by lofty rocky coasts, and trenched with ravines
so deep and abrupt that access is difficult. Generally speaking, the
proportion of habitable area is singularly small. But those portions
which are well favored are probably capable of sustaining as dense a
population as any tracts in the world.
The climate of these islands is the climate of Paradise. It is never
hot, and, except at considerable altitudes, it is never cold. Rarely has
the thermometer been known to reach 900 on the seacoast, or to fall
below 65~. The temperature in most localities may be averaged the
year round as varying between 750 and 850. But while the temperature of any given locality is uniform, there is wonderful variety in the
climate as we pass from one place to another. Indeed, there are almost
as many climates as there are square leagues. As a rule the windward
or eastern sides are rainy and the leeward sides dry. On the eastern
coast of Hawaii the annual rainfall varies from 150 to 250 inches. On
the northwest coast of the same island it is probably less than the




44                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
twentieth part of those amounts. The islands being situated within
the trade-wind belt, the wind blows constantly from the east and northeast during the greater part of the year, and is only subject to brief
interruptions during midwinter. Violent storms occur only in the
winter time, and these, coming once or twice a year from the southwest,
are known as konas, which means in the native language the southwest. During a stay of six months on the islands I only heard a single
peal of thunder.
These islands are all of volcanic origin. They are composed of
basaltic lavas, and no other rocks are found there excepting a few consolidated coral sands, which are remnants of old sea-beaches, upheaved
from 50 to 200 feet. In the two westerly islands the volcanic activity
has long been extinct. Most of the ancient craters have been obliterated, and the volcanic piles built up during the periods of activity have
been greatly ravaged and wasted by subsequent erosion. Next to the
plateaus and canyon country of the Rocky Mountain region, it would be
difficult to find anywhere more impressive and suggestive examples of
the wasting and slow destruction of the land than those presented by
these islands. We find there grand illustrations of the two methods
by which the general process of erosion accomplishes its work. First,
is the action of the rains, followed by the decomposition of the massive
rocks and their conversion into soil, and also the action of running
water and decay of the rock masses, resulting in the formation of
ravines and mountain gorges of imposing grandeur; secondly, we find
the slow but incessant inroads made by the waves of the ocean upon a
seacoast, gradually wearing back the cliffs and slowly paring away the
rocky shore, until, after the lapse of thousands of years, the sea has
eaten its way several miles into the land. Thus we have on the one
hand striking examples of one way in which mountains are built, and
we have on the other hand equally striking examples of the ways in
which those mountains are destroyed.
Travelers in the lofty volcanic islands of the Pacific have frequently
noted with some surprise the singularly sharp, angular, abrupt features
of their mountain scenery. It is very impressive in the Fijis and
Samoa, in the Ladrone, Caroline, and Society groups. But none of
them rival in wildness and grandeur the still loftier islands of Hawaii.
Gorges little inferior to Yosemite in magnitude are rather numerous.
But in a certain sharpness of detail and animation in the sculpture they
are unique. The island of Kauai and the western portion of the island
of Maui consist of old volcanic piles as high as Mount Washington, and
much broader and longer. They are literally sawed to pieces by many
immense canyon-like gorges, which cut them to their foundations. Over
all is spread a mantle of tropical vegetation in comparison with which
the richest verdure of our temperate zone is but the garb of poverty.
Whoever reads Shakspeare's Tempest and visits the Bermudas will
be disenchanted from some of the most pleasing illusions of the play.
But, if Shakspeare could have known the eastern shores of Maui or
Hawaii and made them the scenes of his play, it would have had, if
possible, another claim to immortality.
This wealth of verdure and splendor of scenery usually occur upon
the windward sides of the islands, for upon those sides is found the
cause which produces them. This cause is the copious rainfall brought
by the perpetual trade winds. Nothing can be more pleasing to the
lover of beautiful scenery than a ride along the windward coasts of
Maui and Hawaii. The land terminates in cliffs, varying from 200 to
500 feet in height, plunging down almost vertically into the Pacific.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS,


45


The long heavy swell, driven for thousands of miles before the trade
wind, breaks with. great force against these iron walls. The surface
above slopes upward towards the mountainous interior, at first with a
gentle acclivity, which becomes steeper inland, and at length precipitous. This plat formis gashed at short intervals by true canyons, which
head far up the mountain slopes, and open seaward in the great terminal wall. A mile or two inland from the brink of the cliff-bound
shore is a forest so dense that it can be penetrated only by hewing a
way through it or following a path already hewn. To describe the
glories of this tropical vegetation is impossible. Only those who have
beheld it can conceive of its splendor and luxurance. Yet there is one
unrivaled feature of the island vegetation which has no parallel elsewhere than in the Pacific and Austral islands, and which may be mentioned. This is the ferns. There are more than 300 species of them in
the Hawaiian Islands, and the most conspicuous are tree ferns which
grow in amazing abundance and sumptuousness. They often cover
the sides of the ravines, forming a thicket which is quite impenetrable,
and become. a mantle of green velvet so deep, rich, and exquisitely
patterned that it makes an imperial robe seem ridiculous.
But there are contrasts. There are portions of the islands where
the features have at first. sight no more in common with those just
spoken of than if they belonged to another planet. The beautiful or
grand scenery is found in those parts where the volcanic activity has
long been dormant. The contrasted portions are those where the
volcanoes are still in action, or have recently put out their fires.
The southern half of the great island of Hawaii is covered with the
two grandest volcanoes in the world-Mauna Loa and Kilauea. The
great central pile is Mauna Loa, which is certainly the monarch of
modern volcanoes. Its name signifies the Great Mountain. No other
in the world approaches it in the vastness of its mass or in the magnitude of its eruptive activity. There are many volcanic peaks higher in
air, but these are planted upon elevated platforms of stratified rock,
where they appear as mere cones, of greater or less size. Regarding
the platforms on which they stand as their true bases, the cones themselves and the lavas which have emanated from them never approach
the magnitude of Mauna Loa. }Etna and all its adjuncts are immeasurably inferior; while Shasta, Hood, and Ranier, if melted down and
run together into one pile, would still fall much below the volume of
the island volcano. In the greatness of its eruptions, Mauna Loa is
also without a rival. Some of the volcanoes of Iceland have been
known to disgorge at a single outbreak volumes of lava quite equal to
them. But in that island such extravasations are infrequent, and a
century has now elapsed since any such have been emitted. The
eruptions of Mauna Loa are all of great volume and occur irregularly,
with an average interval of about eight years. Any one of its moderate
eruptions represents more lava than Vesuvius has outpoured since the
last days of Pompeii. The great flow of 1855 would nearly have built
Vesuvius, and those of 1859 and 1881 were not greatly inferior.
The Hawaiian volcanoes are in some respects abnormal. The most
distinctive of their characteristics is the quiet and undemonstrative
method of their eruptions. Rarely are these portentous events attended
by any of that explosive action which is manifested by all other volcanoes. In only one or two instances within the historic period have
they been accompanied by earthquakes and subterraneous rumblings.
The vast jets of steam blown miles high, hurling cinders and lapilli far
and wide wd filling the hevens with vapor, dust, and ashes, have lnever




46                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
been observed here. Some action of the sort is indeed represented
sometimes, but only in a feeble way. Ordinarily the lava spouts forth
in stupendous quantities, but as quietly as water from a fountain. So
mild are the eruptive forces that the observer may stand to the windward of one of these fountains and so near it that the heat will make
the face tingle, yet without danger. Usually the outbreak takes place
without warning, and even without the knowledge of people in the
vicinity, who first become aware of it at nightfall, when the heavens
are aglow with the reflected light and the fiery fountains are seen
playing. As the news spreads hundreds of people flock to witness the
sublime spectacle, and display as much eagerness to approach the
scene of an eruption as the people of other countries show to get away
from one.
All this is in contrast with the ordinary volcano. At the other
extreme is such an eruption as that which happened last August, at
Krakatoa, in the Straits of Sunda. With the published details of this
catastrophe you are all familiar. Appalling as it was, the eruption of
Sumbawa in 1815 must have been, if can rely upon the accounts of
it, even more energetic and destructive. The eruption of Coseguina,
in Nicaragua, in 1835, appears to have been of the same character, or
upon a scale quite equal; while once or twice in a century Cotapaxi
shakes the chain of the Andes through half its length, fills the sky
with dust, and converts noonday into midnight for a hundred miles
around. The eruptions of iEtna have all been on a smaller scale, but
still sufficient to fill all Sicily with terror. Vesuvius is usually regarded
as an obstreperous vent, but its performances are mere Fourth of July
fireworks in comparison with these Day-of-Judgment proceedings at
Sumbawa, Krakatoa, and Cotapaxi.
The explosive agent in these terrible convulsions is steam. In their
original seat, miles deep in the earth, the lavas contain considerable
quantities of water; but the condition of this water is such as we have,
at the surface of the earth, no experience with, except as we observe it
in volcanoes. It is water red hot, or even yellow hot, and under a
pressure hundreds of times greater than that of the steam in a locomotive boiler-a pressure probably comparable to that exerted by
gunpowder in a powerful cannon. Under the enormous pressure,
occurring at a depth of several miles within the earth, water is absorbed
by the lavas in much the same way as water itself absorbs ammonia
gas, or as wine absorbs carbonic acid. When the lavas rise to the
surface where the pressure is removed their explosive energy becomes
terrible. The steam is given off as the uncorked bottle of wine gives
off its gas, only a thousand times more violently and energetically. So
densely charged with vapor of water are some lavas that when, as in
the case of Krakatoa, a vent is found, the explosive energy becomes so
great that the lava is blown into fine dust and dissipated in the surrounding atmosphere. Although this extreme of explosive activity is
far too common for the comfort and safety of the human race it is by
no means the most frequent. The more ordinary type of volcano is
one in which the explosiveness is not so intense as to blow the whole
of the ejected matter into impalpable dust, but blows it into pellets
termed lapilli. These grains of lapilli are of all sizes, from that of a
kernel of wheat up to those of cannon balls, and sometimes weigh a
hundred tons or more. With a majority of volcanoes, whether active
or extinct, the greater part of the material ejected is cast into the air
in this fragmental form. Falling back around the orifice it builds up a
fairly regular -cone, with a cup ox the summit. This is termed a cinder




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


47


cone. Most of the volcanic piles of the world are crowned with cinder
cones, the principal bulk of which consists of lapilli and scoriaceous
lumps, with some massive portions of flowing lava streams mixed in.
It is probable that quite half of the volcanic material now visible upon
the globe consists of accumulations of such fragmental matter.
To this general method of extravasation Mauna Loa and Kilauea are
remarkable exceptions. They consist almost wholly of massive sheets
and floods of lava. On Mauna Loa there are but the most insignificant
traces of fragmental products, and on Kilauea there are only a dozen
or two of small cinder cones. The lavas of these great volcanoes flowed
quietly out in enormous deluges, running sometimes for months, or even
a whole year, with little or no explosive action throughout the entire
duration of the flows.
One consequence of this quiet method of eruption has been to give to
these colossal piles a wholly exceptional form among volcanoes. Instead
of a huge cone crowning the apex of Mauna Loa, its summit is nearly
a flat plain, 5~ miles long and nearly 4 miles wide. Within this plain is
sunken a pit 3 miles long, 2 miles wide, and 1,000 feet in depth. In
the floor of this pit at certain times may be seen a lake of red-hot liquid
lava, varying in size from time to time, but occasionally as large as 30
or 40 acres. At intervals of fifteen or twenty minutes a column of
liquid lava of great brilliancy, as large and as high as the Washington
monument will be when it is completed, is shot upward and falls back
into the lava pool in a fiery spray. This grand display is sometimes
kept up for months, and is generally terminated by an eruption.
When an outbreak occurs it does not take place usually at the summit,
but a fissure suddenly opens in the side of the mountain, out of
which a sheet of lava spouts hundreds of feet into the air, and,
falling, collects into a river of fire half a mile in width, and rushes
at first with great velocity down the slope. After running some
miles it reaches more level ground, where it spreads out in great lakes
or fields. It also cools on the surface, which gradually freezes over.
But it is still hot within,' and beneath its hardened covering the liquid
rivers are still running, and at the edges and along the front of the
great sheet the limpid lava constantly breaks forth, pushing out fiery
rivulets in advance and laterally.
These rivulets are shot out in quick succession here, there, and everywhere, gradually covering the ground by repeated offshoots. They
soon blacken and harden, but only to be covered by another and another
belch. The later progress of the stream is slow. When the lava first
leaves the vent it may run 10 or 15 miles an hour. But later on the
stream may advance less than 100 yards in a day. In November, 1880,
a great eruption broke forth near the summit of Mauna Loa, and the
ava poured out in heavy streams unceasingly for eleven months. There
were three great streams flowing in as many directions, and the largest
one extended from the vent a distance of nearly 50 miles. It reached
the outskirts of the beautiful little town of Hilo, whose inhabitants had
abandoned all hope that their village would escape, and had removed
their portable property. But the flow stopped just at the edge of the
village.
The massive and highly liquid character of the flows from Mauna
Loa is the cause which has given this mountain its peculiar form. It
is in contrast with all other volcanoes by virtue of its flat and gently
sloped profiles. It is a gently rising dome whose steeper slopes are
only about 7 degrees, while its longer ones are only 4 degrees. Most
volcanoes have slopes ranging all the way from 15 to 30 and even 40
J




48


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS


degrees. The liquid lavas run off from the summit and upper dome and
distribute themselves at immense distances. But if fragmental products were ejected in any quantity they would pile up around the orifices
from which they were ejected and thus form steep conical hills.
The ascent of Mauna Loa is a feat wholly unworthy of the name of
mountaineering. It is necessary, however. to procure a guide who
knows the way, otherwise the journey is pretty sure to prove more
interesting than was expected. Many of the lava streams are masses
of clinkers of the most angular and cruel aspect imaginable; indeed,
the hummocks of an arctic ice field are good traveling in comparison,
and only a guide familiar with the mountain knows bow to avoid them.
Just east of Mauna Loa, about 20 or 25 miles, is the far-famed volcano Kilauea. This has been visited and described so often that little
needs to be said here. It contains a great pit similar to that on Mauna
Loa, and somewhat larger, though not so deep.
Within it are the great lakes of fire always burning. The lake at
the summit of Mauna Loa is frozen over and silent, without a trace of
volcanic activity, for several years at a time, and is open only for several months or sometimes a year or so before a great eruption. But at
Kilauea the lava lakes are always aflame, and have been so eves since
the earliest traditions of the natives. Forty years ago there was a pit
within a pit, and in the lowest deep was a lava pool half a mile or more
in diameter, always boiling, spouting, and flaming. At the present
time the inner pit is quite filled up with solid lava, and a large conical
pile of rocks is built up over the site of this former lake. Within this
pile of rocks, however, is the remnant of this lake, now about 10 acres
in area. Half a mile distant is a second lake which is easily visited,
and it is an exhilarating sight to stand at night upon the brink of it
and watch the boiling, surging, and swirling of 6 acres of melted lava.
At brief intervals the surface darkens over by the formation of a black
solid crust with streaks of fire around the edges. Suddenly a network
of cracks shoots through the entire crust, and the fragments turn down
edgewise and sink, leaving the pool one glowing expanse of exactly the
appearance of so much melted cast iron. The heat of fusion in this lake
is maintained, in spite of the enormous loss of heat by radiation, by the
constant ascent of large quantities of intensely hot vapors from the
depths of the earth.
An hour's lecture, ladies and gentlemen, leaves no time for rhetoric
and graceful transitions from one theme to another. Having shoveled
out to you, so to speak, some incoherent remarks concerning points of
special interest in the islands, I proceed at once to a subject which
will, I hope, prove more interesting, and that is the people who inhabit
them.
When we were boys and girls our general idea of the inhabitants of
the Pacific islands was that they were typical savages. What savages
were we knew pretty well, or thought we knew, for had we not all read
Robinson Crusoe? We thought of them as naked, black creatures,
whose principal occupation was blowing conch-shells, brandishing
thigh bones, and dancing a horrible cancan around a fire where a human
carcass was roasting. But we were mistaken. The Polynesians, as
a rule, were not savages, though many of the white people who first
visited them were so.
In the Pacific islands two very distinct races are found. Of one race
the Hawaiians or Tahitians may be regarded as the type. This race
peoples also the Society, Samoan, Navigators, and Friendly groups,
d4 iacludes the Maoris of New Zealand, Al these islanders have the




HAWAII     SANDS.                    49
same physical features, similar social cults, and speak dialects of the
same language. The difference between the language of a Hawaiian and
of a Society islander is not greater than that between the German and
the Dutch. The difference between the language of a Hawaiian and a
Maori is less than between the Dutch and the English. This and the
community of physical type establish the identity of race sufficiently.
The western islands of the Pacific are occupied by a race which has
such apparent affinity with the inhabitants of Papua or New Guinea
as to raise a very strong presumption of their community, and the supposition is corroborated by many other circumstances.. Of the two
races, the first mentioned is much superior physically, mentally, and
morally, and of all branches of that race the noblest is the Hawaiian.
Physically they are rather large, and have a light-brown color, straight
hair, and are handsomely formed, of good bearing, and well featured.
The women also are pleasing and comely. There is nothing about them
savoring of the squaw, hag, or wench, which is almost universal among
so many of the primitive dark-skinned races, and they are not without
beauty, even according to the taste of the white man, if he is willing to
admire a robust type of feminine grace as easily as he does the "pale,
pious, pulmonary" persuasion. Among the Hawaiians the old kings
and chiefs seemed to form a distinct caste and a breed greatly superior
to the common herd. They were very large, sometimes almostgigantic
in size, and of very impressive form and bearing. Their color was
lighter, and they were of more massive frames.
At the time of the discovery of these islands by Capt. Cook, in 1776,
these people were by no means savages. Their social system was as
much above savagery on the one hand as it was below civilization on
the other. A careful study of their habits and customs discloses the
interesting fact that their social organization bore a striking similitude
to that of Europe in the tenth and eleventh centuries. It was a feudal
system almost exactly. They had kings who were inall strictness hereditary suzerains. Under them were chiefs who owed them fealty, and
who held lands and titles by a tenure which can hardly be distinguished
from enfeoffinent, and which, at all events, was a truly feudal tenure;
for it carried with it the recognition of the principle that the allodium
was vested in the king alone, and the tenure was granted to the chief
as a vassal in consideration of military service. The common pebple
were mere villains, bound to the soil, though in some sort as tenants at
will. The islands were divided up into several kingdoms, over each of
which a king reigned, whose power was very absolute; in all things he
was lord paramount. The kingdom was subdivided into tracts, for
which the term now used in the islands is simply the word "lands."
These lands were lorded over by chiefs, of whom there were several
grades. They -were subdivided again and.again down to the smallest
holdings, of a fraction of an acre, tenanted by the lower classes, and
all were marked off by metes and bounds.
The power of the King was absolute, and limited only by the endur.
ance of his subjects. Life and death, as well as property, were subject
to his will; and yet there was a division of power. To make the parallel with medieval Europe more complete. the power of the King was
rivaled, and in some cases even overborne, by the power of a priest.
hood; and the priests enforced their sway with a spiritual weapon of
resistless potency. The weapons of Rome were many, chief among
which were excommunication, the inquisition, and the interdict. The
Hawaiian priest had a weapon more powerful than them all. It was
the tabu. This word has been adopted, metaphorically, into the Eng.
S. Rep. 227 —




50                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
lish and many other languages, but few people comprehend its significance in the places where it originated. The word means prohibited
or forbidden, and a great deal more besides. Almost anything might
be tabu. The penalty of violating a tabu was always death. The institution derived its power from the fact that there was not a native in all
Polynesia who did not devoutly believe that even if the King or priests
did not cause him to be killed for violating a tabu the gods certainly
would.
In respect to the arts possessed by these people they were few and
simple. The islands contained no metals and very few substitutes for
them, except stone, and not the best kinds of stone for implements at
that. Considering the want of materials, however, their arts were
hardly to be despised. They made many articles of wood with surprising neatness. Their only substitutes for cloth were a fabric made
of a peculiar bark, macerated in water and pounded out as thin as
paper, and mats woven from the fibers of the pandanus with no little
skill. Their houses were large, commodious structures made of grass,
often neatly woven, and attached to a framework of poles. They were
scrupulously neat within, and matting of pleasing aspect was used
abundantly. They were wonderfully expert fishermen, and had devices
suited for capturing each kind of fish. More than that, they had fish
ponds and preserves for rearing select varieties.
Agriculture was practiced systematically. They constructed canals
for irrigating, the remains of which are still visible in numerous places.
Their chief vegetable was the root of the taro plant, a species of arum
to which the calla lilies belong. It may not be generally known that
this is probably the most prolific food plant in the world. Humboldt
gives that distinction to the banana, but the banana is nowhere in the
comparison; for a square yard and a half planted with taro will yield
food enough to support a man for a year. This plant is poisonous when
raw, but cooking completely destroys the poisonous quality and renders
it very wholesome. The Hawaiians first bake it and then pound it,
gradually adding water, which is kneaded in like oil in a mayonnaise,
and when fully prepared it is of a consistency very much like mayonnaise.
In that state it is termed poi; and to this day the natives regard it as
we do bread, and it serves still as their favorite food. Many of the
white residents also have become exceedingly fond of it.
The primitive Hawaiians were very bold and skillful navigators.
There can be no question that they frequently visited in their little
canoes the Society Islands and Tahiti, south of the equator and 2,400
miles distant from Hawaii. How they could cross such vast wastes of
ocean seems at first mysterious; but they had a knowledge of astronomy
such as we sometimes marvel at in the old Egyptians and Chaldeans.
They knew the planets, and- had names for the brighter stars. They
also had a good calendar. Their year was three hundred and sixtyfive days long, and began when the Pleiades rose at sunset. They had
twelve months, of which eleven had thirty days each, and the twelfth
thirty-five days. They had also a primitive arithmetic and a system of
numerals in which they could number up into the hundreds of thousands. It was partly decimal and partly tesseral.
The religion of this people was in some respects analogous to that of
the Greeks. Their gods were hero gods and of many grades. Indeed,
it is quite literal to say that the woods were full of them. Every
locality, every conspicuous rock or tree, had its tutelar, corresponding
perh ips to the Grecian fauns and dryads. They also had animal gods,
most notably the shark god, and the divinity of the volcano of Kilauea




'HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


51


was a female named Pele. The amount of myth and legendary lore in
which these divinities figured was something amazing. We have for
some years been finding out that our own Indians were rich in myths,
if nothing else. But the extent of such lore among the Hawaiians
quite surpasses anything known of other primitive peoples. Many of
them are highly poetical and ingenious.
The origin of the Polynesian race has alwaysbeen a mystery. There
is very little light thrown upon it as yet by ethnologic research. The
view most favored is that they came from the East Indies at a remote
period. That the larger islands of the Pacific have been inhabited for
many centuries is an inference which finds considerable support.
Attempts have been made to ascertain whether the language has any
affinity to known languages of southeastern Asia, but the results are
little better than negative. Some coincidences have been found, or
supposed to have been found, but it does not seem that they are any
better or more significant than such as may be frequently discovered
between two languages which are surely known to have absolutely
nothing in common. Coincidences between legends and customs have
also been discovered. But ethnologists of the present day have come
to attach less importance to them, if possible, than to languages.
Thus the manners and customs, and also the legends, of the Maoris of
New Zealand have very little in common with those of the Hawaiians.
Yet the absolute identity of physical type and the virtual identity of
their languages are tantamount to proof of a common race. And primitive peoples, world over, are constantly surprising us by furnishing
correspondences in legends and peculiar customs, when it is absolutely
certain that they are widely distinct. On the other hand, there is good
ground for believing that if the Polynesians did not come from some
known Asiatic or East Indian stock, they may at least have communicated with them in one way or another.
When the islands were discovered by Capt. Cook pigs were very
abundant there, and the animal was an East Indian variety. The
peculiar tusks, the portentiously long snout like an icthyosaurus, and
ears set in the middle of its body, give us pretty reliable testimony as
to its origin. They also had dogs, and certainly no 'dog could have
come either from America or Australia. Finally, and even more conclusively, they had common hens and chickens, which are certainly of
Asiatic origin. What people brought these animals to the islands is a
question. I have already mentioned to you that the Hawaiians often
made voyages to Tahiti in their little canoes, a distance of 2,400 miles;
and their ancient poems and legends are full of vague accounts of voyages to even greater distances. They knew of the Samoan and Tonga
islands, which are more than 3,000 miles away and farther westward.
Possibly also they knew of New Zealand, but the evidence of that is
not so clear. But I have never learned that anything in their poetry v
or traditions indicated a knowledge of either America or Asia. While,
therefore, it is not impossible that they may have had communication
with Asia, there is no other evidence of it than the fact that domestic
animals of Asiatic origin were found among them.
The transition of this people from barbarism to civilization has been
wonderfully rapid and complete. It is a very remarkable fact, too,
that it is the only dark-skinned race that has ever been brought into
full contact and relation with civilization without war and generations
of bloodshed, ending in subjugation. The reasons are many. Prominent among them are the following: In the first place, there can be
little question that it is the finest and most intelligent race of dark



52


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


skinned people in the world. In the second place, it is due in a great
measure to the wisdom, tact, and good sense of the missionaries through
whom this civilization was imparted. But it seems to me the third
reason is still more potent, and this was the great ability, wisdom, and
good sense of the kings of the line of the Kamehamehas and the absolute power they originally held over their people.
Fortunately, also, at the time of the advent of the white men the con.
trol of the islands had already been consolidated into the hands of one
man, who was fully capable of wielding it. If the lot of the first
Kamehameha had been cast in Europe instead of the remotest islands
of the sea he would have been one of the most conspicuous figures of
history. Originally a little kinglet of a district at the north end of
Hawaii, he gradually conquered the whole of that island and finally
the whole group. No King in history ever knew better how to rule his
people. Brought into contact with civilization, he grasped its meaning
with a breadth of comprehension which is perhaps without example
among barbarians. He knew instinctively how resistless was its power
and how inexorably it crowds the weaker races to the wall. But he
had the wisdom not only to avert the destruction of his own power and
the obliteration of the nationality of his people, but actually to draw
strength from it and make it his servant instead of his master. The
greatest achievement of his life was the work of his declining years, and
it was an achievement of surpassing skill. He broke completely the
secular power of the priesthood. He had the sagacity to discover alone
and unaided the grandest truth in political science, and one which white
men never discovered until three or four centuries ago. That great
truth was that church and state had better let each other alone. We
need not wonder, however, that he discovered it, for the Kings of
Europe understood it well enough; indeed they were about the only
ones who did. The marvel was that this barbarian should have had
the courage and address to make the truth a practical reality and put
it into execution. It is one thing to perceive the foolishness of superstition and quite another to break down a whole religion. When Kame.
hameha began his career the priesthood was far more powerful than he.
When he died they were as powerless in secular matters as the Pope
now is in Italy. The finishing 'stroke was given when his dead body,
as yet unburied, was awaiting the obsequies. His widow and son
deliberately broke many of the most sacred tabus, and enjoined the
same sacrilegious acts upon their households and followers. They were
promptly obeyed, and the example was followed by the whole nation.
Next the temples were despoiled, the images of the gods broken and
burned, and the priests themselves driven into the forests and jungles.
An act so sweeping and revolutionary as the trampling under foot of
the most binding superstition or religious conviction that ever held
sway over the human race would never have been ventured if the peo.
ple had not been gradually wrought up to it. In truth, Kamehameha
had first revolutionized the whole social and political condition of the
people, and had elevated them immensely against the influences of a
priestcraft which was all the time striving to hold them down. When
the issue came the King triumphed and the priest was overthrown. It
was probably this change which prepared the Hawaiian people for
what followed. It established the kingly power independen'tly of a
priesthood and left the people without a religion.
The year following this important event the missionaries landed
there for the first time. They soon secured the good will of the second
Kamehameha and found their work a comparatively easy one. To the




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                    53
missionari 3s is due the credit of having been the agents throgh whom
civilization was imparted to I he islands. Those who are specially
devoted to the interests of foreign missions have been in the habit of
regarding the Hawaiian Islands as a signal instance of the triumph of
Protestant propagandism. On the whole, there is a large measure of
justice in this claim. But, on the other hand, a closer view will prob.
ably disclose. to the impartial mind the fact that, while the amount of
Christian proselytism has been very considerable, the outside view of it
i: fomewhat overdrawn.
- There are certainly many devout Christians among the Hawaiians,
but there are also many who cherish their old religion, and the greater
part of them are more or less tinctured with the ancient superstitions.
But whatever doubts may arise as to the complete success of the propaganda, there can be none as to the success in imparting civilization.
Fortunately, they had to deal with and through a succession of kings
who were men of preeminent sense and of practical wisdom, and who
knew how to manage their subjects. They were kings in the best possible signification. Royalty was inborn in them, and the loyalty of
their subjects was such that the loyalty of an Englishman is a feeble
sentiment in comparison. The Kamehamehas, from the II to the V,
inclusive, were quick to recognize the advantages of civilization, and
had wonderful tact in discriminating between good and bad advice.
The missionaries proved to be discreet and judicious advisers, and the
transition from barbarism to civilization was effected safely, step by
step; the Government was transformed into a constitutional monarchy,
the feudal tenure of lands was changed to fee simple. Statute laws
were enacted and codified, and suffrage was made as broad and liberal
as in America. Perhaps the most important step was compulsory
education, which is provided for by the State, and to-day it is hard to
find a native who can not read, write, and cipher.
The economic condition of the Hawaiian is probably superior at the
present time to that of any other tropical people in the world; and, on
the whole, I think it quite safe to say that it is but very little surpassed, if at all, by that of the working classes of America. He has
even more to eat and better food, plenty of beef, pork, and fish. and
could have an abundance of flour if he desired it, but he prefers his
taro. He owns his property in fee; he makes laws and executes them-;
he reads and writes; he has but one wife; he tills the soil and tends
flocks; sometimes he accumulates wealth and sometimes he does not;
he makes his will in due form, dies, and receives a Christian burial;
in no land in the world is property more secure. Indeed, I have yet to
learn of any where it is equally secure from burglary, rapine, andthievery or those subtler devices by which the cunning get possession of the
property of the less. astute without giving an equivalent for it. The
few relics of barbarism remaining are of the most harmless description,
and probably quite as good for him as anything he might adopt in
place of them.
Unfortunately, the population is rapidly decreasing. A century ago
a fair estimate would probable. have been over 150,000. To-day the
native population is 45,000 to 5b,000. The causes of this decrease are
many. It has usually been attributed to diseases brought by contact
with the whites. While it is indisputable that such diseases have in a
measure contributed to the result, I believe there is still another cause
at work tending to the same result, which is as follows: The Hawaiian
is the most amiable and social creature in the world. Life without
plenty of society is intolerable to him. He is also fond of display-of




54                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
giving feasts, of treating, and extravagantly fond of dress, horses, and
sport. His instinct is to leave the country and crowd into the towns.
This is as common among the women as among the men. But to live in
town, or to indulge in dissipation, requires money, and therefore a family is a burden, especially to women, who are so fond of gaiety. There
is, therefore, a deliberate and willful curtailment of the birth rate, and,
in my judgment, this has been not much less potent in reducing the
population than the abnormal increase in the death rate.
The Government of the islands is now a constitutional monarchy. The
King is the chief executive officer, and his powers, though in theory no
greater than those of the English sovereign, are in reality much more
extensive and effectual. The legislative branch consists of a representative assembly, elected biennially by the people, and a house of
nobles limited by the constitution to 20 members. The nobles are
appointed for life by the King, but their titles are not hereditary. The
judiciary is organized upon a plan somewhat similar to that of New
York State, though considerably simpler. At the head of the judicial
branch is the chief justice or chancellor and two vice-chancellors, who
perform the functions of a supreme court and final court of appeals.
They have also original jurisdiction in a wide range of subjects, and
indeed in almost all important cases of whatsoever nature. Each of
these justices holds circuit courts in various parts of the Kingdom, at
which cases are tried both originally and on appeal. There are also
lower courts in which petty cases are tried, and in which more important ones may originate. The higherjudges are white men truly learned
in the law, and they have reflected honor upon their profession and
upon their adopted country. All of them are Americans, who received
their education and training in law in the United States. The primary
judges are in some cases whites, in others natives. The native judges
were formerly appointed by the chancellor, but are now appointed by
the Crown. There is generally much difficulty in finding men of native
birth who possess the requisite legal knowledge and experience. Their
intentions are always of the best, but their tendency is to construe law
in accordance with their own notions of abstract justice rather than
upon legal principles, and few of them are capable as yet of understanding the value and significance of precedents. But the higher
courts are always open to appeal. The administration of law is excellent and will, on the whole, compare favorably with any country in the
world. The respect of the native for statute law is very great, and the
sheriff, policeman, or taxgatherer has no more difficulty in executing
his process than in England or Massachusetts; indeed, he has, if anything, less difficulty.
The statutory code is in general modeled after that of New York,
though it is apparent that in matters of detail many minor differences
were at the first and still are necessary. But the underlying principles were identical. The tenure of real estate, the laws relating to
liens and mortgages, to wills and inheritance of property, to bankruptcy and debt, to marriage and divorce, to partnership and corporations, are founded upon those of New York State. The system of
jurisprudence is also fundamentally the same. There are many differences of detail and these are sometimes wide, but never so wide as to
constitute differences of principle. The processes of the courts are
more frequently summary, and their action is much more speedy and
direct. Devices for protracting and complicating litigation have not
as yet been developed to any great extent.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                    55
All laws are enacted by the Legislature, which regulates taxation
and customs and appropriates specifically for all public expenditures.
In theory the powers of this body are very nearly the same in their
broader features as those of one of our State legislatures. The members of the lower house are elected biennially and are mostly natives.
In practice, however, there is a wide difference. In England and
America the representative body dominates everything and everybody, especially the chief magistrate. In Hawaii the King dominates
the representative body. This arises from the fact that this people
has always been intensely loyal to the King for scores of generations,
and the habit of unquestioning submission to the royal will is far too
strongly settled and ingrained to be readily shaken off. The want of
experience in self-government on the part of the people, and the habit
of absolute command on the part of the kings, will suggest the explanation of the greatinfluence which the King holds over the Legislature.
At the present time the condition of the people of the islands is one
of great prosperity, and they are rapidly advancing in wealth and general improvement. The reciprocity treaty now existing between the
islands and the United States has been mutually beneficial. Large
amounts of American capital have been invested there in sugar plantations and in the commerce with the' little Kingdom. The result has
been to give abundant employment to the entire population. Wages
are high, and all the produce of the islands brings good prices. Thus
the condition of the natives has been greatly improved. They are no
longer idlers, but the recipients of well-earned wages ard incomes.
They are rapidly replacing their primitive grass houses with neat
frame buildings, built in the regular California cottage style. They
have adopted civilized clothing, hats, boots, and shoes, and the women
cultivate the fashions as eagerly as our own farmers' wives and daughters, and it is by no means uncommon to see them clothed in silks or
delicate woolen fabrics, or white lawns made in scrupulous regard to
the latest numbers of Harper's Bazaar. They wear them as easily and
naturally as the mulattoes or quadroons in our own country. The
women of rank are ladies who are competent to sustain with grace and
dignity all the appearances of cultivated society, though it would be
expecting too much to look for any high degrees of mental culture
according to the rigorous standard of the great white nations. Both
men and women, however, are quick to catch the externals of social
customs and refinement. The better culture, however, will come in
time as wealth and the comforts and luxuries of civilized life increase
among them.
One of the most important agencies, and perhaps the most impor- --
tant, has been the enforcement of education. Common schools are
sustained at public expense, and a college for the higher education has
been established. Unfortunately the natives have never been taught
to speak the English language, and this has been a serious obstacle in
the way of their intellectual advancement. It is far easier for a white
man to acquire the Hawaiian language than for the Hawaiian to
acquire English, and as a consequence few of the natives are able to
converse or read except in their own tongue. On the other hand, the
white residents can converse easily with the natives, and some of them
have obtained an excellent knowledge of the Hawaiian language,
while almost all the whites can at least use an intelligible jargon. The
defect is in some measure offset by the extensive use of books and
newspapers printed in the Hawaiian language, and by a postal system
which, under the circumstances, is a highly creditable one to the




56


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


nation. By means of the newspapers the natives are kept fully
informed about their own affairs, and receive considerable knowledge
of the great far-off world beyond the sea. That the papers and postal
system have been of great potency and utility to them is sufficiently
apparent.
Whoever wishes for a delightful and instructive journey will do well
to visit these islands. They are only seven days' sail from San Francisco in a first-class steamer, and across an ocean which is rarely
troubled with storms. He will find scenery as beautiful as any in the
world and as novel as it is beautiful. He will find charming society
among his own people residing there, and unbounded hospitality. If
he is philosophically disposed he will find many instructive subjects
for his contemplation.. If, without forgetting for a moment the splendor
of the civilization in which lie has been reared, he can rise above its
prejudices, and if he is able to study men and human society from a
relative rather than an arbitrary standpoint, and judge them according
to the fundamental principles of human nature, he will find his own
humanities greatly enlarged and he will be much instructed and benefited.
VIII. ALSO THE FOLLOWING PAPER PREPARED BY HON. SANFORD B.
DOLE AND READ BEFORE THE HAWAIIAN HISTORICAL SOCIETY
DECEMBER 5, 1892.
[Papers of the Hawaiian Historical Society No. 3.]
EVOLUTION OF HAWAIIAN LAND TENURES.
rRead before the Hawaiian Historical Society, December 5, 1892, by the Hon. Sanford B. Dole.]
When the Hawaiian pilgrim fathers first landed on the lonely coast
of Hawaii from their long and exhausting ocean voyage in their canoes
decked with mats and rigged with, mat sails, it was for them a new
departure in government and social and industrial economy. Their past,
with its myths of origin, its legends of struggling and wandering, its
faiths and customs, and rites and ceremonies, its lessons of victory and
defeat, its successes over nature, was still their present authority and
paramount influence, as they feebly began a new so3ial enterprise upon
the desolate yet grand and beautiful shores of their new inheritance.
Their past still held them through its venerable sanctions, and yet
they were free in the freedom of a new and unoccupied land to add to
its accumulations and to improve on its lessons.
We may imagine that the remnant of the freight of their storm-worn
canoes included a few household idols, a live pig or two, some emaciated
chickens, a surviving bread-fruit plant, kou, and other seeds.
There were women as well as men in the company; the little children
had succumbed to the hardships of the voyage which was undertaken
to escape the indignities and confiscations incident to the status of a
defeated party in tribal warfare.
These people, lean and half-famished, gladly and with fresh courage
took possession of their new world. As soon as they recovered their
strength they built a heiau* and sacrificed to their gods.
After a little exploration they settled in a deep valley sheltered by
steep cliffs and watered by an abundant stream of clear water, abounding in fish and shrimps. At the mouth of the gorge was the sea, where
*Heiau-temple.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
there were shellfish, crabs, and a variety of fish. Fruits of various
kinds flourished on the hillsides, some of which they were acquainted
with, while others were new to them. They found varieties of the
kapa* plant, and understanding the process of making its bark into
cloth, they restored their wardrobes which had for the most part disappeared in the vicissitudes of the voyage. They also discovered the
tarot growing wild in mountain streams, which they hailed as an old
friend, feeling that now their satisfaction with their new home was
complete. The cultivation of this was begun at once as a field or dryland crop, as had been the practice in the home land, but as time went
on and some crops failed for want of rain, irrigation was used, until
at length, it may have been generations after, the present method of
cultivating the crop in permanent patches of standing water became
established. This result was greatly favored by the abundance of
running water, which was a feature of the country.
Children were born and grew up and intermarried, and the colony
grew and prospered. Exploring parties went out from time to time, and
other watered valleys were found, and bays and reefs rich in fishing
resources. As the community began to crowd the limited area of the
valley which was their first resting place, one and another of these newly
discovered and favored localities was settled, generally by a family consisting of the parents and grown-up boys and girls. And now and then
new companies of exiles from the southern islands found their weary
way over the ocean, bringing, perhaps, later customs and adding new
gods to the Hawaiian pantheon.
So Hawaii was gradually populated, and when its best localities were
occupied, Maui began to be colonized, and then its adjacent islands,
until the wholegroup was stocked with people.
There may have been a few chiefs in the pioneer company who largely
directed the affairs of the colony, and whose descendants furnished
chiefs for the growing demands of the branch colonies. Anlong the new
arrivals also from the outside world were occasional chiefs, who were
hospitably welcomed and accredited as such, and accorded corresponding position and influence.
It is also probable that in the very early period when chiefs were
scarce the head men of some of the settlements which had branched
off from the parent colony acquired the rank of chiefs, from the importance of their positions and the influence which their authority over
the lands of their respective settlements naturally gave them. Such
acquired rank descended to their children, in some cases doubtless
with an increase of dignity due to marriages with women of chief rank;
and so some new families of chiefs, originating from the common people or makaainanas,4 were established.
This early period of Hawaiian history for a number of generations
was a time of industrial enterprise and peaceful and prosperous growth.
There was no occasion for fighting, for there was land and water enough
for all and every one was busily employed. - It was the golden age of
Hawaii. There were taboos~ indeed, but only religious ones. No chief
was powerful enough yet to proclaim taboos for political purposes, nor
had the necessities for political taboos yet arisen. The arts prospered;
the Hawaiian canoe developed; the manufacture of kapa flourished
and made progress in the direction of variety of fabric and its esthetic
finish and decoration; royal garments of birds7 feathers were manufac

*K2~apa —native cloth. '
t Taro —arum esculentum.


t Makaainanas-common people.
~ Taboo-repressive enactment.




.58                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
tared; implements of stone and of wood for mechanical and industrial
work were invented and improved upon; and great engineering enterprises were taken, such as the irrigating systems of Wahiawa, Kapaa,
and Kilauea on the island of Kauai, and great sea walls inclosing b )ys
and reefs for fish-ponds, such as the one at Huleia, on Kauai, and at
many other places all over the islands. The antiquity of some of these
is so great that even tradition fails to account for their origin, as in the
case of the parallel irrigating ditches at Kilauea, on Kauai, the digging of which is attributed by the Hawaiians to the fabled moo, or
dragon, and the deep water fish-pond wall at the Huleia River, on
Kauai, which is supposed to have been built by the Menehunes-the
fabled race of dwarfs, distinguished for cunning industry and mechanical
and engineering skil and intelligence. In reality they were the pioneers of the Hawaiian race, who took complete industrial and peaceful
possession of the country, and this early period is distinctly the age of
the Menehunes, or skillful workers.
Principles of land tenure developed slowly through this period, probably from some form of the patriarchal system into a system of tribal
or communal ownership. There was land enough for everyone, and
holdings at first were based upon possession and use.
As in the irrigating customs of the Hawaiians, where there was an
abundance of water, every taro grower used it freely and at all times
according to his own convenience, and there were no regulations, but
in those localities where the water supply was limited strict rules for
its distribution grew up; so that when the land was not all occupied
there was freedom in its use, it being easier to locate new holdings than
to quarrel about old ones.
But as land irrigation developed, requiring permanent and costly
improvements in the way of irrigating ditches and the building of terraces on the valley slopes for the foundation of taro patches, such
improved localities acquired a special value, and the more real sense of
ownership in land, which is based upon an investment of labor in the
soil beyond the amount required for the cultivation of a crop, began.
A quality of this ownership was necessarily permanence, because of
the permanence of the improvements which created it.
Another element of tenure arose as the population increased, and the
best lands became occupied; the increasing demand gave them a market value, so to speak, which gave rise to disputes over boundaries.
Although such feuds, sometimes attended with personal violence,
favored the development of the later feudalism of the Hawaiians, yet
the early period, containing many of the features of tribal government
and land tenure common to the Samoans, Fijians, and Maories of New
Zealand, probably lasted for a long time, with a gradual development of
the principle of ownership in land and descent from parent to child,
subject to tribal control, until it was perhaps radically and violently
interrupted by the turbulent times beginning in the thirteenth century,
and lasting until the conquest of the group by Kamehameha I. This was
a period of internecine warfare, promoted by the ambition of chiefs for
political power and personal aggrandizement, and was most favorable
to the growth of feudalism, which rapidly took the place of the previous
political status. As was inevitable under the new conditions, the
importance and influence of the chiefs was greatly increased, to the
immediate prejudice of the rights and privileges of the people, who
were oppressively taxed in support of the wars brought on by the whim
of their respective rulers, or to defend them from the attacks of ambi



HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                     59
tious rivals. The growing necessity for protection of life and property
caused everyone to attach himself closely to some chief, who afforded
such protection in consideration of service and a portion of the'produce of the soil. Then the chiefs, as their power increased, began to
levy contributions of supplies arbitrarily, until it came to pass that the
chief was the owner of the whole of the products of the soil and of the
entire services of the people, and so it was a natural consequence that
he became finally the owner also of the soil itself. These results, which
were hastened by the constant wars of this period, were yet of slow
growth. The small valley and district sovereignties one by one disappeared in the clutch of rising warrior chiefs, who thus added to their
dominions and power. As such principalities became formidable, it
became necessary for the remaining smaller chiefdoms to ally themselves to some one, of them. And so this process went on until each
island was at length under the control of its high chief, and then
finally the whole group passed under the sovereignty of Kamehameha
I., and the feudal programme was complete.
During this period the control of land became very firmly established
in the ruling chiefs, who reserved what portions they pleased for their
own use and divided the rest among the leading chiefs Subject to
them. The position of the latter was analogous to that of the barons
of European feudalism; they furnished supplies to their sovereign, and
in case of war were expected to take the field with what fighting men
their estates could furnish. These barons held almost despotic sway
over their special domains, apportioning the land among their followers
according to the whim of the moment or the demands of policy, or
farming it out under their special agents, the konohikis,* whose oppressive severity in dealing with the actual cultivators of the soil was
notorious. Thus the occupancy of land had now become entirely subject to the will of the ruling chief, who not only had the power to give
but also to take away at his royal pleasure. This despotic control
over land developed in the direction of greater severity rather than
toward any recognition of the subjects' rights, and it finally became an
established custom for a chief who succeeded to the sovereign power,
even peacefully by inheritance, to redistribute the lands of the realm.
It is evident that this status was, for the time being, disastrous and
destructive to all popular rights in land that may have- previously
existed. If there was formerly anything like succession in tenure from
father to son and tribal ownership, such holdings were now utterly
destroyed, and the cultivators of the soil were without rights of cultivation or even of habitation. "The countl  was full of people who
were hemo, i. e. dispossessed of their lands at the caprice of a chief.
Three words from a new to a former konohiki*-i Ua hemo oe t -would
dispossess a thousand unoffending people and send them houseless and
homeless to find their makamakast in other valleys." (Alexander's
reply to Bishop Staley.)
The redistribution of lands upon the accession of a ruling chief was
naturally carried out with great severity when his accession was the
result of civil war between rival factions or the triumph of an invading
army. In the case of a peaceful accession of a young chief to sovereign power, the redistribution was mainly to his personal friends and
companions, and was less complete than in the case of a revolution of
force. Very influential men of the previous reign would not be dis*lonohiki-laud agent of chief.  t Ua hemooe-you are removed.
t Makamaka-friend.




60


HAWAIITA ISLANDS.


turbed, both because it would be dangerous and impolitic to do so,
and because their assistance was desired. A curious survival of this
feudal custom of redistribution of power and land upon the accession
of a new ruler is recognizable in the equally reprehensible sentiment
of modern politics expressed in the well-known words, " to the victors
belong the spoils."
When Kamehameha I conquered the group, excepting the island of
Kauai, which was accomplished only after the most desperate fighting,
his success carried with it the fullest and severest application of this
custom, and it meant to his defeated enemies loss of all political power
and of the lands which were the basis of such power. The island of
Kauai, through the treaty of annexation between the King of that
island, Kaumualii, and Kamehameha, might have escaped such misfortunes but for the rebellion of Humehume, the son of Kaumualii,
some years later, which, being suppressed, subjected the insurgent
chiefs to the rigorous rule of confiscation of their lands and the annihilation of their political influence.
Thus Kamlehameha became at last, through these feudal customs and
by virtue of his conquest, the fountain head of land tenures for the
whole group. The principles adopted by the land commission in 1847
opens with the following statement:
"When the islands were conquered by Kamehameha I he followed
the example of his predecessors and divided the lands among his principal warrior chiefs, retaining, however, a portion in his hands to be cultivated or managed by his own immediate servants or attendants.
Each principal chief divided his lands anew, and gave them out to an
inferior order of chiefs or persons of rank, by whom they were subdivided again and again, passing through the hands of four, five, or six
persons, from the King down to the lowest class of tenants. All these
persons were considered to have rights in the lands or the productions
of them. The proportions of these rights were not very clearly defined,
but were, nevertheless, universally acknowledged."
During Kamehamena's long and vigorous reign affairs became settled to an extent to which the country had been unaccustomed. Long
and undisturbed possession of their lands by chiefs was a preparation
for the development of a sentiment favorable to permanent individual
rights in land. Such a sentiment had become well defined in the mind
of Kamehameha before his death, and may be regarded as the seed
germ of the system of land tenures which afterwards developed.
Many of those who have been interested in this subject have been
accustomed to regard the idea of private rights in land in these islands
as one of foreign introduction during the reign of Kamehameha III, at
which time the remarkable change from feudal to private real estate
control took place. But the landed reforms of that reign were the
results of causes which had been long and powerfully at work. The
century plant had slowly grown, but when its full time came it swiftly
and abundantly blossomed.
At the meeting of chiefs at Honolulu, upon the arrival of the frigate
Blonde, in 1825, with the remains of Kamehameha II and his wife, to
consider the question of the succession to the throne and other matters, as reported in the Voyage of the Blonde, page 152 and following,
Kalaimoku, the regent, in his address to the council, referred to the
inconveniences arising from the reversion of lands to the King on the
death of their occupants-a custom partially revived under Kamehameha II, but which it had been the object of Kamehameha I to




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.'


61


exchange for that of hereditary succession. This project of their great
' King he proposed to adopt as the law, excepting in such cases as when
a chief or landholder should infringe the laws, then his lands should
be forfeited and himself tabooed. Several chiefs at once exclaimed:
"All the laws of the great Kamehameha were good; let us have the
same!"
Lord Byron, captain of the Blonde, presented the council some written suggestions in regard to the administration of affairs which are
contained the following article:  That the lands which are now held
by the chiefs shall not be taken from them, but shall descend to their
legitimate children, except in cases of rebellion, and then all their property shall be forfeited to the King." The account proceeds as follows
(page 157): "These hints, it will be at once perceived, are little more
than a recommendation quietly to pursue the old habits and regulations
of the islands. Kamehameha I had begun to establish the hereditary
transmission of estates, and Lord Byron's notice only adds the sanction
of the British name to it."
This principle, adopted previous to the reign of Kamehameha III,
greatly influenced the progress of events.
Wheif, after the death of Kamehameha I, his son, Liholiho, came to
the throne as Kamehatneha II, the administration of the Government
was shared with him by Kaahumanu, the Kuhina Nui,* one of Kamehameha's widows, and a woman of great force of character. It was the
desire of Kamehameha II to make a redistribution of the lands of the
realm according to custom, but Kaahumanu was opposed to it, and her
influence, together with the united strength of the landed interests
which had become firmly established in the chiefs during the long reign
of Kamehameha I, was too strong for him, and beyond a few assignments among his intimate friends, he relinquished his purpose. The
distribution of lands therefore by Kamehameha I remained for the most
part as a permanent settlement of the landed interests of the Kingdom,
to be afterwards modified in favor of the common people and the Government, but never ignored.
During the period from the distribution of lands by Kamehaineha I,
about 1795, till the year 1839, the sovereign held a feudal authority
over the whole landed estate of the Kingdom, which included the right,
as above set forth, summarily to cancel the rights in land of any chief
or commoner. There was a growing tendency, however, during this
period toward the provision in favor of the descent of lands from
parent to child adopted by the chiefs upon the return of the Blonde,
and the feudal right of the sovereign over the land of the subject was
more rarely exercised as time went on. Increasing security in tenure
led to increasing activity in land transactions. Chiefs transferred lands
to others, and they became a marketable commodity. There was buying
and selling-some speculating. The sovereign gave away and sold
lands here and there. Foreigners became landholders. Still there
was no permanence in the tenure, the enactment by the chiefs at the
time of the Blonde being in the nature rather of an expression of an
opinion than a binding law. The Kingdom then was under the regency
of Kaahumanu and Kalanimoku, and Kamehameha III, being still a
minor, was not a party to this provision and it was not regarded as
binding upon him.
The status of land matters at this time was similar to that which
existed in England after the Norman conquest, but here the progress
of events, owing undoubtedly to the influence of a foreign civilization,
* Kuhina Nui-a premier or minister having a veto on the King's acts.




62                    HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
was far,more rapid than there. The possession of land by foreigners
with strong governments back of them, represented here by men of
war and zealous consuls, had a stimulating effect upon this movement.
It was a transition period; the strength of the feudal despotism was
fast waning and there was as yet nothing of a positive nature to take its
place. This uncertaintyin regard to land tenure was a serious obstacle to
material progress. The large landholders-the chiefs and some to whom
they had.given or sold lands-felt a degree of security in their holdings
through the growing sentiment toward permanent occupation and
hereditary succession; but this was insufficient to place land matters
upon a satisfactory footing and to justify extensive outlays in permanent improvements. But that class of occupiers of land known as tenants, which class included a large proportion of the common people,
was still in a condition which had scarcely felt the favorable influences
which had begun to improve the status of the chiefs. They were hardly
recognized has having civil rights, although they enjoyed freedom of
movement and were not attached to any particular lands as belongings
of the soil. If a man wanted a piece of land to live on and to cultivate
he had to pay for it by a heavy rent in the shape of regular weekly
labor for his landlord, with the additional liability of being called upon
to assist in work of a public character, such As building a heiau or
making a road or fish-pond sea wall. With all this the tenant was liable
to be ejected from his holding without notice or chance of redress.
That this defenseless condition of the common people was rigorously
taken advantage of by the landholding chiefs and their konohikis, we
have the evidence of those living in this period, including some of the
early missionaries, that it was a feature of the times that large numbers of homeless natives were wandering about the country. This
want of security in the profits of land cultivation led many to attach
themselves to the persons of the chiefs as hangers-on, whereby they
might be at least fed in return for the desultory services which they
were called upon to perform in that capacity. This practice of hanging-on or of following a chief for the sake of food was a feature of the
perfected feudalism, when insecurity of land tenure was at its height,
and the word defining it-hoopilimeaai *-probably originated at that
period.
~ In 1833, Kamehameha III, then 20 years old, assumed the throne,
and soon became deeply interested in public affairs. In many ways
the unsatisfactory status of land matters was pressed upon his attention. The growing sentiment toward permanence in tenure powerfully
influenced the situation. The defenseless and wretched condition of
the common people in regard to their holdings appealed to his humanity and to his sense of responsibility as their tuler, The inconsistency
of his sovereign control of all the lands of the Kingdom with any progress based upon the incoming tide of civilization became more and
more evident every day. The increasing demand among foreigners
for the right to buy and hold land was an element of importance at
this national crisis and doubtless had much to do in hastening the
course of events. The King not only consulted the great chiefs of the
realm, who certainly were in favor of permanence in tenure for themselves, but he also conferred with foreigners on the subject. In 1836
Commodore Kennedy and Capt. Hollins visited Honolulu in the
U. S. ships Peacock and Enterprise, and during their stay held
conferences with the chiefs, in which the question of land tenure
was discussed. In 1837, Capt. Bruce of the British frigate Imogene
*Hoopilimeaai-adhering for food.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                    63
had several meetings with the chiefs in regard to matter of government, when, in all probabilityt land matters were considered. The
influence of Mr. Richards, for a long time the confidential adviser of
the chiefs was undoubtedly very greet with the King in leading his
mind to the definite conclusion which he reached in 1839, in which
year, on the 7th day of June, he proclaimed a bill of rights which
has made his iname illustrious, and the day on which it was
announced worthy of being forever commemorated by the Hawaiian
people. This document, though showing in its phrases the influence of Anglo-Saxon principles of liberty, of Robert Burns and the
American Declaration of Independence, is especially interesting and
impressive as the Hawaiian Magna Charta, not wrung from an unwilling sovereign by force of arms, but the free surrender of despotic
power by a wise and generous ruler, impressed and influenced by the
logic of events, by the needs of his people, and by the principles of the
new civilization that was dawning on his land.
The following is the translation of this enlightened and munificent
royal grant:
"God hath made of one blood all nations of men to dwell on the
earth in unity and blessedness. God hath also bestowed certain
rights alike on all men and all chiefs and all people of all lands.
"These are some of the rights which He has given alike to every man
and every chief of correct deportment; life, limb, liberty, freedom from
oppression, the earnings of his hands and the productions of his mindnot, however, to those who act in violation of the laws.
"God has also established government and rule for the purpose of
peace; but in making laws for the nation it is by no means proper to
enact laws for the protection of the rulers only, without also providing
protection for their subjects; neither is it proper to enact laws to enrich
the chiefs only, without regard to enriching their subjects also, and
hereafter there shall by no means be any laws enacted which are at
variance with what is above expressed, neither shall any tax be assessed,
nor any service or labor required of any man in a manner which is at
variance with the above sentiments.
"The above sentiments are hereby proclaimed for the purpose of protecting alike both the people and the chiefs of all these islands while
they maintain a correct deportment; that no chief may be able to
cptress any subject, but that chiefs and people may enjoy the same
protctron under one and the same law.
"Protection is hereby secured to the persons of all the people, together
with their lands, their building lots, and all their property, while
they conform to the laws of the kingdom, and nothing whatever shall
be taken from any individual except by express provision of the laws.
Whatever chief shall act perseveringly in violation of this declaration
shall no longer remain a chief of the lHawaiian Islands, and the same
shall be true of the governors, officers, and all land agents. But if
anyone who is deposed should change his course and regulate his conduct by law. it shall then be in the power of the chiefs to reinstate him
in the place he occupied previous to his being deposed."
It will be seen that this bill of rights left much to be done in defining the rights in land granted by it. It appears by the constitution
enacted by the King, the kuhina nui, or premier, and the chiefs, the following year, that the feudal right of controlling transfers of land was
still retained in the Sovereign, in the following words: "Kamehameha
I. was the founder of the kingdom, and to him belonged all the land
from one end of the islands to the other, though it was not his own
private property. It belonged to the chiefs and people in common,




64                   HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
of whom Kamehameha I. was the head and had the management of the
landed property. Wherefore there was not formerly and is not now,
any person who could or can convey away the smallest portion of land
without the consent of the one who had or has the direction of the
kingdom."
The bill of rights promoted activity in land matters, and for the next
few years difficulties arising from land disputes pressed upon the King,
producing great confusion and even endangering the autonomy of the
kingdom. In 1841, Ladd & Co., the pioneers in sugar cultivation in
this country, obtained from the King a franchise which gave them the
privilege of leasing any unoccupied lands for one hundred years at a
low rental. This franchise was afterwards transferred to a Belgian colonization company of which Ladd & Co. were partners, under circumstances that made a good deal of trouble for the Hawaiian Government
before the matter finally disappeared from Hawaiian politics. The intimidation of the King by Lord Paulet, captain of the British frigate
Carysfort, under which the provisional cession of the country to England was made in 1843, was based largely upon a land claim of Mr.
Charlton, an Englishman, which was regarded by the King as illegal,
but which he finally indorsed under Paulet's threat of bombarding Honolulu. These troubles naturally developed among the Hawaiians an
opposition against the policy of allowing foreigners to acquire land
which, in 1845, reached the definite stage of political agitation and petitions to the Government.
During these years of undefined rights, the common people were protected in their holdings by law to a certain extent, but their tenure
was based mainly upon their industrious cultivation of their lands,
except as to house lots and the payment of rent in labor.
The question of the proportionate interests of the King, the chiefs,
and the common people in the lands of the kingdom was one of great
difficulty. As we have seen, the constitution of 1840 distinctly recognized such a community of interest, but Hawaiian precedents threw no
light upon the problem of division. It had been a new departure to
admit that the people had any inherent right in the soil, and now to
carry out that principle required the adoption of methods entirely foreign to the traditions of Hawaiian feudalism.
In this transition time the necessity of an organized government separate from the person of the King, became apparent even to the chiefs,
and this was carried out by three comprehensive acts in 1845, 1846, and
1847. The first, "to organize the executive ministry of the Hawaiian
Islands;" the second, "to organize the executive departments of the
Hawaiian Islands;" and the third, "to organize the judiciary department of the Hawaiian Islands."
As soon as the existence of a responsible government, detached from
the person of the King, became an accepted feature of the political system, it was felt that in some way or other the Government ought to have
public lands and become the source of land titles. At its inception the
Government, as a distinct organization, was possessed of no landed
property; it may be said to have had a right to that portion of the King's
interest in the landed property of the Kingdom which he held in his
official capacity, in distinction from that which belonged to him in his
private capacity; but this was a mere theoretic right, dimly recognized
at first, and only after innumerable difficulties and fruitless expedients
was it filnally developed and carried out in the great mahele or division
of lands between King, chiefs, and people in 1848. Elaborate laws were
made for the purchase of land by the Government from private land



HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                    65
holders which do not appear to have added materially to the public
domain.
The act to organize the executive department contained a statute
establishing a board of royal commissioners to quiet land titles. This
statute was passed December 10, 1845. It was a tentative scheme to
solve the land problem, and though not in itself sufficiently complehensive for the situation, it was in the right direction, and led, through the
announcement of principles of land tenure by the commission, which
were adopted by the Legislature, to a better understanding of the subject, and finally, in the latter part of 1847, to the enactment by the King
and privy council of rules for the division of the lands of the Kingdom, which, with the statute creating the land commission and the
principles adopted by them, formed a complete and adequate provision
for the adjustment of all recognized interests in land on the basis of the.
new departure in the principles of tenure.
At the time of the creation of the board of commissioners to quiet
land titles and up to the enactment of rules by the privy council for
land division, the nation was still feeling its way through the maze of
the difficult questions which were pressing upon it in this great reform
in land matters. Each step which it made threw light upon the path
for the next one. The rapidity with which this reform was accomplished must be attributed not only to the wisdom and fidelity of the
advisers of the nation, but largely to the earnestness and patriotism of
the King and chiefs, who cheerfully made great sacrifices of authority
and interest for the sake of a satisfactory solution of these questions.
The commissioners to quiet land titles were authorized to consider
claims to land from private individuals, acquired previous to the passage of the act creating the commission. This included natives who
were in the occupancy of holdings under the conditions of use or payment of rent in labor, and also both natives and foreigners who had
received lands from the King or chiefs in the way of grants. The
awards of the board were binding upon the Government if not appealed
from, and entitled the claimant to a lease or a royal patent, according
to the terms of the award, the royal patent being based upon the payment of a commutation of one-fourth or one-third of the unimproved
value of the land, which commutation was understood to purchase the
interest of the Government in the soil.
The principles adopted by the land commission use the words King
and Government interchangeably, and failed to reach any adjudication
of the separate rights of the King in distinction from those of the Government in the public domain, or, in other words, they failed to define
the King's public or official interests in distinction from his private rights,
although they fully recognized the distinction. There was, however, an
implied apportionment of these two interests through the proceedings
by which an occupying claimant obtained an allodial title. The commission decided that their authority coming from the King to award lands
represented only his private interests in the lands claimed. Therefore,
as the further payment of the claimant as a condition of his receiving
a title in fee simple from the Government was one-third of the original
value of the land, it follows that the King's private interest was an undivided two-thirds, leaving an undivided one-third belonging to the Government as such.
The commission also decided that there were but three classes of
vested or original rights in land, which were in the King or Government, the chiefs, and the people, and these three classes of interests
were about equal in extent.
The land commission began to work February 11, 1846, and made
S, Rep. 227-5




66


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


great progress in adjudicating the claims of the common people, but
its powers were not adequate to dispose of the still unsettled questions
between the King, the chiefs, and the Government, though it must be
admitted that it made progress in that direction. Neither was the
chiefs ready to submit their claims to its decision.
After earnest efforts between the King and chiefs to reach a settlement of these questions, the rules already referred to were unanimously
adopted by the King and chiefs in privy council December 18, 1847.
These rules, which were drawn up by Judge Lee, embodied the following points: The King should retain his private lands as his individual
property, to descend to his heirs and successors; the remainder of the
laided property to be divided equally between the Government, the
chiefs, and the common people.
As the land was all held at this time by the King, the chiefs, and
their tenants, this division involved the surrender by the chiefs of a
third of their lands to the Government, or a payment in lieu thereof in
money, as had already been required of the tenant landholders. A
committee, of which Dr. Judd was chairman, was appointed to carry out
the division authorized by the privy council, and the work was completed in forty days. The division between the King and the chiefs
was effected through partition deeds signed by both parties. The chiefs
then went before the land commission and received awards for the
lands thus partitioned off to them, and afterwards many of them commuted for the remaining one-third interest of the Government by a
surrender of a portion.
After the division between the King and the chiefs was finished he
again divided the lands which had been surrendered to him between
himself and the Government, the former being known thereafter as
Crown lands and the latter as Government lands.
This division, with the remaining work of the land commission,
completed the great land reform, the first signal of which was
announced by Kamehameha III, in his declaration of rights, June 7,
1839. A brief ten years had been sufficient tbr the Hawaiian nation
to break down the hoary traditions and venerable customs of the past,
and to climb the difficult path from a selfish feudalism to equal rights,
from royal control of all the public domain to peasant proprietorship
and fee-simple titles for poor and for rich. It came quickly and without
bloodshed because the nation was ready for it. Foreign intercourse,
hostile and friendly, and the spirit of a Christian civilization had an
educating influence upon the eager nation, united by the genius of
Kamehameha 1, with its brave and intelligent warrior chiefs resting
from the conquest of arnls, their exuberant energies free for the conquest of new ideas; with rare wisdom, judgment, and patriotism they
proved equal to the demands of the time upon them.
IX. ALSO THE FOLLOWING EXTRACT FROM THE REPORT OF HON.
JOHN QUINCY ADAMS, CHAIRMIAN OF T1HE COMMITTEE- ON FOREIGN
AFFAIRS OF THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES.
"It is a subject of cheering contemplation to the friends of human
improvement and virtue, that by the mild and gentle influence of
Christian charity, dispensed by humble missionaries of the gospel,
unarmed with secular power, within the last quarter of a century, the
people of this group of islands have been converted from the lowest
debasement of idolatry to the blessings of the Christian gospel; united
under one balanced government; rallied to the fold of civilization by
a written language and constitution, providing security for the rights
of persons, property, and mind, and invested with all the elements of




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


67


right and power which can entitle them to be acknowledged by their
brethren of the human race as a separate and independent community.
To the consummation of their acknowledgment the people of the North
American Union are urged by an interest of their own, deeper than
that of any other portion of the inhabitants of the earth-by a virtual
right of conquest, not over the freedom of their brother man by the
brutal arm of physical power, but over the mind and heart by the celestial panoply of the gospel of peace and love."
X. ALSO THE FOLLOWING HAWAIIAN TREATY AND REVIEW OP ITS
COMMERCIAL RESULTS.
THE HAWAIIAN TREATY.
A REVIEW OF ITS COMMERCIAL RESULTS.
The Hawaiian treaty was negotiated for the purpose of securing
political control of those islands, making them industrially and commercially a part of the United States and preventing any other great
power from acquiring a foothold there, which might be adverse to the
welfare and safety of our Pacific coast in time of war. They are situated
midway on the direct way from Panama to Hongkong and directly on
the shortest line from the Columbia River or Puget Sound to Australia.
Here the two great lines of future commerce of the Pacific Ocean intersect, and vessels must stop there for refreshment and refuge.
The islands prior to the treaty were declining in population, and
owing to the decay of the whale fishery, were declining in wealth.
Their soil is, perhaps, the most productive for sugar raising of any
known in the world. But the high tariff on sugar and the exceedingly
low wages which must be paid in tropical countries for raising sugar to
supply the United States rendered the industry difficult. In 1875 a
movement arose in the islands for the importation of Ilindoo coolies to
supply the requisite cheap labor, and the consent of England was
promised. The growth of the Australian colonies had gradually developed an improving market for Hawaiian sugar, and, after a trial of it
by some of the Hawaiian planters, it was found that better prices
could be obtained in the free-trade port of Sydney than in San Francisco, and return cargoes could be bought there much more cheaply.
Preparations were making for sending there the entire crops of 1876 -'77. These matters came to the knowledge of the State Department.
The Hawaiians had been pressing for many years for a commercial
treaty with the United States, but without success. It was now felt in
the State Department that the question was assuming graver importance, and, as poli;tcal supremacy in the islands must inevitably follow
the commerce, it was recognized that this country must make favorable
concessions to them, or else let them follow the inevitable tendency
and drift slowly into the status of an English colony. The result was
the negotiation of the existing treaty and its ratification by the consent of the Senate. The effect of the treaty was as follows:
It was anticipated that the remission of duties would make the profits
of sugar culture very great. But a sugar plantation requires for the
most economical work a large amount of capital, $500,000 being very
moderate for a single plantation, and $250,000 being about as small as
is prudent. The islanders had no capital of any consequence and were
obliged to borrow it from the United States (i. e., from or through the
mercantile houses of San Francisco who import their sugar and act as
agents to the planters for selling it to the refineries). The opening of
plantations proceeded rapidly until the output of sugar has now nearly




68                        HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
reachel the full capacity of the soil, and is seven or eight times greater
than in 1874-'75. Our exports to the islands have increased in very
nearly the same ratio, being five or six times greater than in 1874-'75,
or, if measured in quantity rather than by price, are about seven times
as great. A new merchant marine has been created, consisting of
vessels built expressly for the service, costing over $3,500,000. Of this
total tonnage over 90 per cent is American built, and the rest was
bought. These mercantile houses, with their shipping, transact the
entire commerce both ways, and transport annually about $12,000,000
worth of merchandise at very high rates of freight, commission, and
exchange.
In general, the effect of the treaty has been to make the islands a
field for very profitable investment of American capital. It has created
a demand which would not have existed otherwise for American produce to an amount which may seem small ($23,000,000 in nine years)
when viewed in comparison with our total export, but which, when
viewed in connection with the fact that the population which has
made that demand is less than 80,000, is remarkably large.         During
the last four years it has averaged about $40 per capita per annum,
and, if the transportation charges be added as they properly should
be, it will amount to over $50 per capita per annum.       This is four or
five times as much per capita as England or Canada buys of us. The
general results of the trade may be seen in the following tables:
Values delivered by the United States to the Hawaiian Islands for nine years-1876
to 1885.
Invoice value of United States exports to Hawaii.................... $23, 686, 328
Bills of exchange to pay for all Hawaiian imports from third countries.  9, 868, 674
Difference between coin exported to and received from Hawaii.....  2,222, 181
Outstanding liabilities of United States to Hawaii not known....................
Total values paid by United States............................... 35, 777,183
To balance the account:
Profits already realized on merchandise account... —.................. $18, 414, 766
Cash debts payable to ITnited States at maturity out of fiture shipments.  6, 500, 000
Increased values of productive properties in the islands owned by Americans...............................................................  11, 680,164
72, 372,113
Values received and receivable by the United States from the Hawaiian Islands for nine
years-1867 to 1885.
Invoice value of Hawaiian exports to the United States... $51, 294, 764
Add freight and insurance to obtain value in United States
ports.................................................  2,897, 185
Value of merchandise received................................. $54,191, 949
Liabilities of the islands to the United States for advances on
crops.................................  3, 000,000
Bonded debts payable in United States and secured on
island property.-......-... —......-................. 2, 500,000
Hawaiian Government bonds paid for in silver, coined on
Hawaiian Government account.........................  1, 000, 000
Total liabilities to United States................................  5, 500,000
Increased value f plantation properties owned by United
States citizens, as assessed in 1883...................... 10, 180, 164
Value of other productive properties......................  1, 500, 000
11, 680, 164
Total values received and receivable............................ 72,372,113




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                        69
General distribution of profits.
To American shipping:
Freights and insurance on imports from the islands........ $2,897,185
Freights and insurance on exports.-.................-.  5,127,964
Passenger receipts --—... —...-......................-..  1, 325, 000
$9, 350,149
Commission on purchases for export to the islands........  592, 158
Commission on sales of islands' produce..................  2,209,463
2, 801, 621
Premium  on exchange....................................  812,839
Interest on.loans and  advances  -...........................  ----------  2,160, 000
Dividends and miscellaneous profits —,of............ -—. --- —--  3, 290,157
Total profits already realized —.... —..... --- —-.... ---......- 18,414,766
Debts receivable held chiefly by the San Francisco banks. --- —-------  6, 500,000
Increased values of productive properties owned by Americans........ 11,735, 464
Total gross profits..............................................  36,650,230
1. In the foregoing table, beginning with values delivered, the first
item is the invoice value of our exports to the islands, as shown in the
Treasury statistics for the nine years. It is the home value, and, since
we are comparing San Francisco values with San Francisco values,
freights are not added.
2. The second item represents what we have paid in the form of bills
of exchange to settle the balance of trade against us. Since the
Hawaiians export almost nothing to third countries, but do import considerable from them, it follows that they must draw upon shipments to
the United States to pay for all they import from third countries.
They have no other source of credit to draw upon. Hence turning to
Hawaiian official statistics we find their total imports in nine years to
have been $9,181,522. The freight and insurance must be added, and,
as these are known to be about 10 per cent of the value, we get
$10,099,674. Deducting $231,000, which is their total export to third
countries in nine years, and which liquidated just so much of their
indebtedness to third countries, we have $9,868,674 on merchandise
accounts, which we must pay in bills of exchange drawn in San Francisco against Hawaiian account and in favor of third countries.
3. In further settlement of the balance of trade are coin remittances.
In nine years the excess of coin shipped to Hawaii over coin received
from Hawaii amounts to $2,222,181. Of this $1,000,000 was a silver
coinage for the Hawaiian Government struck at the San Francisco mint,
for which that Government gave its bonds for $1,000,000, which are now
held in this country.
If we have given Hawaii any other consideration it must be in the
form of obligations of some sort which do not appear in statistics. None
such are known, and in a small community like the islands, where
everybody's business is known to everybody else, it is hardly possible
that if any appreciable amount of them existed it would not be known.
As the Hawaiians are deeply in debt to the United States-it is not
likely that any such obligations of importance exist. This side of the
exhibit is therefore as complete as present knowledge can make it.
On the other side of the account we have:
(1) Value of Hawaiian exports to the United States, $51,294,764.
This-is the invoice value at Honolulu. As we are comparing San Francisco values with San Francisco values it is necessary to add freights
and insurance. (The American consul at Honolulu requires invoices to
state the values delivered, less cost of transportation.) This requirement, being a matter of indifference to shippers, is complied with. If




70


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the merchandise had to pay an ad valorem duty they would put the
invoice value as low as possible in accordance with the actual export
costs.
(2) Liabilities of the islands to the United States.-The sugar crop
is an enormously expensive one to raise. It requires fifteen to sixteen
months to mature, and employs hundreds of laborers to each plantation and sugar mill. The planter must, therefore, borrow large amounts
of money to mature it, giving a lien upon the crop as a security to his
factor. The factor in turn borrows the necessary amounts from the
San Francisco banks.   On an average this lien amounts to nearly or
quite half the market value of the crop. I have estimated it for safety
at about one-third that value, or $3,000,000.
(3) Many plantations have also mortgaged debts held in San Francisco. The amount of these is not fully known; but I am sure of at
least $2,500,000, and believe the real amount to be much more than
that.
(4) The value of the plantation properties held by Americans was
assessed by the Hawaiian Government in 1883 at $10,180,164.   This
was assumed to be about two-thirds the real value.  This value has
been created almost wholly since 1876 out of the ground, buildings, and
machinery.*
(5) Other productive properties held by Americans are the interisland mercantile marine, two railroads and equipment, a marine railway, warehouses, etc., all of them the creation of the treaty. The estimate of $1,500,000 is a very low one. The value of these properties far
exceeds the sum of their mortgages and capital stock indebtedness.
No man is rated in this argument as an American citizen unless he has
the right to vote in the United States without naturalization and has the
right to the protection of our Government under public law.
The most striking feature of this exhibit is the very large profit to
the United States-so large that it seems at first unaccountable; but
the great discrepancy between the exports and imports will vanish
when we take full account of the fact that the whole carrying trade and
mercantile business is ours in both directions. All economists regard
transportation and mercantile functions in the passage of commodities
from the purchaser to the consumer as a part of the production. To
the value of our produce at San Francisco must be added all further
accessions of value until it finally leaves our hands and passes into
those of the Hawaiian. Add, then, to the invoice value of our exports
the cost of transportation, commission, and insurance until we have put
the produce into the Hawaiian's hands, and the $36,000,000 becomes
not far from $44,000,000. It costs the Hawaiian not far from one-sixth
of the value of his crop to get it to San Francisco. Deduct that from
$54,000,000 and we have $45,000,000. Thus if we reckon Hawaiian
values against Hawaiian values the exchange becomes less unequal, as
it should, for the real exchange takes place in Hawaii. It is there that
* This is reckoned as profit for the following reasons: Among the commodities
which we send to the islands, and also among those which we buy in Europe and
send there on Hawaiian account, are machinery, building materials, etc. These are
used in construction. The labor which is employed, the improvements which come
from cultivation, and the natural appreciation of land make up together the final
value of the property. The cash outlay directly applied to the creation of this value
is, of course, small in comparison with that value. Whatever cash value has been so
applied is already accounted for and included in the table showing values delivered
to Hawaii. The value of the properties thereby acquired should of course appear
on the other side of the account, and also in the list of profits, for such it clearly is.
It pertains, however, to the capital-stock account and not to simple mercantile profit.
The figures here given largely understate the value of these properties.




HTAW AlIAN ISLANDS.


71


our owt products finally leave our hands, and it is tlhere that Hawaiian
values first come into our hands.
The Committee on Ways and Means, seeing that our exports in nine
years have shown on invoice value of $23,000,000, while our imports
show $54,000,000, have hastily concluded that the apparent balance of
trade against us of $31,000,000 had to be liquidated in coin and exchange.
In fact, only about $13,000,000 is liquidated in that way, and the
$18,000,000 remaining is paid over to our own people and may be reckoned as a gross profit already realized. Over $9,000,000 has gone to
American shipping, nearly $3,000,000 to San Francisco commission
houses, nearly a million to the banks, over $2,000,000 for interest on
loans and advances, and over $3,000,000 as dividends and miscellaneous profits.
In addition to this we hold $6,500,000 of Hawaiian debts which
they must liquidate out of future shipments, and have created
$15,000,000 worth of magnificent productive properties in the islands
out of the soil by the combined action of capital and labor. It would
be difficult to find in all the annals of trade and production a result
more gratifying.
The Committee on Ways and Means have taken it for granted that
the loss of revenue to the Treasury is equal to the computed remission
of duty. This is a grave error.
First. The tariff on sugar for more than twenty years has been so
graduated as to become more and more forbidding, and, finally, prohibitory as the grade and quality of raw sugar increases. This excludes
all eatable raw sugar from the grocery trade and makes it more lrofitable to the refiner to buy the lowest grades he can get. But it raw
sugar is duty free, it is the interest of the refiner to buy the highest
grades and the interest of the plaiter to make them. Accordingly the
Hawaiian planter makes the highest grades, not exceeding No. 20,
above which grade he must pay duty.
But without the treaty he would do as the Cuban does, i. e., make
them of as low grade as possible, so as to pay the minimum duty. The
Committee on Ways and Means has computed the remitted duties on
Hawaiian sugar as actually imported in the highest grades at $3.18
per cwt. prior to June 30, 1883, and $2.40 per cwt. subsequently; but
Hawaiian sugars, which would have been imported had the treaty never
existed, would have been in lower grades and paying presumably the
same average duty as all imported sugars. This was, prior to 1883,
about $3.41 per cwt. and about $1.96 subsequently. Of course we can
not reckon a duty we never could have collected as a loss of revenue.
Instead, therefore, of losing on sugar $23,000,000 in nine years the
loss has not been over $18,000,000.
Second. But this loss ilust have had very large compensations to the
Treasury. Fully five-sixths of the Hawaiian crop has been bought and
paid for by exports, transportation services, and otherwise, for which
the treaty has created a demand, and for which no demand would have
existed elsewhere without the treaty. Our exports to third countries
could not possibly have been diminished by it. Now, the free entry of
Hawaiian sugar has no doubt caused us to purchase from third countries less dutiable sugar. Obviously the exported values withheld from
the purchase of dutiable sugar remain available for other purchases.
The full value of our exports must come back to us somehow, and if we
get less dutiable sugar we must get just so much more of something
else. The only question is whether this '4 more of something else" pays
as much duty as the sugar ould have paid. Probably it does not;
and so far there is a loss, because some of these residual values come




72


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


back in the shape of duty-free articles and because the duty on sugar
is higher (computed ad valorem) than the average of our total imports.
A part of the California bullion and wheat and wine sent to England
pays for Hawaiian sugar, which is duty free. About one sixth of the
Hawaiian crop is thus paid for, and to that proportion there is a total
loss of revenue. While it is impossible to compute what the real loss
is, I think it safe to say that it probably does not exceed one-third, and
certainly does not amount to one-half of the $18,000,000 computed as
lost on sugar. In any event the duty never leaves the country. It is
paid over by the refinery to the consignee of the Hawaiian, and is paid
out again, with much more besides, to American shipping, banks, merchants, and stockholders. The gross profit of $36,000,000 throws into
insignificance the possible loss of $6,000,000 or $8,000,000 of revenue.
It has been said repeatedly that all the profits of this magnificent
trade and industry go to the benefit of Claus Spreckels andl a small
clique of speculators. What nonsense! If it did, he would richly
deserve it, and a vote of thanks by Congress besides.
It will be going to the root of the matter at once to say that the
opposition to the treaty has arisen from the systematic and in some
measure successful attempts to saturate the public press and Congress
with utterly false ideas about Claus Spreckels and his relation to the
islands, to create a bitter personal prejudice against him, and by implication to illogically and unjustly extend that prejudice to the commerce
and industries of the Hawaiian Islands. Claus Spreckels certainly has
for many years monopolized the manufacture and sale of refined sugars
on the Pacific coast, and ruled that market to the extent of his powers
with. a rod of iron. But the first grand mistake consists in supposing
that the Hawaiian treaty has or could have given any assistance to
the establishment of his monopoly or to its maintenance or confer upon
it any benefit whatever. The second mistake consists in wholly false
impressions about the wholly distinct personal relations of Mr. Spreckels
to the industry and commerce of raw sugar. In these he is only one
of many men, and though individually his relations are large, yet relatively to the whole they are small, and he can no more control the
whole than the Cunard Company can control our commerce with
England. As a monopolist of refined sugarhe can notescape the odium
which always attaches to a monopoly. As a planter and stockholder, as
a director of an American steamship company, and a banker, his whole
career and course of conduct will compare favorably with that of any
great and successful merchant in America.
The monopoly of refined sugar in San Francisco is, like all other
monopolies, a perfectly legitimate object of attack; and if it can be
broken up in any way such an end is devoutly to be wished.
But Claus Spreckels's relations to the island trade and industry are
a totally different matter, and when rightly understood will present
themselves to the unprejudiced mind in a totally different aspect. In
this field his operations are perfectly legitimate. It is my purpose to
point out that any attempt to terminate the treaty is simply an attempt
to strengthen and fortify his monopoly and to break down commendable enterprises which should be built up and sustained, and in which
Claus Spreckels is merely one of many participants. Whatever damage might be inflicted upon him in respect to his island interest would
be more than compensated to him out of enlarged profits of his monopoly as a refiner, while the blow would fall with full and disastrous
effect upon thousands of innocent third parties, both in Hawaii and
California, whose intr'ests should be dear to Congress and to the American people.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                     73
The Hawaiian treaty has become an object of attack by the sugarrefining interest of the Eastern States and of the sugar-planting interests of Louisiana. The motives which have led to this attack are as
follows:
During the last few years the sales of sugar imported from Hawaii,
Manila, and Central America, and refined in San Francisco, have
been extending gradually into the markets of the Mississippi Valley,
advancing further eastward every year, thereby displacing the sales of
eastern sugars in the States and Territories west of the Mississippi
River. The Eastern refiners and the Louisiana planters believe that
the possibility of this arises from the free entry of Hawaiian sugars,
thus enabling (as they suppose) the San Francisco refiners to purchase
raw sugar much more cheaply than they otherwise could. Thus they
believe that the treaty discriminates severely against their interests,
and is unjust to them.
This position is denied by the San Francisco refiners and importers
of sugar and by the owners of Hawaiian sugar properties in California.
They contend that the San Francisco refineries get their raw sugar no
cheaper by reason of the treaty, but are obliged to pay the same price
for it as for equivalent dutiable sugar from Asia; that the ability of
the Pacific refiners to compete successfully with the Atlantic refiners
is founded upon conditions wholly independent of the treaty, viz: First,
because unlimited amounts of Asiatic sugar can be laid down in San
Francisco cheaper than raw sugars can be laid down in New York;
second, because through eastward freights over the Pacific railways
are scantier than westward through freights, and the railroads naturally prefer to carry sugar at low rates to hauling empty cars. They
contend that this competition is a natural one; that it is not helped
by the treaty and will not be hindered by its abrogation; that it is destined to grow, and would grow if the Hawaiian Islands did not exist.
Since it is also claimed by the opponents of the treaty that it fosters
and sustains a monopoly of refined sugars, and that the benefits of the
treaty accrue only to that monopoly, and since the whole complaint is
founded in a gross misunderstanding of the nature and conditions of
the sugar business on the Pacific coast, it seems proper to discuss the
facts at some length. From these it will appear that these charges, as
well as others, are utterly without foundation.
It is A self-evident proposition that a cargo of Manila sugar delivered
in New York must sell at a price just equal to that of so much Cuban
sugar of equal grade. It is evident, also, that the price of that cargo at
Manila "free on board" must be less than the New York price by an
amount equal to the cost of transportation. It is further evident that
the price of a similar cargo of Manila sugar delivered in San Francisco
must exceed the Manila price by an amount equal to the total cost of
transportation. It is, therefore, an easy imatter to compute whether
Manila sugar in San Francisco oulght to be cheaper than Cuban or
Manila sugar in New York.
The rate of freight from Manila or Hongkong to San Francisco on
sugar is very low. A vessel can be chartered to go from San Francisco
to Manila in ballast and bring back sugar at $5 or $6 per ton, but during the last eight years Asiatic sugar has largely come as mere ballast.
Freights from Manila to New York range from $9 to $12 per ton.
Interest, insurance, and shrinkage being proportional to the time of
the voyage are evidently in favor of San Francisco as compared with
New York. In brief, the San Francisco price of raw sugar is lower
than the New York price by three-eighths to five-eighths of a cent per
pound.




74                       HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Hawaiian sugars are shipped by the agents or factors of the planters
in Honolulu to commission merchants and importers in San Francisco,
and sold by the latter to the refinery. The terms of purchase after the
treaty took effect were known as the "Manila basis."     The refinery
agreed in substance to take the whole of each planter's crop at a price
which should be equal to that of an equivalent quantity and grade of
Manila sugar delivered, duty paid, in San Francisco. The price of a
certain grade of sugar at Manila known as "extra superior," polarizing
91. and in color No. 10 Dutch standard, was telegraphed daily to San
Francisco. To this price was added $6 per ton for freight, 2 per cent
insurance, the cost of sixty days' exchange, and a specific allowance
for the remitted duty.  This constituted the Manila basis for the day
of quotation.
Just here is one point of dispute between the sugar men of New York
and those of San Francisco and Honolulu. The New Yorkers refuse
to believe that Spreckels pays the full normal price and the entire duty
to the Hawaiians. If anybody is particularly interested in knowing
whether he does not it must be the Hawaiian planter and his Honolulu
factor, for an eighth of a cent per pound means to them a profit or loss
of hundreds of thousands of dollars. Time and again they have examined this question and put it to the most crucial tests, and the verdict
is universal that Spreckels has dealt with them fairly and squarely, and
this is the testimony alike of friends and enemies whose bread and
butter depends on knowing the truth and abiding by it. Who ought
to know best about it, they or people who live 3,500 miles away?
A little over a year ago Spreckels withdrew the tender of the Manila
basis and would only offer the Cuban. The result was, a new refinery
competing with him. Spreckels has always contended that the Manila
basis was higher than it ought to be; that he was overpaying the
planters and giving them more than Manila and China sugar would
have cost him. A    second refinery, C. Adolf Low & Co., which was
pooled with Spreckels up to 1885, also seemed to think so, for, while
having the option of taking as much Hawaiian sugar as they wanted,
they declined taking any on the ground that Manila and Central American sugars were cheaper. My opinion is that Spreckels was in a great
measure right.* To show this would require a detailed examination,
* For the following reasons: Spreckels allows i cent per pound for the'value of
every degree of polariscope. The Manila standard polarizes 910. The average
polarization of the whole Hawaiian crop is about 940, and the allowance. therefore,
is, on the average, { cent above the Manila basis. Suppose, now, the price of
Hawaiian sugar delivered is 5 cents per pound for 91~; for 94' it is 5| cents. But a
940 sugar contains A- more of pure sugar than a 91~ sugar, which at 5 cents is Jt
cent, or about i cent. In other words, Spreckels pays X cent for what is worth to
him only { cent. The lower cost of refining a 94~ sugar than a 910 is fully covered
by the -  cent allowance for every color above No. 10, Dutch standard. This difference, computed on the last Hawaiian crop, amounts to over $350,000. If it be asked
how Spreckels came to concede too much for quality the answer is that when it was
first agreed upon, in 1876, the price of raw sugar was very high, and at that time the
allowance was not very excessive. The New York allowance was -f- cent per degree
of polarization. Moreover, it was at that time anticipated that the run of the
Hawaiian crop would not be above 910 or 92". Once fixed, the allowance became a
custom, and custom is a powerful conservative force sometines in matters of price.
Again, the great bulk of the Hawaiian crop comes to San Francisco in December
to March, inclusive, and Spreckels must pay for it on delivery. Hence he must carry
an enormous surplus stock, worth $3,000,000 to $4,000,000, during a great part of the
year, and the interest on that is no trifle. If he could buy Asiatic sugars as he wanted
them, or take advantage of the favorable stages of the market, he would have an
advantage he does Int now possess. All things considered I have no doubt that the
practicalworking of the Manila basis was to make Spreckels pay more for Hawaiian
sugar than Manila sugar would have cost him.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                     75
which no one but a sugar expert would easily understand. At the
same time it seems to me that the true price, while lower than the
Manila basis, ought, during the extremely low prices of sugar last year,
to have been a little better than the Cuban basis. Be this as it may,
the vital fact remains in any event that the price on either basis would
be considerably lower in San Francisco than in New York. It also remains true that the attempt of Spreckels to better himself in respect to
the terms on which he purchases Hawaiian sugar has cost him very
dear in the organization of an opposition refinery, and the end is not
yet. And this brings to us the next link in the chain.
Mr. Spreckels was obliged to buy the whole Hawaiian crop and pay
the full market price for it, including the entire duty, or else subject
himself to competition. To understand this it is necessary to look at
the nature of this monopoly. A monopoly means the want of effective
and full competition. What are the possible sources of competition in
the sale of refined sugars in California? There can be none from
foreign refined sugars, because the duty upon them is prohibitory.
There can be no effective competition from Eastern refined sugars,
because their price is established on the Atlantic seaboard, where
sugar is dearer and the railway transportation is prohibitory. Why is
there no local competition  Because there is not work enough for two
refineries. A single refinery half as large as Havemeyer & Elder% can
saturate with sugar the whole country west of Denver. If, then, there
are two refineries, as has actually been the case, they must either pool
and divide the market, which they did, or else begin a war of extermination, which they are now doing. The causes which have rendered a
monopoly easily possible are, therefore, a prohibitory tariff on refined
sugar, the isolation of California from other States where sugar is
refined, its comparatively small population, and the fact that one ordinary refinery is ample for all needs. Under such circumstances a monopoly, or else a pool, which amounts to the same thing, is inevitable.
Nothing on earth can stop it but time and the changes of conditions,
which time will ultimately bring.
The Hawaiian treaty has had nothing to do with the establishment
of this monopoly; the monopoly was fixed before the treaty, and so far
from being helped by it, has been embarrassed and weakened by it, and
may be yet more seriously embarrassed by its continuance, for the
treaty rendered possible two new sources of competition. The nature
of this competition is very instructive and will repay carefil examination.
The duty upon raw sugars not only increases with their purity and
lightness of color, but increases in a faster ratio than the value of the
sugar itself. The result in New York is that it is cheaper and more
profitable for the refineries to purchase the impurest sugars they can
get, and that raw sugars of fine high quality are, in consequence of
this disportionate duty, dearer than refined sugars. In short, the
duty on raw sugars which are fit to eat is, to all intents and purposes,
prohibitory. This is the reason why raw sugar has entirely disappeared from our grocery stores. Il England, the greatest sugar-eating country in the world, where sugar is duty free, a large proportion
of the sugar consumed does not go through the refinery at all, but is
sold to customers just as it comes from the plantations. If the tariff
on sugar were exactly proportional to its purity vast quantities of raw
sugar would be sold in the stores in the place of just so much refined
sugar. So it would be in the Eastern States if raw sugars up to 20
Dutch standard were duty free. It is easy to see that in California




76


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


the free entry of Hawaiian sugar up to No. 20 put the refinery into the
following difficulty: It must not permit the sugars to go upon the open
market. How was it to prevent it? By making it more profitable to
the planter to sell to the refinery than the grocery store. How was it
to do that? First, by paying a maximum price for the raws, and,
second, by keeping down the price of refined sugar to points which
should not exceed the price of raws by more than a certain small
percentage. The maximum price of the raws was the Manila basis,
and if the price of the refined exceeded the Manila basis by more than
a certain small percentage the Hawaiian sugar would be tempted
into the grocery trade direct.
Congress has been saturated with the idea that Spreckels has bought
Hawaiian sugar at his own price, appropriating the remitted duty to
himself and at the same time increasing the price of refined sugar.
The idea is absurd and impossible. The truth is just the reverse. The
command of prices for raw sugar up to the Manila basis rests with the
planter, and Spreckels must yield or provoke a competition in which
the planter is sure to win. Above the Manila basis the planter can not
go without loss to himself. Spreckels, moreover, has been obliged to
sell refined sugar at lower prices than he could commandif the Hawaiian
crop were out of the way. To restore the duty would crush the
planter, leaving him to Spreckels' dictation and give him (Spreckels)
the power of exacting a larger price for his output without fear of
any competition from the planter. The effect of the treaty upon the
monopoly has been to hold up the price of raw sugar to the full normal
price and to bring the price of refined nearer to that of raws than it
would otherwise have been.
(2) The second source of competition is a new refinery. Mr.
Spreckels himself controls, as a majority stockholder, only one plantation on the islands. He has a minority interest in each of four others
(unless he has acquired more since 1884). He and his friends together
can not control more than a fourth part of the Hawaiian crop except by
buying it on terms satisfactory to the planters. Suppose the other
planters to become dissatisfied with the terms of purchase he may
offer, what is to prevent them from joining hands and starting a new
refinery in San Francisco to work their own sugars? Nothing, except
the want of an inducement. The question of capital offers no difficulty
if there is anything to be gained. What would constitute an inducement? Not the prospect of profit on the sale of refined sugars unless
they are prepared to crush Spreckels out completely and set up a new
monopoly in place of his. But a genuine inducement would be established at once if Spreckels were to insist upoI paying too low a price
for their raw sugar. Suppose the cost of Asiatic sugar, duty paid, in
San Francisco is 5 cents and Spreckels will only pay the Hawaiians 4J
cents. Suppose two-thirds of the planters refuse and start a new
refinery. A war of rates instantly follows. How low can Spreckles
afford to sell refined sugar? As low as the price of Asiatic sugar plus
the cost of refining. How low could the planters afford to sell sugar?
As low as the cost of raising raw sugar, shipping it to San Francisco,
and refining it. When Spreckels has touched the bottom price the
planter is still making the full profit on his Law sugar, but nothing on
his refined, and Spreckels is making no profit out of his refinery;
This is precisely what has happened. When Spreckels dropped from
the Manila to the Cuban basis some of the California stockholders and
some of the keen Yankees in the island thought he was going too low.
They clubbed together, and, with the aid of San Francisco capitalists
who hold Hawaiian plantation stocks, they started a new refinery. They




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                   77
did not expect to make much proft out of refined sugar, but they do
expect to get the fullest price of their raws. The ultimate result of
this contest will depend upon whether Spreckels is right in his assertion that the Cuban basis is the normal price of sugar.
GENERAL RESULTS OF THE TREATY.
The treaty has developed a trade with the islands which, relatively
to the population, is enormous, and of which the profits have been and
still are exceedingly large. The profits have not, as generally supposed, accrued to the great sugar monopoly, but chiefly to the American shipping which was evoked by the treaty, to the mercantile houses
which have handled the merchandise, and to the investors who have
advanced the capital to open and develop the productive properties.
These profits have been nearly double the remitted duties and four or
five times as great as the probable loss of revenue.
So far has the treaty been from benefiting a monopoly of refined
sugars in California that it has restricted its powers and embarrassed
it, and may even yet destroy it. The refinery is powerless to obtain
the benefit of the remitted duties in any degree whatever. It must
pay them in full to the consignee of the planter, who, in turn, pays
them, and more besides, over to our shipping, banks, mercantile houses,
and investors. The remitted duties never leave the country.
The treaty has brought up a mercantile marine of our own, employing American-built steamers and sailing vessels, and the entire commerce, amounting to $12,000,000 annually, is in our hands. It is the
only foreign commerce to-day which we can call ourown. Before the
treaty the sugar and rice imported at San Francisco came chiefly from
Asia and the East India Islands, where it was bought with London
exchange and shipped in foreign vessels.
The treaty has had no assignable effect whatever upon the sales of
sugar in the Mississippi Valley. These sales would have been the
same and would continue to be the same without the treaty as with it.
San Francisco is the natural source of supply of sugar for almost the
whole country west of the Kansas Missouri line, and of a considerable
territory still further east. The only real competition of San Francisco
in that region is the Louisiana planter, who has no more right to complain of it than of the competition of New York. This competition is
independent of the treaty. Congress can not prevent it, and ought not
to if it could, for it is a normal and healthy one.
XI. ALSO THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE IN THE FORUM FOR MARCH,
1893, ON "HAWAII AND OUR FUTURE SEA-POWERB, AND WRITTEN
BY CAPT. A. T. MAHAN.
[The Forum, March, 1893.]
HAWAII AND OUR FUTURE SEA POWER.*
The suddenness so far, at least, as the general public is concerned,
with which the long-existing troubles in Hawaii have come to a head,
and the character of the advances reported to be addressed to the
United States by the revolutionary government, formally recognized
as defacto by our representative on the spot, add another to the many
significant instances furnished by history that, as men in the midst
*Copyright, 1892, by the Forum Publishing Company.




78


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


of life are in death, so nations in the midst of peace find themselves
confronted with unexpected causes of dissension, conflicts of interests,
whose results may be, on the one hand, war, or, on the other, abandonment of clear and imperative national advantage in order to avoid
an issue for which preparation has not been made. By no premeditated contrivance of our own, by the cooperation of a series of events
which, however dependent, step by step, upon human action, were not
intended to prepare the present crisis, the United States finds herself
compelled to answer a question, to make a decision, not unlike and
not less momentous than that required of the Roman senate when the
Mamertine garrison invited it to occupy Messina and so to abandon
the hitherto traditional policy which had confined the expansion of
Rome to the Italian peninsula. For let it not be overlooked that,
whether we wish or no, we must answer the question, we must make
the decision. The issue can not be dodged. Absolute inaction in such
a case is a decision as truly as the most vehement action. We can now
advance, but, the conditions of the world being what they are, if we
do not advance we recede; for there is involved not so much a particular action as a question of principle pregnant of great consequences
in one direction or in the other.
Occasion of serious difficulty should not, indeed, here arise. Unlike
the historical instance just cited, the two nations that have now come
into contact are so alike in inherited traditions, habits of thought, and
views of right, that injury to the one need not be anticipated from the
predominance of the' other in a quarter where its interests also predominate. Despite the heterogeneous character of the immigration
which the past few years have been pouring into our country, our political traditions and racial characteristics still continue English-Mr.
Douglas Campbell would say Dutch, but the stock is the same. Though
thus somewhat gorged with food not wholly to its taste, our political
digestion has so far contrived to mlaster the incongruous mass of materials it has been unable to reject; and, if assimilation has been at times
imperfect, the political constitution and spirit remain English in essential features. Imbued with like, ideals of liberty, of law, of right, certainly not less progressive than our kin beyond sea, we are, in the
safeguards deliberately placed around our fundamental law, even more
conservative than they. That which we recerved of the true spirit of
freedom we have kept-liberty and law-not the one or the other, but
both. In that spirit we have not only occupied our original inheritance,
but also, step by step, as Rome incorporated the other nations of the
peninsula, we have added to it, spreading and perpetuating everywhere the same foundation principles of free and good government
which, to her honor be it said, Great Britain also has throughout her
course maintained. And now, arrested on the south by the rights of
a race wholly alien to us, and on the north by a body of states of like
traditions to our own, whose freedom to choose their own affiliations
we respect, we have come to the sea. In our infancy we bordered upon
the Atlantic only; our youth carried our boundary to the Gulf of Mexico; to-day maturity sees us upon the Pacific. Have we no right or
no call to progress farther in any direction? Are there for us beyond
the sea horizon none of those essential interests, of those evident dangers, which impose a policy and confer rights?
This is the question that has long been looming upon the brow of a
future now rapidly passing into the present. Of it the Hawaiian incident is a part, intrinsically, perhaps, a small part, but in its relations
to the whole so vital that, as has before been said, a wrong decision




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




IWALIAN ISLANDS.                     83.
susceptibilities of cther nations —none of which is contravened by the
step here immediately under-discussion-the annexation, even, of
Hawaii would be no mere 'sporadic effort, irrational because disconnected from an adequate motive, but a first fruit and a token that the
nation in its evolution has aroused itself to the necessity of carrying
its life-that has been the happiness of those under its influencebeyond the borders that have heretofore sufficed for its activities.
That the vaunted blessings of our economy are not to be forced upon
the unwilling may be conceded; but the concession does not deny the
right nor the wisdom of gathering in those who wish to come. Comparative religion teaches that creeds which reject missionary enterprise are foredoomed to decay.  May it not be so with nations? Certainly the glorious record of England is consequent mainly upon the
spirit and traceable to the time when she launched out into the deepwithout formulated policy, it is true, or foreseeing the future to which
her star was leading, but obeying the instinct which in the infancy of
nations anticipates the more reasoned impulses of experience. Let us,
too, learrp from her experience. Not all at once did England become
the great sea power which she is, but step by step, as opportunity
offered, she has moved on to the world wide preeminence now held by
English speech and by institutions sprung from English germs. How
much poorer would the world have been had Englishmen heeded the
cautious hesitancy that now bids us reject every advance beyond our
shore lines. And can any one doubt that a cordial, if unformulated,
understanding between the two chief states of English tradition, to
spread freely, witfout mutual jealously and in mutual support, would
greatly increase the world's sum of happiness?
But if a plea of the world's welfare seem suspiciously like a cloak for
national self-interest, let the latter be frankly accepted as the adequate
motive which it assuredly is. Let us not sink from pitting a broad selfinterest against the narrow self-interest to which some would restrict
us. The demands of our three great seaboards, the Atlantic, the Gulf,
and the Pacific-each for itself, and all for the strength that comes from
drawing closer the ties between them-are calling for the extension,
through the Isthmian Canal, of that broad sea common along which,
and along which alone, in all ages prosperity has moved. Land carriage,
always restricted and therefore always slow, toils enviously but hopelessly behind, vainly seeking to replace and supplant the royal highway of nature's own making. Corporate interests, vigorous in that
power of concentration which is the strength of armies and of minorities, may here for a while withstand the ill-organized strivings of the
multitude, only dimly conscious of its wants; yet the latter, however
temporarily opposed and baffled, is sure at last, like the blind forces of
nature, to overwhelm all that stand in the way of its necessary progress. So the Isthmian Canal is an inevitable part in the future of the
United States; yet scarcely an integral part, for it can not be separated
from other necessary incidents of a policy dependant upon it, whose
details can not be exactly foreseen. But because the precise steps that
may hereafter be opportune or necessary can not yet be certainly foretold, is not a reason the less, but a reason the more, for establishing a
principle of action which may serve to guide as opportunities arise. Let
us start from tie fundamental truth, warranted by history, that the
control of the seas, and especially along the great lines drawn by
national interest or national commerce, is the chief among the merely
material elements in the power and prosperity of nations. It is so




I. -


84                    HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
because the sea is the world's great medium of circulation, From this
necessarily follows the principle that, as subsidiary to such control, it
is imperative to take possession, when it can righteously be done,
of such maritime positions as contribute to secure command. If
this principle be adopted there will be no hesitation about
taking the positions-and they are many —upon the approaches
to the Isthmus, whose interests incline them to seek us. It has its
application also to the present case of Hawaii.
There is, however, one cauti6n to be given from that military point of
view beyond the need of which the world has not yet passed. Military
positions, fortified posts, by land or by sea, however strong or admirably
situated, do not by themselves confer control. People often say that
such an island or harbor will give control of such a body of water. It
is an utter, deplorable, ruinous mistake. The phrase may indeed by
some be used only loosly, without forgetting other implied conditions
of adequateprotection and adequate navies; but the confidence of our
nation in its native strength, and its indifference to the defense of its
ports and the sufficiency of its fleet, give reason to fear that the full
consequences of a forward step may not be soberly weighed. Napoleon,
who knew better, once talked this way. "The islands of San Pietro,
Corfu, and Malta," he wrote, "will make us masters of the whole Mediterranean." Vain boast! Within one year Corfu, in two years Malta,
were rent away from the state that could not support them by its ships.
Nay, more; had Bonaparte not taken the latter stronghold out of the
hands of its degenerate but innocuous government, that citadal of the
Mediterranean would perhaps-would probably-never have passed
into those of his chief enemy. There is here also a lesson for us.
It is by no means logical to leap, from this recognition of the necessity of adequate naval force to secure outlying dependencies, to the conclusion that the United States would for that object need a navy equal
to the largest now existing. A nation as far removed as is our own
from the bases of foreign naval strength may reasonably reckon upon
the qualification that distance-not to speak of the complex European
interests close at hand-impresses upon the exertion of naval Strength.
The mistake is when our remoteness, unsupported by carefully calculated force, is regarded as an armor of proof, under cover of which any
amount of swagger may be safely indulged. Any estimate of what is
an adequate naval force for our country may properly take large account
of the happy interval that separates both our present territory and our
future aspirations from the centers of interest really vital to European
states. If to these safeguards be added, on our part, a sober recognition of what our reasonable sphere of influence is and a candid justice
in dealing with foreign interests within that sphere, there will be little
disposition to question our preponderance therein.
Among all foreign states it is especially to be hoped that each passing year may render more cordial the relations between ourselves and
the great nation from whose loins we sprang. The radical identity of
spirit which underlies our superficial differences of polity will' surely
so draw us closer together, if we do not willfully set our faces against
a tendency which would give our race the predominance over the seas of
the world. To force such a consummation is impossible, and, if possible,
would not be wise; but surely it would be a lofty aim, fraught with
immeasurable benefits, to desire it, and to raise no needless impediments by advocating perfectly proper acts, demanded by our evident
interests. in offensive or arrogant terms.-(A. T. MAHAf.)




:                               _.
- HAWAIAN ISLANDS.                   85
XIIn. ALSO THE FOLLOWING EXTRACT FROM THE REPORT OF HON.
JOHN QUINCY ADAMS, CHAIRMAN OF THE COMMITTEE ON FOREIGN
AFFAIRS OF THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES, ON THE MESSAGE
OF PRESIDENT TYLER, DECEMBER 30, 1842.
"It is a subject of cheering contemplation to the friends of human
improvement and virtue that, by the mild and gentle influence of
Christian charity, dispensed by humble missionaries of the gospel,
unarmed with secular power, within the last quarter of a century, the
people of this group of islands have been converted from the lowest'
idebasement of idolatry to the blessings of the Christian gospel;
united under one balanced government; rallied to the fold of civilization by a written language and constitution, providing security for the
rights of persons, property and mind, and invested with all the elements of right and power which can entitle them to be acknowledged
by their brethren of the human race as a separate and independent
community. To the consummation of their acknowledgment the
people of the North American Union are urged by an interest of their
own, deeper than that of any other portion of the inhabitants of the
earth-by a virtual right of conquest, not over the freedom of their
brother man by the brutal arnm of phlysical power, but over the mind
and heart by the celestial panoply of the gospel of peace and love."
XIII. ALSO THE FOLLOWING, A TRANSLATION OF THE CONSTITUTION
OF THE HAWAIIAN GOVERNMENT OF 1840.
"In the Hawaiian bill of rights, the chiefs endeavored to incorporate
in few words the general basis of personal rights, both of the chiefs and
common people, and to guard against perversion; and this they have
accomplished with, perhaps, as much precision and consistency asthe
Americans, who affirm 'that all men are born free and equal, possessing
certain inalienable rights, life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness.'
"With distinguished and commendable care do the Hawaiians of
1840 acknowledge the paramount authority of God, in which Kaahu.
manu had set them a noble example, and the importance of an unwavering purpose in legislation not to controvene his word,"
The following translation I have made with care from the original,
published at the islands as the constitution of 1840:
" God has made of one blood all the nations of men, that they might
alike dwell upon the earth in peace and prosperity. And he has given
certain equal rights to all people and chiefs of all countries. These are
the rights or gifts which he has granted to every man and chief of correct deportment, life, the members of the body, freedom in dwelling
and acting, and the rightful prodacts of his hands and mind; but not
those things which are inhibited by the laws.
"From God also are the office of rulers and the reign of chief magistrates for protection; but in enacting the laws of the land it is not
right to make a law protecting the magistrate only and not subjects;
neither is it proper to establish laws for enriching chiefs only without
benefiting the people, and hereafter no law shall be established in
opposition to the above declarations; neither shall taxes, servitudel
nor labor be exacted without law of any man in a manner at variance
with those principles.
"PROTECTION FOR ALL.
' Therefore let this declaration be published in order to the equal
protection of all the people and all the chiefs of these islands while




RAKWAIIAN ISLANDS.


maintaining a correct deportment, that no chief may oppress any-subject, and that chiefs and people may enjoy equal security under the'
same system of law; the persons, the lands, the dwelling enclosures,
and all the property of all the people are protected while they conform
to the laws of the Kingdom, neither shall any of these be taken except
by the provisions of law. Any chief who shall perseveringly act in
opposition to this constitution shall cease to hold his office as a chief
of these Hawaiian Islands; and the same shall apply to governors, officers of Government, and land agents. But if one condemned should
turn again and conform himself to the laws it shall be in the power of
the chiefs to reinstate him in the standing he occupied before his tres- *
pass.
l FOUNDATION OP LAWS.
~"According to the principles above declared, we purpose to regulate
this Kingdom, and to seek the good of all the chiefs and all the people
of these Hawaiian Islands. We are aware that we can not succeed by
ourselves alone, but through God we can; for He is King over all kingdoms; by whom protection and prosperity may be secured; therefore
do we first beseech him to point out to us the right course, and aid our
work.
"Wherefore, resohled,
"'I. No law shall be enacted at variance with the word of the Lord
Jehovah, or opposed to the grand design of that word. All the laws
of this country shall accord with the general design of God's law.
'II. All men of every form of worship shall be protected in their
worshipping Jehovah, and in their serving Him; nor shall any one be
punished for merely neglecting to serve God, provided he injures no
man and brings no evil on the Kingdom.
"III. The law shall support every unblamable man who is injured by
another all shall be protected in every good work, and every man shall
be punishable who brings evil on the Kingdom or individuals. Nor shall
any unequal law be established to give favor to one through evil to
another.
"IV. Noman shallbepuinishelunlesshiscrimebe first made to appear,
nor shall he be punished without being examined in the presence of his
-accuser. When the accused and the accuser have met face to face, and
the trial proceeds according to law, and guilt is established before them
both, then punishment shall follow.
V. It shall not be proper for any man or chief to sit as judge or
juror to try his own benefactor, or one directly connected with him.
Therefore, if one is condemned or acquitted, and it shall soon be known
that some of the triers acted with partiality to favor whom he loved, or
perhaps to enrich himself, then there may be a new trial before the
impartial.
EXPLANATIO;T OF THE POSITION OF THE RULERS.
"The nature of the position of the chief magistrates and of the policy
of the country is this: Kamehameha I was the head of this Kingdom or
dyiasty. To him pertained all the lands from Hawaii to Niihan, but
they were not his own personal property; they belonged to the people
and the chiefs, and Kamehameha was their head and the dictator of
the country. Therefore no one had before, and no one has now, the
right to convey away the smallest portion of these islands without the
consent of the dictator of the Kingdom.




'AWAtlAN ISLANDI j                   87
u These are the dictators or the persons who have had the direction of
it from that time down, Kamehameha II and Kaahumanu I, and at the
present time Kamehehaeha III. To these persons only has belonged
the direction or dictatorship of the realm down to the present time,
and the documents written by them only are the documents of the
Kingdom.
" The Kingdom is to be perpetuated to Kamehameha III and to his
heirs, and his heir shall be one whom he and the chiefs shall appoint
during his lifetime; but if he shall not nominate, then the appointment
shall devolve solely on the nobles and representatives.
PREROGATIVES OF THE KING.
"This is the King's position: He is the sovereign of all the people
and all the chiefs. At his direction are the soldiers, the guns, the
forts, and all the implements of war of the Kingdom. At his direction
is the public property, the revenue fropn the poll tax, the land tax, and
the three days monthly labor tax, to accord, however, with the provisions of law. He shall possess his own private lands, and such as
shall be forfeited for the annual tax.
" He is the chief judge of the supreme court, and to him belongs the
execution of the laws of the land, the decrees, and the treaties with
other countries, in accordance with the provisions of the laws of this
country..
' It is for him to make treaties with the rulers of all other kingdoms,
and to hold intercourse with ministers sent hither from other countries, and to consummate agreements.
" It is for him to declare war should a period of distress arrive, and
the chiefs could not well be assembled; and he shall be commander
in chief of the army. All important business of the Kingdom not committed by law to others, belongs to him to transact.
" OF THE PREMIER OF THE KINGDOM.
"It shall be the duty of the King to appoint a chief of ability and
high rank to be his prime minister, who shall be entitled-premier of the
Kingdom, whose office and business shall be like that of Kaahumanu I
and Kaahumanu II. For in the life time of Kamehameha, the questions of life and death, right and wrong, were for Kaahumanu to
decide, and at the time of his death he gave charge,' Let the Kingdom
be Liholiho's, and Kaahumanu the prime minister.' That policy of
Kamehameha, wherein he sought to secure a premier, is to be perpetuated in this Hawaaiian country, but in accordance with the provisions of law.
"This is the business of the premier: Whatever appropriate business
of the Kingdom the King intends to do the premier may do in the name
of the King. The words and acts of the Kingdom by the premier are
the words and acts ot the King. The premier shall receive and
acknowledge the revenue of the Kingdom and deliver it to the King.
The premier shall be the King's special counsellor in all the important
business of the Kingdom. The King shall not transact public business
without the concurrence of the premier; nor shall the premier transact
public business without the concurrence of the King. If the King shall
veto what the premier counsels or attempts that is a negative. Whatever important public business the King chooses to transact in person
he may do, but only with the approbation or consent of the premier.




-  HAWAIAI IStANDS.


OF GOVERNORS.
"There shall be four governors in this Hawaiian country; one of
Hawaii, one of Maui and the adjacent isles, one of Oahu, and one of
Kauai and the adjacent isles. All the governors from Hawaii to Kauai
shall hold their office under the King.
"This is the character and duty of the office of governor: He is the
director of all the tax officers in his island,;and shall sustain their orders
which he shall deem right, confirming according to the provisions of
law, and not his own arbitrary will. He shall preside over all the
judges of his island and execute their decisions as above stated. He
shall choose the judges of his district and give them their commissions.
"The governor is the high chief (viceroy) over his island or islands,
and shall have the direction of the forts, the soldiers, guns, and all the
implements of war. Under the King and premier shall be all the
governors from Hawaii to Kauai. Each shall have charge of the revenue of his island, and shall deliver it to the premier.
"In case of distress he may act as dictator, if neither King nor premier can be consulted. He shall have charge of all the King's business
on the island, the taxation, improvements, and means 'of increasing
wealth, and all officers there shall be under him. To him belong all
questions and business pertaining to the government of the island, not
assigned by law to others.
"On the decease of a governor, the chiefs shall assemble at such a
place as the King shall appoint, and together seek out a successor of
the departed governor, and the person whom they shall choose and
the King approve by writing shall be the new governor.
"OF CHIEFS OR NOBLES UNDER THE KING.
"In the public councils of the chiefs these are the counsellors for
the current period: Kamehameha III, Kekauluohi, Hoapiliwahine,
Kaukini, Kek auonohi, Kahekili, Paki, Konia, Keohokalole, Leleiohoku,
Kehuanaoa, Keliiahonui, Kanaina, Li Keoniana, a me Haalilio, and if
a new member is to enter the law shall specify it. These persons shalL
take part in the councils of the Kingdom. But if the council choose to
admit others merely for consultation it shall be allowable, the specified
counsellors only being allowed to vote. No law shall be enacted for
the country without their consent.
"In this manner shall they proceed: They shall meet annually to
devise means for benefiting the country and enact laws for the Kingdom. In the month of April shall they assemble at such time and
place as the King shall appoint. It shall be proper for the King to take
counsel with them on all the important concerns of the Kingdom in
order to secure harmony and prosperity, or the general good, and'they
shall attend to all the business which the King shall commit to them.
They shall retain their own personal estates, larger or smaller divisions
of the country, and may conduct their affairs on their own lands according to their pleasure, but not in opposition to the laws of the Kingdom.
OF REPRESENTATIVES ELECTED
"Several men shall be annually chosen to act in council with the
King and chiefs, and to devise with them laws for the country. Some
from Hawaii, some from Maui, some from Oahu, and some from Kauai,
shall the plebeians choose according to their own pleasure. The law




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                  89
will determine the method of choosing and the number to be chosen.
These chosen representatives shall have a voice in the Government,
and no law can be established without the consent of the majority of
them.
"OF THE MEETINGS OF THE LEGISLATURE OR PARLIAMENT.
"There shall be an annual meeting as aforesaid, but if the chiefs
choose another meeting at another time they may meet at their discretion.
"In the assembling of Parliament, let the hereditary nobles meet by
themselves and the elected rulers meet —by themselves, But if they
choose to take counsel together occasionally at their discretion, so be it.
"In this manner shall they proceed: The hereditary chiefs shall
choose a secretary for their body, and on the day of their assembling
he shall record all their transactions; and that book shall be preserved
that what they devise for the Kingdom may not be lost.
"In the same manner shall the elected representatives proceed; they
shall choose a secretary for themselves, and on the day they assemble,
to seek the good of the Kingdom and agree on any measure, he shall
record it in a book, which shall be carefully preserved, in order that
the good desired for the country may not be lost. And no new law
shall be established without the consent of a majority of the nobles
and of the elected representatives.
"When any act or measure shall have been agreed on by them it shall
be carried on paper to the King, and if he approves and signs his name,
and also the premier, then it shall become a law of the Kingdom, and
it shall not be repealed except by the body which enacted it.
W'OF THE TAX OFFICERS.
"The King and premier shall choose tax officers and give them a commission in writing. They shall be distinct for the separate islands.
There shall be three, or more or less, for each island, at the discretion
of the King and premier.
"A tax officer, having received a commission, shall not be removed
without a trial. If convicted of crime he may be removed; but the
number of years the office shall continue may be previously limited by
law.
" This is clearly the business of the tax officers: They shall apprise the
people of the amount of assessment, that they may hear beforehand at
the proper time; they shall proceed according to the orders of the
governors and the provisions of law; and when the time for paying
taxes shall arrive, they shall collect the amount and deliver it to the
governor, and the governor to the premier, and the premier to the King.
The tax officers shall also direct the public labor for the King, but may
commit its details to the land agents, presiding themselves over them
in this work. They shall also have charge of any new business which
the King may design to extend through the Kingdom, but in their
doings they shall be subordinate to the governors. They shall be
arbiters of the tax laws, and in all cases where land agents or landlords
oppress the peasantry, and in every difficulty between land agents and
tenants, and everything specified in the tax law established June 7th,
1839.
"In this manner shall they proceed: Each shall exercise his office




90                   HAWAIIAN ISLAND8,
in his own district. If a difficulty arise between & land agent and a
tenant.the tax officer shall investigate it, and if the tenant is in fault
the tax officer and land agent shall execute the law upon him; but if
the land agent is in fault in the judgment of the tax officer the latter
shall call the other tax officers of the island, and, if they agree with
him, judgment against the land agent is confirmed, and the governor
shall execute the law on him; but if any believe the tax officer to
have erred the governor may be apprised and try the case over again,
and if he is believed to have erred the case may be made known to
the supreme judges, and they shall-try the case anew.;"O  THE JUDGES.
"The governor of each island shall choose judges for the island
according to his own mind, two or more, at his own discretion, and,
give them a written commission. When they receive this they shall
not be removed without trial, but the law may limit their term of office.
"In this manner shall they proceed: The court days shall be declared
beforehand, and when the appointed day arrives they shall proceed
with trials according to law. To them shall be given jurisdiction in
respect to all the laws except those connected with taxation, and to
the difficulties between land agents, landlords, and tenants. The
governor shall sustain them and execute their judgment. But if their
judgment is thought to be unjust he who thinks so may complain or
appeal to the supreme judges.
"OF THE SUPREME JUDGES.
"qThe elected representatives shall choose four judges to assist the
King and premier, and these six shall be the supreme judges of the
Kingdom. This shall be their business: Cases of difficulty not well
adjusted by the tax officers or island judges they shall try again
according to law; the court days shall be declared beforehand, that
those who are in difficulty may apply, and the decision of this court
shall stand. There is thereafter no appeal. Life and death, to bind
and release, to fine and not to fine, are at their disposal, and with them
the end of controversy.
"OF CHANGES IN THE CONSTITUTION.
"This constitution shall not be considered as fully established until
the people generally shall have heard it, and certain persons as herein
mentioned shall be chosen and shall assent to it, then firmly established is this constitution.
' "And thereafter, if it be designed to alter it, the people shall be first
apprised of the nature of the amendment intended to be introduced,
and the next year, at the meeting of the nobles and representatives,
if they agree to insert a passage or to annul a passage, they may do it
lawfully.
" This constitution, above stated, has been agreed to by the nobles,
and our names are set to it this e ghth day of October, in the year of
our Lord 1840, at Honolulu, Oahu.
(Signed),
" KAMEHAMEHA III,
dK ]EKAULUOHI."




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
0
r  -




cro
-
co',
~
r,




cro
-
0
r  -




HAWAIIAN IN SLANDS.


101


between the Pacific coast and the vast domains of Asia, which are now
opening to commerce and Christian civilization.' And he directed our
minister not to discourage the feeling which may exist in favor of
annexation to the United States, but to seek and even invite infolmnation touching the terms and conditions upon which that object might
be effected.
"Since the conclusion of the reciprocity treaty of 1875 it has been
the obvious policy of the succeeding administrations to assert and
defend against other powers the exclusive commercial rights of
the United States and to fortify the maintenance of the existing
Hawaiian Government through the direct support of the United States
so long as that Government shall prove able to protect our paramount
rights and interests.
"On December 1, 1881, Mr. Blaine, in an instruction to the American
minister at Honolulu, wrote:
"'It (this Government) firmly believes that the position of the
Hawaiian Islands, as the key to the dominion of the American'Pacific,
demands their benevolent neutrality, to which end it will earnestly
cooperate with the native Government. And if through any cause the
maintenance of such a position of benevolent neutrality should be
found by Hawaii to be impracticable, this Government would then
unhesitatingly meet the altered situation by seeking an avowedly
American solution of the grave issues presented."'
Now, a word as to the otjections to annexation and I will close. I
know that a new line of thought has been developed among us, which
I can not better characterize than by calling it a system of national
self-abnegation.
If any policy can be shown to be for the special advantage of the
United States gentlemen holding these views oppose it.
If Hawaii is valuable to us there will be so much the more generosity
in presenting it to England.
If our business has been more prosperous, and our labor better paid
than elsewhere, they think this is not fair to the rest of the world, and
advocate a reduction of the tariff to equalize conditions.
I do not address myself to gentlemen holding such views, as I can
not understand their position nor they mine.
From my own standpoint I have heard only one objection to the
policy of annexation that seemed to me to have substantial weight. It
is that the population of the Sandwich Islands are in great part unfit
for American citizenship. This may be true, but in that case we can
annex it as a part of one of our present States, or maintain a territorial government until they are fitted, as we are doing in the case of
Alaska, and as we have done heretofore with other afnexations.
The fear of annexing these small islands, which we so much need,
on grounds of oppositionto territorial expansions seems peculiar, almost
absurd, in a country more than three-quarters of whose territory comes
from annexations by purchase or otherwise.
Square miles.
In 1783 our territory amounted to......................................  827, 844
The Louisiana purchase  added........................................   1,179, 931
Florida  added..........  ^.............................................  59, 268
Texas added........................ -...................  376, 133
The Mexican  cession, California, etc...................................  545,783
The Gadsden  purchase............................................  45,535
The Alaska purchase...................................................  577, 390
Making a total of.3............6.........      3,603,884
ee,e




102                  HAWAIAN ISLANDS.
After assimilating all this territory we ought not to be afraid of
6,000 square miles more.
To summarize: These islands will not only be valuable to us, but
their possession is a commercial and naval necessity. They are offered
to us by both of the parties who claim to be entitled to their control.
If we do not accept, their incorporation by one of the European powers
is likely, and they will be a menace to our Pacific coast from that time
forward.
As Americans, actuated by the desire to advance our country'sinterests, we shall never have a greater opportunity than the present one,
and I sincerely hope we shall take advantage of it.
XV. ALSO THE FOLLOWING EXTRACT FROM AN ARTICLE, PUBLISHED IN HARPER'S MAGAZINE FOR SEPTEMBER, 1883, PREPARED
BY MR. MARSHALL, A SPECIAL ENVOY OF KAMEHAMEHA III TO
THE UNITED STATES AND ENGLAND, TO ARRANGE FOR THE REVOCATION OF THE ACTS OF LORD GEORGE PAULET IN OCCUPYING
HAWAII AS TERRITORY OF GREAT BRITAIN.
AN UNPUBLISHED CHAPTER OF HAWAIIAN HISTORY.
"From 1838 till 1843 the Hawaiian Islands were a bone of contention. Intrigues were constantly set on foot by agents and subjects of
France and England, having for their object the subversion of the
native Government and the seizure of the islands. In 1839 the French
compelled the King, Kamehameha III, to comply With certain unwarrantable demands, and as a security for future good behavior to deposit
$20,000. It was thought that the demand was made in expectation
that the King would be unable to comply, and that thus the French
would have an excuse to seize the groups. The American merchants
came forward and raised the sum, and the peril was for a time averted.
"But the plots continued, and in 1842 the British consul, Richard
Charleton, a coarse and illiterate man, incited by an ambitious adventurer, one Alexander Simpson, endeavored to involve the native Government in difficulties that would result in hoisting the British flag over
the group. In the same year Sir George Simpson, governor of the
Hudson Bay Company's territories, visited the islands. An English
gentleman of liberal views, he would not lend himself to the intrigues
of his countrymen, albeit one of them was his nephew, and by his advice
the King, harassed on all sides, decided to send commissioners to the
United States, England. and France to try to obtain, if possible, a definite acknowledgment of his Kingdom and sovereignty.
" To this important embassy were appointed Rev. William Richards,
formerly one of the American missionaries, but who had been for some
time acting as adviser to the King, and Haalileo, a native chief. They
quietly embarked irt a small schooner for Mazatlan, and crossed Mexico to Vera Cruz. As soon as it was known that they had left the
islands on this mission the British consul, Charleton, also secretly
embarked for London, via Mexico, to lay his complaints before the
British Government, leaving Simpson as deputy to carry out theirjdint
designs, whom, however, the Hawaiian Government declined to
recognize.
"On the Mexican coast Charleton fell in with Lord George Paulet,
commanding Her British Majesty's frigate, the Carysfort, and made his
lordship, as his course afterward showed, a convert to his schemes,
and, by his formal and plausable complaints against the King, induced?,  *~.;  ** * >




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


103


Raer-Admiral Thomas, commanding the British sqteadron on that station, to order the Carysfort to Honolulu for the purpose of investigating
the alleged grievances.
"On his arrival Lord Paulet, a hot-headed young nobleman, readily
lent himself to the designs of Simpson, without inquiring into the
merits of the case, dazzled by the idea of so early in his career making
a brilliant stroke for his country, and extending her drumbleat round
the world by one more station. Making outrageous demands upon the
King, at the cannon's mouth, compliance with which he knew would be
impossible, he required, as an alternative, the immediate cession of the
Kingdom to England, or he would open fire upon the city and declare
war in the name of Great Britain.
"In this terrible crisis the proclamation issued by this native King
to his.people is so touching and so king-like that I will quote it here:
"' 'Where are you, chiefs, people, and commons from my ancestors,
and people from foreign lands?
" ' Hear ye! I make known to you that I am in perplexity by reason
of difficulties into which I have been brought without cause, therefore
I have given away the life of our land. Hear ye! but my rule over
you, my people, and your privileges will continue, for I have hope
that the life of the land will be-restored when my conduct is justified.
" ' Done at Honolulu, Oahu, this 25th day of February, 1843.
' KA.MEHAMEi HA III.
"' KEKAULUOHI.2
' Lord Paulet took formal possession of the islands, installing himself
as governor of Her Majesty's new dominion, destroyed every Hawaiian
flag he could get hold of, and placed an embargo on every native vessel,
so that no one could go out and carry the news.
" An American man-of-war, the Boston, Capt. Long, had come in a
few days before the cession. Capt. Quackenbush, late of Norfolk, Va.,
was then a midshipman on board of her. The Americans were very
indignant. They had their guns double-shotted in hopes of an opportunity to interfere, but, being on a cruise, could not go out of their way
to carry the news, and could only remain neutral.
"Lord Paulet would thus have cruelly prevented the King from
communicating with his ambassadors, who were abroad successfully
working for the acknowledgment of his independence, hoping to commit the home Government to an acceptance of this 'voluntary ' cession
at the cannon's mouth before the other side of the story could be presented to it. His young lordship and Simpson chuckled over the success of the stroke by which they had, as they supposed, closed every
avenue of egress for Hawaiian vessels, and secured the arrival of their
own dispatches in England in advance of every other version of the
story. Yankee shrewdness was, however, too much for his lordship's
plans.
" It happened that the King had chartered his own yacht, Hoikaika
(Swift Runner), previously to the cession, to an American house for a
voyage to Mazatland and back. Lord Paulet, anxious to get possession of the only creditable craft at the islands, in order to send Simpson as his bearer of dispatches to England by the speediest way, and
being prevented, by its charter, from seizing the vessel without the consent of the American house, offered, in case they would relinquish
their charter, to allow them to send an agent on the ship to attend to
their business on the coast, and to bring down any freight on the
return trip, thereby saving them the whole expense of the charter.




104                  HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. -
"It must be remembered that in those days communication between
the islands of the Pacific and the coast was very infrequent, depending
on merchant ships that came from Boston twice a year, except for
occasional chance vessels.
"Lord Paulet rightly conjectured that the Yankee merchants would
jump at the offer to have all their business transacted at his expense,
but he little dreamed of all the use that might be made of the opportunity he was giving them.
"The officers of the Boston, who would have been glad of an excuse
for a forcible interference with his lordship's plans, not being allowed
that pleasure, consoled themselves by giving a ball on board, to which
the officers of the Carysfort were not invited.
"I was then a young merchant in Honolulu, and attended the ball
with many other of the American residents. At its height I was
quietly invited into the cabin of the Boston, where I found Capt. Long,
Dr. Judd, previously a prominent American missionary, then acting as
the King's minister, and other influential citizens and warm friends of
'the King. Here I was told of the King's desire to send an envoy to
England to present his protest against Lord Paulet's act of violence,
and his answer to the charges against him, and to demand the restitution of his sovereignty. I was informed also of the opportunity offered
to the firm of Ladd & Co. of sending a messenger to the coast in the
yacht.
" Ladd & Co., who were warm friends of the island Government, had
proposed that the King should send a secret ambassador, in the
character of their commercial agent, thus turning Lord Poulet's master.
stroke against himself in the neatest possible way.
' I was asked if I would go in this double capacity of ostensible super.
cargo and actual minister plenipotentiary.
"Mr. Charles Brewer, who was one of the council, a noble-hearted
man, with whom I was about associating myself in business-now
enjoying a green old age in Boston-not only gave consent to my
going, but agreed to advance for the King the necessary funds, and
take his pay in fire-wood, all of the King's other revenues having been
cut off.
" I readily accepted the commission. No time was.to be lost. Lord
Poulet had rechristened the Haikaika as 'Her Majesty's tender Albert,'
and was fitting her out with all possible dispatch.
" The King and his premier, a princess almost equal in rank, without
whose signature none of his acts was valid, had left the island of Oahu
immediately upon the cession, and in sullen dignity of despair buried
themselves among the mountains of the adjacent island of Maui, leaving
Dr. Judd, his minister, to represent and protect his interests-a man
of indomitable courage, unusual ability, and unflinching devotion to
his sovereign.
" Those happy isles in that day did not boast a lawyer. My credentials were copied verbatim, except necessary variations, from the old
Blue Book containing the credentials of John Adams as the first American minister to England. Mine were a commission as envoy extraordinary and minister plentipotentiary to the court of St. James from the
native King of the Hawaiian Islands," the title Kamehameha was
allowed by Lord Paulet to retain, with some half dozen other blank
commissions signed by the King and premier, to be filled out by myself
for other countries as occasion might.require. These were rendered
necessary by the unc rtainty of my finding the King's other ambassa



HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


105


dors, Haalileo and Richards, with whom, in case I did find them, I
was to associate myself.
" The papers were drawn up by Dr. Judd and a confidential clerk at
midnight, in the royal tomb in Honolulu, with a king's coffin for a table.
So secret was it necessary to keep the transaction that even this clerk
was not trusted with the name of the ambassador, which was left to be
inserted by myself after I had sailed. The papers prepared, a canoe
with picked crew of Kanakas was dispatched from a distant point of
the island to summon His Majesty and his suite to a midnight council.
Crossing the boisterous channel in this frail conveyance, they landed at
midnight on the shores of Waikiki, a suburb of Honolulu, and in its
cocoanut grove my credentials received the signature and seal of the
king and his Kuhina-nui —" great minister "-Kekauluohi, the " Bigmouthed Queen." Then the King and his attendants returned to their
mountains without Lord Paulet having a suspicion that they had ever
left them.
"The American consul at Honolulu took advantage of the opportunity also to make me the bearer of his dispatches to Washington,
with details of the cession, which would, of course, have momentous
interest to the American Government, and the protest of the American residents against the act of Lord Paulet."
XVI. ALSO THE FOLLOWING EXTRACTS FROM THE HISTORY OF THE
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS, BY JAMES JACKSON JARVES, PUBLISHED IN
1846.
"The chiefs, fully sensible of their political wants, sent, by Mr. Richards, in 1836, to the United States to procure a suitable person to fill
the situation of legal adviser and teacher in the new policy circumstances were forcing upon them. In this way they were backed by
the opinion of the mission, who, desirous of preserving themselves
from the responsibility, would gladly have seen it in able and disinterested hands. The wants of the chiefs were fully appreciated by the
American board, but nothing was effected. Individuals of talent, by
the time they have acquired the experience suitable for such a post,
which in its real effect would have been equivalent to the supreme
direction of public affairs, generally have fixed themselves in permanent
relations at home.
" With all the modern favor in the cause of missions, and the very
many excellent discourses yearly uttered from pulpits, we rarely see
entire disinterestedness manifested in the middle-aged-those who have
known the world and tasted its goods, however prepared they may be
by those very qualifications for the posts they so industriously urge
upon others. The path of novelty, enterprise, and benevolence is rarely
filled by any except the young and enthusiastic. That the chiefs, relying on the philanthropy of any experienced public man to have complied with their request, should have failed is what might reasonably
have been anticipated. A young man, ambitious of the influence if
not of the actual power of a Peter the Great or an Alfred, on a petty
scale, might readily have been found, but the chiefs were suspicious of
youth. Desiring age and experience, they should have offered a salary
equivalent to some of the highest posts in the United States. On such
a contingency few objections, would have been found unanswerable.
The path of duty would have been opened to many blind to all other
considerations. This is human nature, as we see it in the pulpit and
on the bench. In every position it requires its motive power.
"It is said that the honorable Theo. L. Frelingshuysen was invited




106


HAWAAIAN ISLANDS.


to become the adviser of the chiefs, but declined. At all events, Mr.
Richards was wholly unsuccessful. On his return, the position of the
chiefs being none the less embarrassing, compelled them to apply to the
mission for aid. Without any definite action of their body, they commenced that system which by the natural course of events has led to
the direct employment of several of their number-having first been
disconnected from their ranks-in the service of the Government. PForeigners were required in public affairs. The chiefs chose those on whom
they could most rely, and whatever may have been their errors of judgment, the result has shown that they were not mistaken in relying upon
their zeal and fidelity: and it may be well be doubted whether, at that
time, the Kingdom furnished men more suitable, from knowledge and
experience with the people and foreigners to administer to its wants.
The history of the policy they adopted will be traced to the period of
its present development.
" The mission and their seceders were united in their views to build
up a nation of Hawaiians distinct from all foreign influence. The following resolutions, taken from the missionary minutes for 1838, show
the just views entertained at this date:
' '1st Resolved, That though the system of government in the Sandwich Islands has, since the commencement of the reign of Liholiho,
been greatly improved through the influence of Christianity, and the
introduction of written and printed laws and the salutary agency of
Christian chiefs has proved a great blessing to the people; still, the
system is so very imperfect for t-e management of the affairs of a civilized and virtuous nation as to render it of great importance that correct views of the rights and duties of rulers and subjects, and of the
principles of jurisprudence and political economy, should be held up
before the King and the members of the national council.
"'2d Resolred, That it is the duty of the missionaries to teach the
doctrine that rulers should be just, ruling in the fear of God, seeking
the best good of their nation, demanding no more of subjects, as such,
than the various ends of the Government may justly require; and if
church members among them violate the commands of God they
should be admonished with the same faithfulness and tenderness in
their dependents.
"'3rd Resolved, That rulers in power are so by the province of God,
and in an important sense by the will or consent of the people, and
ought not to resign or shrink from the cares and responsibilities of
their offices; therefore, teachers of religion ought carefully to guard
the subjects against contempt for the authority of their rulers, or any
evasion or resistance of government orders, unless they plainly set at
defiance the commands of God.
" '4th Resolved, That the resources of the nation are at is own disposal
for its defense, improvement, and perfection, and subjects ought to be
taught to feel that a portion of their time and services, their property
or earnings, may rightfully be required by the sovereign or national
council for the support of government in all its branches and departments, and that it is a Christian duty to render honor, obedience, fear,
custom, and tribute to whom they are due, as taught in the 13th of
Romans, and that the sin of disloyalty, which tends to confusion, anarchy, and ruin, deserves reproof as really and as promptly as that of
injustice on the part of rulers or any other violation of the commands
of God.'
"'5th Resolved, That rulers should be allowed to do what they will
with their own, or with what they have a right to demand; we ought




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


107


to encourage the security of the right of subjects also to do what they
will with their own, provided they render to Caesar his due.'
" 6th Resolved, That rulers ought to be prompted to direct 'their
efforts to the promotion of general intelligence and virtue as a grand
means of removing the existing evils of the system, gradually defining
and limiting by equitable laws the rights and duties of all classes.
that thus by improving rather than revolutionizing the Government,
its administration may become abundantly salutary, and the hereditary rulers receive no detriment but corresponding advantage.'
"' 7th Resolved, That to remove the improvidence and imbecility of the
people, and promote the industry, wealth, and happiness of the nation,
it is the duty of the mission to urge mainly the motives of loyalty,
patriotism, social kindness, and general benevolence; but, while on
the one hand he should not condemn their artificial wants, ancient or
modern, because they depend on fancy, or a taste not refined, he
should, on the other, endeavor to encourage and multiply such as
will enlist their energies, call forth ingenuity, enterprise, and patient
industry, and give scope for enlarged plans of profitable exertion,
which, if well directed, would clothe the population in beautiful cottons, fine linen, and silk, and their arable fields with rich and various
productions suited to the climate; would adorn the land with numerous comfortable, substantial habitations, made pleasant by elegant
furniture, cabinets, and libraries; with permanent and well endowed
school houses and seminaries, large, commodious, and durable churches,
and their seas and harbors with ships owned by natives sufficient to
export to other countries annually the surplus products of their soil,
which may, at no very distant period, amount to millions.
"48th Resolved, That we deem it proper for members of this mission
to devote a portion of their time to instructing the natives into the
best method of cultivating their lands, and of raising flocks and herds,
and of turning the various products of the country to the best advantage for the maintenance of their families, the support of government
and of schools, and the institutions of the gospel and its ministers,
at home and abroad."'
"Mr. Richards entered upon his official duties by delivering to the
chiefs a course of lectures on political economy and the general science
of government. From the ideas thus derived, based upon their old
forms, a constitution was drawn up. Although greatly limiting their
power, the chiefs passed it unanimously.
"The laws of the Kingdom were carefully revised and published. In
comparison with the past the progress of the nation was now rapid.
The liberal policy of other nations, and whatever of their forms could
with propriety be here transplanted, were embodied in the new
statutes, but on a scale commensurate with the feebleness of youth of
the people. The penal code was greatly improved; primary and courts
of appeal established; the jury system adopted. Provision was made
for the more regular enforcement of debt-transmission of property,
property in trust, interest in accounts, in short sufficient was done
greatly to benefit the position of natives and foreigners. Taxation was
rendered more equal and lighter. Encouragement was proffered to
industry and to the increase of population. An enlightened public-'
school system was organized. Their laws, imperfect as they may seem
to the critical eyes of a superior civilization, were yet in advance of the
people. But wherever they were allowed to operate fairly and systematically much good was effected, and they served to prepare the way
for more important changes.




108


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


"The people were thoroughly convinced that the immunity once claimed
by chiefs for crimes of their own was at an end by n impartial trial by
jury of one of that class in 1840 for the murder of his wife. He, with
an accomplice, were both brought in guilty, and suffered the full
penalty of the law, death by hanging. The foreigners also began to
see that there was some virtue in the courts by a fine imposed upon
the English consul for riotous conduct"
"On his way to England Mr. Charlton had fallen in with Lord George
Paulet, commanding H. B. M. frigate Carysfort, and by his representations interested his lordship in his views. Simpson had also sent
dispatches to the coast of Mexico, which induced Rear-Admiral Thomas
to order the Carysfort to Honolulu for the purpose of inquiring into
the matter. She arrived on the 10th of February, 1843, before the sale of
Charlton's property had taken place. Simpson immediately went on
board to concert measures with Lord George, who, from his entire acquiescence in his plans, appears to have been wholly won over at this interview to sustain them. The authorities on shore suspected there was
no friendly feeling from the withholding the usual salutes. Mr. Judd,
onr behalf of the Government, made an official call on board, but was
informed he could not be received. Visits from the French and United
States consuls were similarly declined. Capt. Paulet addressed the
governor, informing him that he wished to confer with the King, who
was then absent.
"The King arrived from Maui on the 16th, and on the next day
received the following letter and demands from Lord George Paulet:
" 'H. B. M.'s SHIP CAREYSFOBT,
" ' Oahu, 17th February, 1843.
"'SIR: In answer to your letter of this day's date, which I have too
good an opinion of Your Majesty to allow me to believe ever emanated
from yourself, but from your ill-advisers, I have to state that I shall
hold no communication whatever with Dr. G. P. Judd, who, it las
been satisfactorily proved to me, has been the Punic mover in the
unlawful proceedings of your Government against British subjects.
"' As you have refused me a personal interview I inclose you the
demands which I consider it my duty to make upon your Government,
with which I demand a compliance at or before 4 o'clock p. m. to-morrow, Saturday; otherwise I shall be obliged to take immediate coercive
steps to obtain these measures for my countrymen.
" ' I have the honor to be, your Majesty's most obedient, humble servant,
"'GEORGE PAULET,
" 'Captain.
"'His Majesty KAMEHAMEHA III.
" Demands made by the Right Honorable Lord George Paulet, captain,
royal navy, commanding H. B. M's. ship Carysfort, upon the King of
the Sandwich Islands.
" First. The immediate removal, by public advertisement,written in
the native and English languages, and signed by the governor of this
island and F. W. Thompson, of the attachment placed upon Mr. Charlton's property; the restoration of the land taken by Government for
its own use, and really appertaining to Mr. Charlton; and reparation
or the hea —y loss to which Mr. Charlton's representatives have been




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS                    109
exposed by the oppressive and unjust proceedings of the Sandwich
Islands Government.
"' Second. The immediate acknowledgment of the right of Mr. Simpson to perform the functions delegated to him by Mr. Charlton, namely,
those of Her Britannic Majesty's acting consul, until Her Majesty's.
pleasure be known upon the reasonableness of your objections to him.
The acknowledgment of that right and the reparation for the insult
offered to Her Majesty, through her acting representative, to be made
by a public reception of his commission and the saluting the British
flag with twenty-one guns, which number will be returned by Her
Britannic Majesty's ship under my command.
' Third. A guaranty that no British subject shall in future be subjected to imprisonment in fetters, unless he is accused of a crime which,
by the laws of England, would be considered felony.
" Fourth. The compliance with a written promise given by King
Kamehameha to Capt. Jones, of Her Britannic Majesty's ship Curocoa,
that a new and fair trial would be granted in a case brought by Henry
Skinner, which promise has been evaded.
"' Fifth. The immediate adoption of firm steps to arrange the matters
in dispute between British subjects and natives of the country, or
others residing here, by referring these cases to juries, one-half of whom
shall be British subjects, approved by the consul, and all of whom
shall declare on oath their freedom from prejudgment upon or interest
in the cases brought before them.
"' Sixth. A direct communication between His Majesty, Kamehameha,
and Her Britannic Majesty's acting consul for the imlmediate settlement
of all cases of grievances and complaint on the part of British subjects
against the Sandwich Island Government.
"'Dated on board Her Britlannic Majesty's ship Carysfort, at Oahu,
this 17th day of February, 1843.
" GEORGE PAULET,
" ' Captain.'
"Capt. Long, of the U. S. S. Boston, then in port, was informed, by
letter, at midnight, of the anticipated attack of the British commander.
In the morning the Carysfort was cleared for action, springs put on her
cables, and her battery brought to bear upon the town. The English
families embarked for security on board a brig in the outer roads.
The Americans and other foreigners, having but short notice, placed
their funds and papers on board the Boston and other vessels, intending
to retreat to them with their families in case of actual hostilities. The
town was in a state of great excitement. The dispositions of the chiefs
were uncertain, and it was feared that the rabble, taking advantage of
the confusion, might pillage the place. Excited by the gross injustice
of the demands, the first impulse of the King and his council, in which
they were sustained by the indignant feeling of the entire foreign population excepting the few who sided with Simpson, were for energetic
measures. Arms were procured and bodies of men began to assemble.
" The common natives, unconscious of the fatal effects of disciplined
gunnery, ardently desired to fight the ship. Some supposed they
might overpower her crew by numbers in boarding. But peaceful councils at last prevailed. It is in such emergencies that the real influence
of the missionaries becomes apparent. The natural desire of chiefs
and foreigners was to resist at all hazards; but the entire indoctrination of the mission, aninated by the peaceful principles of the gospel,
bad been of that nature that depends more upon the sword of the




110


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


spirit than the arm of flesh. Desirous of avoiding the unhappy
consequences of strife and bloodshed, and relying, through providence,
on the justice of the nation's cause, and the magnanimity of the Queen
of Great Britain, they counseled peace. Shortly before the hour of
commencing hostilities had arrived, the King dispatched a letter to
the Carysport, informing Lord George Paulet that he yielded to his
demands, under protest, and had appointed Sir George Simpson and(
William Richards as his commissioners to the court of Great Britain
to settle the pending difficulties.
"His Majesty appointed February 20 at 11 o'clock a. m., to receive
Lord George and the vice-consul. On the same day that the King
notified Lord of his acquiescence to his demands, in conjunction with
the premier he protested against his acts in these words:
"'We, Kamehameha III, King of all -the Sandwich Islands, and
Kekauluohi, premier thereof, in accordance with the laws of nations
and the rights of all aggrieved sovereigns and individuals, do hereby
enter our solemn act of protest before God, the world, and before the
Government of Her Most Gracious Majesty Victoria, Queen of the
United Kingdoms of Great Britain and Ireland:
" 'Against the Right Hon. Lord George Paulet, captain of Her British
Majesty's ship Carysfort, now lying in the harbor of Honolulu, for all
losses and damages which may accrue to us and to the citizens of other
countries residing under our dominion and sovereignty, in consequence.
of the unjust demands made upon us this day by the said Right Hon.
Lord George Paulet, enforced by a threat of coercive measures and an
attack upon our town of Honolulu in case of noncompliance with the
same within a period of nineteen hours, thereby interfering with our
laws, endangering the good order of society, and requiring of us what
no power has a right to exact of another with whom they are on terms
of peace and amity.
"'And we do solemnly protest and declare that we, the sovereign
authority of these islands, are injured, grieved, abused, and damaged
by this act of the said Right Hon. Lord George Paulet, and we hereby
enter our solemn appeal unto the Government of Her Most Gracious
Majesty, represented by him, for redress, for justification, and for repayment of all said losses, damages, and payments which may in consequence accrue unto us, or unto the citizens of other countries living
under our jurisdiction.'
"'On the 20th the King and premier visited the Carysfoot and were
received with royal honors. This courtesy, however, was but a prelude
to a further series of demands rendered necessary to accomplish Simpson's aim, by the unexpected compliance of the King with the first.
These were brought forward at an interview on the following day. The
total amount demanded in money was $117,330.89. The character of
these claims, and the object of the parties, may be gathered from a
brief notice of the first brought forward. This was in favor of a Mr.
Skinner, a connection of Mr. Charlton's. Indemnification to the
amount of $3,000 was demanded for him on the alleged ground of having lost the interest and profits on $10,000 unemployed for four months,
which he had reserved to purchase the property of Mr. Charlton, if
sold on execution. The arrival of the Carysfoot had stopped the sale,
and he had lost the opportunity of thus employing his funds.' (pp.
161, 162, and 163.)
"'24th.-A meeting having been arranged for 10 o'clock a. m., the
King requested me to visit Lord George and say to him that he could
bear this course no longer; he would give up and let them do as they




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                  11l
pleied, etc. I accordingly met Lord George and Simpson in the
street, coming to the meeting; said I had a message from the King,
that he was sick. I went with them to the consular office, where I was
left alone with Simpson. I said, the King feels himself oppressed,
broken down, ruined, and, to use his own expression, a dead man; that
he had been up all night and was sick; that he had determined to give
up; that if he, Simpson, persisted in his present course ruin would
follow; that the King could not undo by his owp act the action of the
courts and enforce these claims without time to modify the laws. I
begged him to desist and give time to modify the laws and act with
consistency. He would allow juries to be composed of half English in
case their interests were concerned.
"' The Dominis case had been disposed of according to the King's
written promise to Capt. Jones. Moreover, since that time, the
parties had settled by amicable arbitration. That to require all the
late decisions of the legally organized courts to be set aside by the act
of the King would be illegal and oppressive on the part of Mr. Simpson, and decidedly oppressive on the part of the King, and would
justly involve him both with Americans and French, etc. Simpson replied that the English had been treated harshly, and consequently the Government must suffer. His course could not be altered.
"'Went with Lord George and Simpson to the council; acted as
spokesman. Reiterated the above, and added the King was determined
to hold out no longer; do what you. like, take the islands, but do not
force him to acts of injustice; it would be cruel in the extreme, better
take all. Lord George replied that his demands were not unjust; he
acted on the best information and testimony. I said, I know that you
think so but I assure you that such is not the opinion of the Government. The King remarked that he did not think that his Govefnment
had done wrong. I said, we must be heard; your information is incorrect; we appeal to Great Britain; take the islands, we will yet have
justice. Lord George replied that he did not come to take the islands.
I said, you had better do it than pursue these subjects further in this
manner. He or Simpson said that they could only act on a request of
the King, and it must be in writing. Said I, let all proceedings be
stopped; let the Government have time to reflect, and I think they will
come to the conclusion that it is better for you to take the Government
of the islands than to go any further. But we must have time; you
drive the King to distraction, and I fear that he will cede the islands
to France, as he has been invited to do. Simpson said he would not
allow much delay. Lord George said, two or three days andlo more.
Simpson said, to-morrow noon, and if it was not done, he should expect
the Dominis case to be tried on Saturday. I observed that the time
was too short; Monday then at the furthest. We went into certain
explanations as to manner of doing the thing, and I wrote down in
pencil the following:
" 'In consequence of the difficulties in which the Sandwich Islands
are involved, and the impossibility of complying with the demands made
by Her Britannic Majesty's representative in the form in which they
are presented, we cede Ithe Government of] our islands to Lord George
Palilet, etc., for the time being, subject to any arrangements that
may have been entered into with the Government of Great Britain, and
until intelligence shall have been received, and in case no arrangement
shall have been made previous to date, subject to the decision of Her
Majesty's Government on conference with the ministers of the Sandwich Islands Government, after a full report of our affairs shall have




112                  a&WAIIu  ISLANDS.
been represented to Great Britain; and in case the ministers are
rejected by Her Britannic Majesty, then subject to any arrangements
which may be entered into.
"' Simpson took the paper and walked in the veranda with Lord
George, and, returning, said that would do; he would make a copy with
very few verbal alterations.
"'It was arranged that the chiefs should have an opportunity to
consider these things, and an answer to be given to-morrow noon. Lord
George and Simpson left. King and Auhea sat with astonishment and
misery. Discussed awhile in council, when I left them in order to take
some refreshment. When I returned I found them anxious to gain
further information. The subject of ceding to France and the United
States was a ray of hope which seemed to gleam across their dark path,
but they foresaw that under such circumstances they would still have
this fury-Simpson-to deal with until the French took possession,
and he would doubtless involve them in more trouble, and their cause
become too bad to admit of justification. France is still acting a hostile part towards them. Charlton and Simpson are tleir enemies, but
'England is their friend.
"'To England they look up with the most filial affections. France
is picking a quarrel with them now, and complaints are now in existence
which will make more trouble. If the claims of Simpson are allowed
the laws will suffer and the nation be weakened so much that France
will leave them nothing. England can defend them from France, and
to cede to France would be to say England had no right here, which is
to the Government more than doubtful, reckoning right as the nations
do. This might be considered an act of treachery.
' 'May be that their independence is secured already. If so, a forcible
possession on the part pf either would annul it. A cession would not
if made with provisos.
"In the evening I went for Lord George, who, together with Simpson
and Dr. Rooke, came. Regulated a few points respecting the course he
should pursue in case he took possession. Informed them thatwe should
take every possible step to justify the Government and get back the
islands, and he demanded a pledge that such exertions be not considered
an act of hostility to them.
"'It was agreed that a decision should be made by 12 o'clock on the
25th. Lord George went away. Every possible view of the case was
taken up by the council, and the result seemed to be to give up the islands
on the terms proposed.
"'25th.-The King sent for me before breakfast. Wished to know
what I thought of the old proposition of ceding to France and the
United States.- I said I feared it would involve the Government in
great trouble. The French admiral would soon be here and take possession, which would excite hostility between Catholics and Protestants; meanwhile Simpson would continue his course of conduct, and
the difficulties would become inextricable. Give yourself into the arms
of Great Britain, trust to the generosity of that great and good nation,
you may have the benefit of the intervention of France for the adjustment of difficulties and the security of your independence. Let them
take possession, and then you can represent your case in full. Lord
George called. I informed him that the matter was nearly decided.
One of the propositions that came from me was waived, viz, that a
commission be appointed to adjust the claims of British subjects.
" 'Dudoit called and many others. Every argument used to induce
the King to cede to France and the United States. Sat down to put




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


113


the documents into form. The King proposed to make a speech. I
said they could make that out among themselves, which they did.
Deed of cession being ready, the chiefs came in and it was read. Sorrow
and distress marked every countenance. I was asked to pray. During
prayer sighs suppressed were often heard. I committed the case to
God, imploring His blessing on the step about to be taken as the only
peaceful alternative for the nation, etc. When I rose not an individual
left his kneesfor a full minute, and then I saw that tears had cometo their
relief. They sat in silence for a moment when the King arose, and with
a firm step seized a pen and subscribed his name. " Let it go," said he,
"if I get help I get it, if not, let it go; I can do no more." The premier
then added her signature.' (Extract from a journal kept by Mr. Judd,
who was minister of the King to conduct negotiations with Lord George
Paulet, pp. 164, 165, and 166.)
"Having decided upon a provisional cession of his dominions to Great
Britain, the King announced the event to his subjects in a touching
proclamation:
" 'Where are you, chiefs, people, and commons from my ancestorsr and
people from foreign lands?
"' Hear ye! I make known to yoe that I am in perplexity by reason
of difficulties into which I have been brought without- cause; therefore, I have given away the life of our land, hear ye! But my rule
over you, my people, and your privileges, will continue, for I have hope
that the life of the land will be restored when my conduct is justified.
' Done at Honolulu, Oahu, this 25th day of February, 1843.
' ]AMEHAMEHA III.
"KEKAULUOKI.'
" On the 28th of November, the Hawaiian commissioners obtained
from the governments of France and England a joint declaration to
the effect that"' Her Majesty the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain
and Ireland, and His Majesty the King of the French, taking into consideration the existence in the Sandwich Islands of a government capable of providing for the regularity of its relations with foreign nations,
have thought it right to engage reciprocally to consider the Sandwich
Islands as an independent state, and never to take possession, neither
directly nor under the title of protectorate, nor under any other form,
of any part of the territory of which they are composed.
"'The undersigned, Her Majesty's principal secretary of state for foreign affairs, and the ambassador extraordinary of His Majesty the
King of the French at the court of London, being furnished with the
necessary powers, hereby declare in consequence that their said majesties take reciprocally that engagement.
"' In witness whereof the undersigned have signed the present declaration, and have affixed thereto the seal of their arms.
"'Done in duplicate, at London, the 28th day of November, in the
year of our Lord 1843.
'AABERDEEN.    [L. S.]
'ST. AULAIRE. [L. S.
" This solemn engagement on the part of these two powers was the final
act by which the Kintgdom'of Hawaii was admitted within the pale of
civilized nations."
l No measure tends more to consolidate and render a nation prosper-;S. Rep. 227 —8




114


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


ous and respectable than a sound and judicious code of laws. The
chiefs were early aware of their deficiency, and as soon as their new
legislative forms came into operation proposed to execute the task;
unner any circumstances a difficult one; but in those of their Kingdom
doubly so from the mixed population, foreign and native, that they
were called to govern. The first volume of statute laws was issued in
1846.
"The departments are subdivided into numerous bureaus, comprising the duties enumerated under their several heads. By this system
the business of government and its machinery have become methodized
on a simple and not expensive scale, for although the subdivisions are
numerous, yet one clerk suffices for many. The judiciary act and the
criminal code, on the new basis, are not yet completed. As in every
other step forward which the Hawaiian nation has taken, unwarrantable abuse and unreasonable cavil have been showered upon it for
this, chiefly upon the specious pretense that the system was too cumbersome and altogether beyond its growth. An impartial examination
will doubtless detect points which can be amended with benefit; this
is to be expected, and the intention of the Legislature is rather experimentative than final, to feel their way as it were to a code simple and
effective. But to do this experience must be acquired in legislation
and the practical operation of laws. In the transition of the nation,
with its rapid growth from foreign sources, it has been found that there
has been felt a want rather than an overplus of system. The machinery
of government, being of a liberal and constitutional character, provides
in itself for checks on excess and remedies for evils. *If 'let alone' by
foreign powers, there is ground for the belief that Hawaiian legislation
will in no whit in character be behind that of numerous new countries,
offshoots of the old, now budding into existence on the shores of the
Pacific.
"The executive government was constructed as follows:
"'His Majesty King Kamehameha III.
"'Cabinet council created October 29, 1845.-His highness, Keoni
Ana,* premier and minister of the interior; R. C. Wyllie, minister foreign affairs; G. P. Judd, minister of finance; William Richards, minister of instruction; John Ricord, attorney-general.
" 'Nobles.-M. Kehauonohi; A. Keliiahonui, chamberlain; Keoni Ana,
premier; Alapai; A. Paki, judge of supreme court; Konia; I. Kaeo,
judge of supreme court; Iona, judge of supreme court; Paulo Kanoa;
Namauu; M. Kekuanaoa, governor of Oahu; W. P. Leleiohoku, governor of Hawaii; Ruta; Keohokalole; C. Kanaina, judge of supreme
court; Ioane Ii, guardian of young chiefs; Iona Piikoi; Beniki Namakeha; K. Kapaakea; James Young Kanehoa, t governor of Maui.'
"The governers are honorary members of the privy council.
"Besides the 4 cabinet officers of foreign birth, there are 5 Americans
and 4 Englishmen, naturalized subjects, commissioned as judges in
foreign cases, collectors, director of Government press, heads of bureaus,
etc. In addition to these are a number of clerks transiently employed,
and officers connected with the several departments, who depend upon
fees for their recompense.
"In no one respect have the Government shown more laudable zeal
than in educating the young chiefs, who, by birth, are destined to fill
importantposts. For the purpose of bestowing upon them a solid and
* Son of Mr. Young, Kamehameha's favorite.
f Son of Kamehameha's favorite, Mr. Young, of the Elenora, who landed in 1790
and died in 1835 at the advanced age of 93 years, highly respected by all classes.




HAWAHAN ISLANDS.


115


practical education in the English language, embracing not only the
usual studies pursued in the better class of seminaries in the United
States, but to engraft in their minds the habits, thoughts, moral and
domestic education which children of their age and circumlstances
receive in civilized countries, in 1839 they were taken from their native
parents and out of the sphere of mere Hawaiian influences and incorporated into a boarding school, under the charge of Mr. and Mrs.
Cooke, teachers of the American mission. During the seven years the
school has been established their progress has been rapid, and they
are now versed in the common branches of an English education, besides
being practically acquainted with the tastes, household economy, and
habits of refined domestic life. The annual expense of the school is
now about $5,000. The number of scholars 15.
"'Moses Kaikioewa, son of Kekuanaoa and Kinau, born July 20,
1829, expectant governor of Kauai.
"'Lota Kamehameha, son of Kekuanaoa and Kinau, born December
11,. 1830; expectant governor of Maui.
" 'Alexander Liholiho, son of Kehuanaoa and Kinau, born February
9, 1834, heir apparant, by adoption, of the King.
"'Victoria Kamamalu, daughter of Kehuanaoa and Kinau, born
November 1, 1838, premier by birth.
"'William C. Lunalilo, son of Kanaina and Kehauluohi, born January 1, 1835.
"' Bernice Pauahi, daughter of Paki and Konia, born December 19,
1831.
"'Jane Loeau, daughter of Kalaniulumokee and Liliha, born 1828.
"'Elizabeth Kekaliau, daughter of Laanui, born September 11, 1834.
"'Emma Rooke, daughter of Fanny Young,* born January 2, 1836.
"' Peter Young Kaeo, son of Kaeo and Lahilahi,* born March 4,1836.
"' James Kaliokalani, son of Paakea and Keohokalole, born May 29,
1835.
"'David Kalakaua, son of Paakea and Keohokalole, born November
16, 1836.
"'Lydia Makaeha, daughter of Paakea and Keohokalole, born September 2. 1838.
"'Mary Paaaina.
' Kinau Pitt, son of W. Pitt Kalaimokee.'
"The rapid progress of the Hawaiian group in commercial importance is best illustrated by their commercial statistics both before the
organization of their present Government and since, when under
improved auspices their value has more rapidly developed. The
facilities which they afforded the American vessels engaged in the
lucrative Northwest fur trade, to which was soon added the equally
profitable one of sandal wood, gave them such good repute that previous to 1820 the hardy whale fishers resorted to them for recruits and
men. As early as 1823, from 40 to 60 whale ships, mostly American,
were to be seen in the harbor of Honolulu at one time.
" From January, 1836, to December 31, 1841, 358 vessels belonging
to the United States, of which four fifths were whalers, touched at
Honolulu; an average of 713 annually, besides 17 men-of-war. Of
English vessels during the same period there were 82 and 9 men-ofwar. Those of France and other nations numbered not over 20. The
average annual imports for those years were to the value of $365,854,
one-half of which were American goods, one-quarter Chinese and Cali* Daughters of John Young.




116                  HAWAIIAN ISLANDS
fornian, and the remainder from England, Mexico, Chile, and other
sources.
"Four newspapers in the Hawaiian tongue have been sustained by
the missionaries. The first, Lama Hawaii, was commenced in 1833.
The present Ka Elele, besides much religious matter, gives a summary
of general news, publishes Government notices, and affords scope for
the literary efforts of the natives themselves, some of whom manifest
respectable powers of thought and composition.
"It is computed that 70,000 of the population have learned to read
and 65,444,000 printed pages have been issued from the mission press,
embracing, among other works, two complete editions, of 10,000 each,
of the Holy Scriptures, three of the New Testament, amounting to
30,000 copies, Worcesters Sacred Geography,.Universal Geography,
Geographical Questions, Scripture Chronology and History, Animals
of the Earth, with a chart. History of Beasts, Hawaiian History,
Church History, Mathematics, embracing Geometry, Trigonometry,
Mensuration, Surveying and Navigation, Colburn's Algebra, Anatomy,
Wayland's Moral Philosophy, Colburn's Intellectual Arithmetic, Tract
on Astronomy, Maps of Universal Geography, and Bunyan's Pilgrim's
Progress.
"The works published have been altogether of a devotional or educational class. More interest would have been awakened could some
others of a less grave and more historic character have been included."
"A moral sentiment, founded more upon a classification of certain
actions, either as evil or as good, and their attendant punishments or
rewards than upon any definite ideas of sin and virtue considered in
their relations to moral purity and the love of the Father, pervades the
nation. With the more enlightened something superior to this prevails. Consequently, as in older Christianized communities, a man
enjoys respect in proportion to his moral qualifications. Vice is condemned and virtue applauded. Many, of course, are to be found more
fond of a good name than of the means necessary for its attainment.
Publicly they are one being, privately another.
" Theveryfact of the necessity of the deception shows a great advancement in moral sentiment since the days of Liholiho, and instead of being
considered a reproach to the missionaries should be hailed as a favorable
symptom of their labors, the dawn of further improvement. In humanity, care for the sick and aged, their domestic relations, honesty, temperance, and systematic industry there has been great advancement.
From a warlike, treacherous, and cruel people they have become mild,
tractable, and desirous of knowledge. The intelligent observer will
find much in their present character to gratify him and more to surprise when he contrasts them with what they were but a score of years
since. But he who goes among them, his imagination picturing a
nation changed from brutal savages, by the spirit of God, to guileless
Christians, worshiping Jehovah in all the innocence and strength of a
first love, their family altars emblems of purity and happiness, their
congregations simple and sincere, and their dispositions and deportment refined to the high standard of Christian excellence in his own
country, will be sadly disappointed.
"It is still difficult to make the natives understand the nature of
truth. They have been so accustomed, from their earliest years, to
habits of deception, that with very many, perhaps the majority, it may
be doubted whether any other sensation arises from the detection of a
falsehood than mortification at being discovered. In no other point




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                     117
are they more obtuse, but this moral bluntness is gradually wearing
away. Licentiousness is a chief vice of the nation; not that they are
much worse in this respect than nations generally residing within the
tropics, but it continues to be their most prominent trait. A few years
ago, in its protean forms, it was common to all, and as undisguised as
the light of day. Now it hides its head, and seeks a new garment to
conceal its foul markings. The following table of crime for Oahu will
serve to show the proportion of other offenses to those of sensuality.
It is taken from the Kuma Hawaii, of January 16,1839, a native paper,
but the period embraced in the report is not given. And it should be
recollected that but a small proportion of the latter offenses are ever
detected or exposed. A number of foreigners are embraced in the list,
chiefly for riot, mutiny, and desertion.
Offenese..
Manslaughter...........................................................  4
Theft -----------------------------------—..-                48
Riot.................. 32
False  w itness..............................................  48
Desertion.................................;,,,,,,,,, 30
Mutiny. —........... ----...                                  15
Seduction......... —.....                               18
Lewdness.............................,                       81
Adultery......................................................... 246
Total........................... 522
"Another table of purely native cases for Honolulu, taken from the
records of the 'inferior court' from January 1, 1846, to December 4,
of the same year, gives the following striking result:
Offense.                 Men.   Women.   Total.
Adultery, fornication...,.     126    127      252
Theft..............................................  43  3   4i
Gambling.20,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,                35       3       38
Desecration of Sabbath............................  20  8    38
Reviling language.............,.     12       2       14
Heathenish practices................,,,,,,,,,.,. 3   1        4
Assault and battery...      7       1        8
Drunkenness........,.,,,,,,,,,,..  6      6
Furious riding....................            6......         6
Rape.,..,,,,,,,,,,.                          2.....2
Interference with police...........................  3..   3
Street walking..,,,,,,..,,,..........         4   4
Slander........, I I            1                1
Passing false coin..................,,..    1                1
Desertion of husband.................,,,.....     3        3
Total................                  275     152      427
";The above table shows a conviction of 427 cases out of a population
of about 9,000. To these should be added 121 others, tried before the
police court, making in all rather more than 600 cases for 1846. Of the
121, 38 were for licentiousness and 43 for stealing. But few occur for
fighting, the Hawaiians being a very peaceable people. A great deal
of petty thieving exists, particularly towards foreigners, to steal from
whom is not viewed so disreputable as from themselves. The standard
of morality, it will be seen, is low, particularly among the men; but




11 8                 HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
crimes are rare. There have been but five executions for three murders
for ten years.
"It is incontrovertible that there yet exists in the nation a large
body of people who are equally disposed to religious rites, or to acts of
a different character, as may be most accordant to the taste of those
whom they wish to gratify. Another generation must arise, with better homes and more civil and religious advantages, before the habits
of the old are sufficiently eradicated. While evidence for the more
favorable view of missionary labor, to a partial investigator, appears
conclusive, ample grounds for the opposite opinion exists. The truth
lies in neither extreme. The friends of humanity have just cause to
be grateful that so much has been accomplished, and should labor
earnestly that the remaining dark spots may be wholly effaced."
"The government of the Kingdom is essentially Christian. Founded
upon missionary teaching, it derives its principles and objects from
gospel ethics. Under its influence, the despotism of the chiefs over
life and property has been abolished and the nation invited to lay
hold of its rights in both. Laws favorable to virtue, industry, and
increase of population have been enacted. Families having 3 children
of their own are freed from taxation; those having more are rewarded
by gifts of lands. The natives are encouraged to secure allodial titles
by a remission of all taxes on such for twenty years. Taxation is lightened and made stimulative to honest industry. The present laws are
equitable and protective. Justice is fairly administered and the soundest principles of classical and modern law have become the professed
guides of the courts.
"Commerce has brought among the nation many foreigners, in every
way an advantage to the morals and eilterprise of the natives. Scattered throughout the group they provide them, almost at the very doors
of their huts, with ample supplies of foreign goods of all descriptions
at fair prices, receiving in return the avails of native labor. They have
furnished them with cattle and the vegetable products of other countries, and introduced the arts, trades, and professions of civilized life.
The examples and encouragements of civilized households are thus
brought to their very thresholds. They have given a value to the time
of the native by creating a demand for his labor, and have equally
bestowed a value to his hitherto unproductive lands by practically
developing the hidden wealth of the soil.
"The most indifferent industry is sure of ample reward. Vice, as in
other lands, has no apology for an existence here on the plea of a superabundance of labor in the honest branchesof livelihood. Not a man need
be a thief from necessity, nor a woman unchaste from want. Lands
everywhere lie groaning in wild luxuriance, crying out for hands to till
them. The handicraft of women, and even the services of children are
in constant demand. Commerce has raised the remuneration of the
former and the wages of the laborers to the highest rate of stimulative
reward.
"The policy of the Government is essentially protective to the
Hawaiian race, to the intent to fully solve the question of their
capability of civilization. The white advisers of the King, having
this end practically in view, fail to meet the more enlarged views and
desires of white residents, who look upon the final extermination
or loss of the native race and dynasty as their destiny, and consequently desire to see the fullest encouragement offered for the ingress
and permanent settlement of a foreign population and capital. While




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                 119
these would urge the Government on with a rapidity comieensurate
with Anglo-Saxon spirit and intelligence, the native race by their
slowness of apprehension and fears for their security in case the full
torrent of civilized emigration and enterprise is let in unrestrained
upon them, hold them back. On the one hand the Government is as
unable fully to satisfy the cravings of the whites to advance, as it
is to bring the native mind to a clear appreciation and faithful carrying out of the measures best adapted to benefit it and render it more
capable of assimilating with the superior intelligence of Anglo-Saxon
intellect. They steadily endeavor to preserve the Hawaiian race; to
christianize and civilize them; and to this end they invite a limited
cooperation of foreign aid, enough to innoculate the nation with
courage and enterprise, without deluging it in a torrent which in their
present condition they would inevitably fail to bear up against. In
this way a just middle course is adopted, which it would seem from
past experience tends to build up a mixed Hawaiian and foreign race,
civilized, moral, and industrious, and capable of taking an elevated
position in the ranks of minor nations."
XVII. ALSO THE FOLLOWING EXTRACTS FROM THE HONOLULU
DIRECTORY AND HISTORICAL SKETCH OF THE HAWAIIAN OR SANDWICH ISLANDS, BY C. C. BENNETT, INCLUDING A CHRONOLOGICAL
TABLE OF NOTABLE EVENTS CONNECTED WITH HAWAIIAN HIsTORY.
"1736. Kamehameha I born at Kokoiki, Kohala.
"1740. The King of Oahu, on the passage to Molokai, sees a ship.
" 1768. Kaahumanu born.
"1775. Kaahunanu becomes the wife of KamehamehaI.
"1779. January 17 Capt. Cook anchored in the bay of Kealakekua,
Hawaii.
"February 14 Capt. Cook was slain at Kaawaloa, Hawaii.
"1782. April, Kalaniopuu died, leaving his Kingdom  (western
Hawaii), to Kiwalao, who was his own son.
" July, the battle named Mokuahae, i. e., the fight of Kamehameha
with Kiwalaoand his party at Keomo, Hawaii, Kamehameha triumphed,
Kiwalao was slain, and Keoua became King of Kau and Puna.
"Keawemauhili reigns as King at Hilo, Hawaii.
"Keaulumoku composed the mele Haui Ka Lani, or a prophecy of
the overthrow of Hawaii by Kamehameha.
" 1790 first American ship (Eleanor, Capt. Metcalf),visited the islands.
"Keona was taken prisoner by Kamehameha at Koapapaa, Hamakua, Hawaii, and Kamehameha thus became sole King of the whole
island.
"John Young and Isaac Davis became attached to Kamehameha.
"1791. In this year the battle of Nuuanu was fought, in which
Kalanikupule, son of Kahekili, King of Maui and Oahu, was slain,
and thus Maui, Molokai, Lanai, and Oahu fell into the hands of Kame.
hameha.
"1792. March 3, Capt. Vancouver first visited the islands, and left
cattle, sheep, etc.
"The Doedalus. store ship, visited Waimea, Oahu; a massacre.
"1793. March 12, Vancouver anchored at Lahaina.
"1794. December, first discovery of Honolulu Harbor. Entered by
Jackal and Prince Leboo, American.
Kekuanaoa born.
"1795. January 12, last visit of Vancouver.
"Loedalus visits Niihau; massacre. January 1, murder of captains.
417i7. Liholiho (Kamehameha II) was born.




120


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


"1801. The fleet of canoes called Peleleu arrived at Kawaihae.
"1802. The Peleleu arrived at Lahaina.
" 1803. The Peleleu arrived at Oahu.
" 1804. The great pestilence called a ahulau okuu.
"1812. The stone wall of Kiholo was built.
"1814. March, Kauikeaouli (Kamehameha III) was born.
" 1817. The fort at Honolulu finished.
"1819. May 8, Kamehameha I died.
"October, Liholiho breaks kapu on the night of kukahi.
"1820. January, a battle on account of breaking kapu, at Kuamoo
on Hawaii.
"March 30, first missionaries arrived at Kailua.
"April 18, missionaries first arrived at Honolulu.
"July, Messrs. Whitney and Ruggles sailed for Kauai."
"First whaler (Mary, Capt. Allen) enters Honolulu Harbor.
"1821. First house of Christian worship built in Honolulu.
"'1822. January 7, printing first commenced at the islands. It is said
that King Liholiho was allowed to pull the first sheet.
"1823. April 27, the second company of missionaries arrived.
"November 27, Liholiho, his Queen, and attendants sailed for England, leaving the Kingdom in the care of Kaahumanu.
"1824, July 8, Kamamalu, wife of Libolibo, died in London.
"July 13, Libolibo died in London.
"August, Kapiolani descended into the volcano of Kilauea.
"1825, May 4, Boki and his companions return from England with
the remains of the King and Queen in the English frigate Blonde.
"1827, October, Kinau and Kekuanaoa were married.
"1828, March 30, the third company of missionaries arrived.
"July 3, first meetinghouse at Honolulu dedicated.
"December 2, Boki and his company sailed away from the islands
and were lost.
"1830, December 11, His Majesty Kamehameha V was born.
"1831, June 7, the fourth company of missionaries arrived.
"September, the high school at Lahaina was commenced.
"1832, May 17, the fifth company of missionaries arrived.
"June 5, Kaahumanu died.
"June, Kinau was appointed premier (kuhina nui).
"The Oahu Charity School was commenced.
"1833, March, Kamehameha III assumes the reins of government,
and Kinau becomes his minister (Kuhina Nui).
"May 1, the sixth company of missionaries arrived.
"The Bethel Church built at Honolulu.
"1834, February 9, Kamehameha IV (Alexander Liholiha) was born.
"February 14, first newspaper printed at the Hawaiian Islands,
called the Lama Hawaii, at Lahainaluna.
"The newspaper Kumu Hawaii commenced at Honolulu.
"1835, June 6, the seventh company of missionaries arrived.
"First Hawaiian Almanac printed.
"1836, January 2, the queen dowager, Emma, was born."The female seminary at Wailuku, Maui, commenced.
"The first weekly newspaper in English commenced.
"The high school of Mr. Lyman commenced at kilo.
"December, Nahienaena died.
"1837, February 4, Kamehameha III and Kalama were married.
"April 9, the eighth company of missionaries arrived.




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                  121
4"The business of laying,out public streets in Honolulu was commuenced.
"November 7, remarkable rise and overflow of tide throughout the
islands.
"1838, August, the chiefs commence the study of political economy
with Mr. Richards.
"November 1, Victoria Kaamamalu was born.
"April 4, Kinau died.
"1839. April 5, Kekauluohi became premier (Kuhina Nui.)
"May 10, the printing of the first edition of the Hawaiian bible
finished.
"July 9, the French man-of-war PArtemise (Capt. Laplace) arrived.
"Kaikioewa died.
"1840. The school for the young chiefs commenced at HonoluluMr. and Mrs. Cook teachers.
"January, Hoapili, governor of Naui, died.
"The stone meeting-house at Kawaiahao, Honolulu, commenced.
"August 3, Mr. Bingham and family returned to the United States.
"October 8, Kamehameha III gives the first written constitution to
the people of the Hawaiian Islands.
"October 20, Kamanawa and his servant were publicly executed for
crime.
"September. The United States exploring expedition arrived.
" 1841, May. Kapiolani died.
"May 21. The ninth company of missionaries arrived.
"The school for missionaries' children at Punahou (now Oahn College) commenced.
" 1842. January, Hoapili Wahine (Kalakaua) died.
"July 8, Haalilio sailed as commissioner to the courts of France,
England, and the United States.
"July 21, the meetinghouse at Kawaihal finished.
" September 21, the tenth company of missionaries arrived.
"1843. The United States consent to the independence of the
Hawaiian Islands.
" February 25, Lord George Paulet seized the Hawaiian Islands and!
raised the English flag.
" July 31, the sovereignty of the islands was restored by Admirall
Thomas, of the English navy.
'" September, Bartimeus Puaaiki died.
" 1844. The Government of Belgium consents to the independence of
the Hawaiian Islands.
" November 28, the governments of England and France recognize
the independence of the Hawaiian Islands.
"July 15, the eleventh company of missionaries arrived.
"Silk exported from the islands-197 pounds.
"Haalilio died on his return voyage to the islands.
"1845. April 2, representatives first chosen from the common people
undet the constitution of October, 1840.
"Mr. Richards, the interpreter of Haalilio, returned with his remains
" Kekauluohi died.
" First export of coffee-248 pounds.
"John Young (Keoni Ana) is appointed premier (kuhina nui).
"1846. February 11, commissioners appointed to settle land claims.
"March 20, Mr. Whitney died at Lahainaluna.
"'1847. Mr. Richards died.




122


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


"Governor Kuakini died.
"First appearance of Mormons at Honolulu, en route for California.
"1848. Leleiohoku (William Pitt) died.
"Moses Kaikoewa died.
"Kaiminaauao died.
"The twelfth company of missionaries arrived.
'The measles (mai puupuu ula) prevailed, and was very fatal.
"1849. The fort seized at Honolulu by Admiral Tromelin, of the
French navy.
"Beef first exported from the islands-158 barrels.
"Keliiahonui died.
"1850. James Young Kanehoa died. Kaoanaeha died.
4"1851. The Hawaiian Missionary Society was formed.
"Kekauonohi died.
"June, the court house at Honolulu built.
' First whale oil and bone transshipped.
"1852. April 2, Kaliokalani died.
"First export of fungus.
"1853. The smallpox (mai puupuu liilii) swept over the islands.
" 1854. The fort at Lahaina demolished by order of the Government.
"December 15, Kamehameha III (Kauikeaouli) died, and Kamehameha IV became King.
"1855. Paki died.
"Mr. Hitchcock, of Molokai, died.
"Flour exported-463 barrels.
"1856. June 2, Kamehameha IV was united in marriage with Emma
Rooke.
" Isaac Davis was married to Ruta Keelikolani.
"1857, the fort at Honolulu was demolished by order of the Government.
" Konia (widow of Paki) died.
"John Young (Keoni Ana), the premier, died.
"Victoria Kamamalu appointed KuhinaNui.
" May 28, William L. Lee, chief justice of the supreme court, died,
a 'ed, 36.
"David Malo, native Hawaiian historian, died.
'"Honeybees first introduced, by the R. H. Agricultural Society.
"Oahu prison built.
"1858, May 20, birth of the Prince of Hawaii.
" Rice first systematically cultivated near Honolulu.
"Sailors' Home established.
"1859, July, Rev. L. Smith's premises burnt.
" April 20, Jona Piikoi died, aged 50.
"April 26, laying of corner stone, Odd Fellows' Hall.
"January 7, dedication of Odd Fellows' Hall.
"February, eruption of volcano on Mauna Loa, running down to Wainanalii.
" The civil code published.
"Gaslight first introduced into Honolulu.
"September 9, William Pitt Kinau, son of Leleiohoku and R. Keelikolani, died at Kohala, Hawaii, aged 17.
"1860, May 5, arrival of Japanese embassy en route to the United
States.
"New custom-house built, Honolulu.
"Queen's hospital built.
"Honolulu flour mill and foundry burned.




tAWAIIAN ISLANDS.                   123
Steamer Kilauea arrived.
"Prince L. Kamehameha (Kamehameha V) sailed for California.
"September 23, Rev. Dr. R. Armstrong, minister of public instruction, died.
"Passage of the 'law to mitigate,' etc.
"1862. April, Palmyra Island, in latitude 50 50' N., longitude 1610 53'
W., taken possession of by Capt. Z. Bent, for Kamehameha IV and his
successors, and subsequently declared by royal proclamation to be a
part of the Hawaiian domain.
" August 27, death of the Prince of Hawaii, aged 4 years, 3 months
and 7 days.
"The funeral took place September 7.
"Lahainaluna Seminary burned and was rebuilt the same year.
"October 11, Reformed Catholic Church mission arrived.
"1863. November 30, His Mlajesty Kamehaneha IV died, aged 29
years, 9 months, and 21 days, and Prince Kamehameha ascended the
throne as Kamehameha V.
"1864. May 5, convention of delegates to amend the constitution
called by the King.
"July 7, convention opened.
"August 13, convention dissolved and constitution abrogated.
"August 20, new constitution granted by the King.
"L. Haalelea died.
" 1865. October 19, R. C. Wyllie, minister of foreign relations, died,
aged 67.
"Queen Emma visited the United States and Europe.
"January 27, arrival of the steamer Ajax from California.
"1865. May 29, H. R. H. Princess V. Kamamalu died, aged 27 years
6 months and 29 days.
"July 20, J. Dudoit, formerly French consul, murdered.
"October 22, return of Queen Emma.
"1867. March 12, G. M. Robertson, first associate justice of the
supreme court, died, aged 47.
"1868. November 4, His Highness Mataio Kekuanaoa, father of the
late King and his present Majesty, died, aged 75 years.
" 1869. July 21, arrival of H. 1. H. Alfred Ernest, Duke of Edinburg,
in command of. H. B. M.'s ship Galatea.
"August 2, light-house at the entrance of Honolulu Harbor permanently lighted.
XVIII. DEED OF CESSION.
" The deed of cession reads as follows:
"'In consequence of the difficulties of complying with the demands
in the manner in which they are made by Her Britannic Majesty's representative upon us, in reference to the claims of British subjects, we
do hereby cede the group of islands known as the Hawaiian (or Sandwich) Islands unto the Right Honorable Lord George Paulet, captain
of Her Britannic MajestyTs ship of war Carysfort, representing Her
Majesty Victoria, Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, from this date
and the time being; the said cession being made with the reservation
that it is subject to any arrangement that may have been entered into
by the representatives appointed by us to treat with the Government
of Her Britannic Majesty; and in the event that no agreement has been




124


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


executed previous to the date hereof, subject to the decision of Hler
Britannic Majesty's Government, on conference with the said representatives appointed by us; or, in the event of our representatives not being
accessible or not having been acknowledged, subject to the decision
which Her Britannic Majesty may pronounce on the receipt of full
information from us and from the Right Honorable Lord George Paulet.
"' In confirmation of the above we hereby affix our names and seals
this twenty-fifth day of February, in the year of our Lord one thousand
eight hundred and forty-three, at Honolulu, Oahu, Sandwich Islands.
"'Signed in the presence of G. P. Judd, recorder and translator for
the Government.
"' KAMHEHAMEHA III
' K EKAULUOHL
XIX. ARTICLE 78, CONSTITUTION OF 1852.
"' Every male subject of His Majesty, whether native or naturalized, and every denizen of the Kingdom, who shall have paid his taxes,
who shall have attained the age of 20 years, and who shall have resided
in the Kingdom for one year immediately preceding the time of election,
shall be entitled to one vote for the representative or representatives of
the district in which he may have resided three months next preceding
the day of election; provided, that no insane person, nor any person who
shall at any time have been convicted of any infamous crime within this
Kingdom, unless he shall have been pardoned by the King, and by the
terms of such pardon been restored to all the rights of a subject, shall
be allowed to vote.'
CONSTITUTION OF 1864.
"'Constitution granted by His Majesty Kamehameha V, by the grace of
God, king of the Hawaiian Islands, on the twentieth day of August,
A. 7). 1864.
"'AR'TICLE 1. God hath endowed all men with certain inalienable
rights; among which are life, liberty, and right of acquiring, possessing, and protecting property, and of pursuing and obtaining safety and
happiness.
'4 AARTICLE 2. All men are free to worship God according to the dictates of their own conscience; but this sacred privilege hereby secured
shall not be so construed as to justify acts of licentiousness or practices
inconsistent with the peace or safety of the Kingdom.
"' ARTICLE 3. All men may freely speak, write, and publish their
sentiments on all subjects, being responsible for the abuse of that
right, and no law shall be enacted to restrain the liberty of speech, or of
the press, except such laws as may be necessary for the protection of
His Majesty the King and the royal family.
"' IARTICLE 4. All men shall have the right, in an orderly and peaceable manner, to assemble, without arms, to consult upon the common
good and to petition the King or Legislative Assembly for redress of
grievances.
'4 ARTICLE 5. The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus belongs to
all men, and shall not be suspended, unless by the King, when in cases
of rebellion or invasion the public safety shall require its suspension.
' ARTICLE 6. No person shall be subject to punishment for any




HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


125


offense, except on due and legal conviction thereof in a court having
jurisdiction of the case.
" ARTICLE 7. No person shall be held to answer for any crime or
offence (except in cases of impeachment, or for offences within the
jurisdiction of a police or district justice, or in summary proceedings
for contempt) unless upon indictment, fully and plainly describing
such crime or offence, and he shall have the right to meet the witnesses
who are produced against him face to face; to produce witnesses and
proofs in his own favor; and by himself or his counsel, at his election,
to examine the witnesses produced by himself, and cross-examine those
produced against him, and to be fully heard in his defence. In all
cases in which the right of trial by jury has been heretofore used it
shall be held inviolable forever, except in actions of debt or assumpsit
in which the amount claimed is less than fifty dollars.
" 'ARTICLE 8. No person shall be required to answer again for an
offence of which he has been duly convicted or of which he has been
duly acquitted upon a good and sufficient indictment.
" ' ARTICLE 9. No person shall be compelled, in any criminal case, to
be a witness against himself, nor be deprived of life, liberty, or property without due process of law.
" ' ARTICLE 10. No person shall sit as a judge or juror in any case
in which his relative is interested, either as plaintiff or defendant, or in
the issue of which the said judge or juror may have, either directly or
through a relative, any pecuniary interest.
"' ARTICLE 11. Involuntary servitude, except for crime, is forever
prohibited in this Kingdom; whenever a slave shall enter Hawaiian
territory he shall be free.
"'ARTICLE 12. Every person has the right to be secure from all
unreasonable searches and seizures of his person, his house, his papers,
and effects; and no warrants shall issue, but on probable cause supported by oath or affirmation and describing the place to be searched
and the persons or things to be seized.
" ' ARTICLE 13. The King conducts his Government for the common
good, and not for the profit, honor, or private interest of any one man,
family, or class of men among his subjects.
" 'ARTICLE 14. Each member of society has a right to be protected
by it in the enjoyment of his life, liberty, and property, according to
law; and, therefore, he shall be obliged to contribute his proportional
share to the expense of this protection, and to give his personal
services or an equivalent when necessary; but no part of the property
of any individual shall be taken from him, or applied to public uses,
without his own consent or the enactment of the Legislative Assembly,
except the same shall be necessary for the military operation of the
Kingdom in time of war or insurrection: and whenever the public
exigencies may require that the property of any individual should be
appropriated to public use he shall receive a reasonable compensation
therefor.
"'ARTICLE 15. No subsidy, duty, or tax of any description shall be
established or levied without the consent of the legislative assembly;
nor shall any money be drawn from the public treasury without such
consent, except when between the sessions of the legislative assembly the emergencies of war, invasion, rebellion, pestilence, or other public disaster shall arise, and then not without the concurrence of all the
cabinet and a majority of the whole privy council; and the minister
of finance shall render a detailed account of such expenditure to the
legislative assembly.




126


1HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


"i ARTICLE 16. No retrospective laws shall ever be enacted.
" 'ARTICLE 17. The military shall always be subject to the laws of the
land; and no soldier shall, in time of peace, be quartered in any house
without the consent of the owner; nor in time of war but in a manner to be prescribed by the Legislature.
' ARTICLE 18. Every elector shall be privileged from arrest on election days, during his attendance at election, and in going to and
returning therefrom, except in cases of treason, felony, or breach of
the peace.
"'ARTICLE 19. No elector shall be obliged to perform military duty
on the day of election as to prevent his voting, except in time of war
or public danger.
"'ARTICLE 20. The supreme power of the Kingdom in its exercise
is divided into the executive, legislative, and judicial; these shall
always be preserved distinct, and no -judge of a court of record shall
ever be a member of the legislative assembly.
"' ARTICLE 21. The Government of this Kingdom is that of a constitutional monarchy, under His Majesty Kamehameha V, his heirs
and successors.
" 'ARTICLE 22. The crown is hereby permanently confirmed to His
Majesty Kamehameha V, and to the heirs of his body lawfully begotten,
and to their lawful descendants in a direct line; failing whom, the
crown shall descend to Her Royal Highness the Princess Victoria
Kamamalu Kaahumanu. and the heirs of her body lawfully begotten,
and their lawful descendants in a direct line. The succession shall be
to the senior male child, and to the heirs of his body; failing a male
child, the succession shall be to the senior female child and to the heirs
of her body. In case there is no heir as above provided, then the
successor shall be the person whom the sovereign shall appoint, with
the consent of the nobles, and publicly proclaim as such during the
King's life; but should there be-no such appointment and proclamation and the throne should become vacant, then the cabinet council,
immediately after the occurring of such vacancy, shall cause a meeting
of the legislative assembly, who shall elect by ballot some native Alii of
the Kingdom as successor to the throne; and the successor so elected
shall become a new Stirps for a royal family, and the succession from
the sovereign thus elected shall be regulated by the same law as the
present royal family of Hawaii.
"'ARTICLE 23. It shall not be lawful for any member of the royal
family of Hawaii, who may by law succeed to the throne, to contract
marriage without the consent of the reigning sovereign. Every marriage so contracted shall be void, and the person so contracting a marriage may, by the proclamation of the reigning sovereign, be declared
to have forfeited his or her right to the throne, and, after such proclamation, the right of succession shall vest in the next heir, as though
such offender were dead.
" 'ARTICLE 24. His Majesty Kamehameha V will, and his successors upon coming to the throne shall, take the following oath: I solemnly swear in the presence of Almighty God to maintain the constitution of the Kingdom whole and inviolate, and to govern in conformity
therewith.
" 'ARTICLE 25. No person shall ever sit upon the throne who has been
convicted of any infamous crime, or who is insane, or an idiot.
'"ARTICLE 26. The King is the commander-in-chief of the army and
navy, and of all other military forces of the Kingdom, by sea and land;
and has full power by himself, or by any officer or officers he may




HAWAIIAN ISLASDS. *                127
appoint, to train and govern such forces as he may judge best for the
defense and safety of the Kingdom. But he shall never proclaim
without the consent of the legislative assembly.
" 'ARTICLE 27. The King, by and with the advice of his privy council, has the power to grant reprieves and pardon, after conviction, for
all offenses, except in cases of impeachment.
"4 'ARTICLE 28. The King, by and with the advice of his privy council, convenes the legislative assembly at the seat of Government, or
at a different place if that should become dangerous from an enemy,
or any dangerous disorder; and in case of disagreement between His
Majesty and the legislative assembly he adjourns, prorogues, or dissolves it, but not beyond the next ordinary session under any great
emergency he may convene the legislative assembly to extraordinary
sessions.
" 'ARTICLE 29. The King has the power to make treaties. Treaties
involving changes in the tariff or in any law of the Kingdom shall be
referred for approval to the legislative assembly. The King appoints
public ministers, who shall be commissioned, accredited, and instructed
agreeably to the usuage and law of nations.
" 'ARTICLE 30. It is the King's prerogative to receive and acknowledge public ministers, to inform the legislative assembly by royal message, from time to time, of the state of the Kingdom, and to recommend
to its consideration such measures as he shall judge necessary and
expedient.
"'ARTICLE 31. The person of the King is inviolable and sacred.
His ministers are responsible. To the King belongs the executive
power. All laws that have passed the legislative assembly shall
require His Majesty's signature in order to their validity.
"'ARTICLE 32. Whenever, upon the decease of the reigning sovereign, the heir shall be less than eighteen years of age, the royal power
shall be exercised by a regent or council of regency, as hereinafter provided.
" 'ARTICLE 33. It shall lawful for the King at any time when he may
be about to absent himself from the Kingdom to appoint a regent, or
council of regency, who shall administer the Government in his name;
and likewise the King may, by his last will and testament, appoint a
regent, or council of regency, to administer the Government during the
minority of any heir to the throne, and should a sovereign decease,
leaving a minor heir, and having made no last will and testament, the
cabinet council, at the. time of such decease. shall be a council of
regency until the legislative assembly, which shall be called immediately, may be assembled, and the legislative assembly immediately
that it is assembled shall proceed to choose, by ballot, a regent, or
council of regency, who shall administer the Government in the name
of the King, and exercise all the powers which are constitutionally
vested in the King until he shall have attained the age of eighteen years,
which age is declared to be the legal majority of such sovereigns.
"'ARTICLE 34. The King is sovereign of all the chiefs and of all the
people; the Kingdom is his.
"'ARTICLE 35. All titles of honor, orders, and other distinctions
emanate from the King.
"'ARTICLE 36. The King coins money and regulates the currency
by law.
"'ARTICLE 37. The King, in case of invasion or rebellion, ean place
the whole Kingdom, or any part of it, under martial law.




128. HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


"C ARTICLE 38. The national ensign shall not be changed except by
act of the Legislature.
"I ARTICLE 39. The King's private lands and other property are
inyiolable.
"'ARTICLE 40. The King can not be sued or held to account in any
court or tribunal of the realm.
"'ARTICLE 41. There shall continue to be a council of state for
advising the King in all matters for the good of the State wherein he
may require its advice, and for assisting him in administering the
executive affairs of the Government in euch manner as he may direct;
which council shall be called the King's private council of state, and
the members thereof shall be appointed by the King, to hold office
during His Majesty's pleasure.
" 'ARTICLE 42. The King's cabinet shall consist of a minister of foreign affairs, the minister of the interior, the minister of finance, and the
attorney-general of the Kingdom, and these shall be His Majesty's special advisers in the executive affairs of the Kingdom; and they shall
be ex officio members of His Majesty's privy council of state. They
shall be appointed and commissioned by the King, and hold office during His Majesty's pleasure, subject to impeachment. No act of the King
shall have any effect unless it be countersigned by a minister, who, by
that signature, makes himself responsible.
"'ARTICLE 43. Each member of the King's cabinet shall keep an
office at the seat of Government, and shall be accountable for the conduct of his deputies or clerks. The ministry holds seats ex offcio as
nobles in the legislative assembly.
" 'ARTICLE 44. The minister of finance shall present to the legislative assembly, in the name of the Government, on the first day of the
meeting of the Legislature, the financial budget in the Hawaiian and
English languages.
1 'ARTICLE 45. The Legislative power of the three estates of this
-kingdom is vested in the King and the legislative assembly; which
assembly shall consist of the nobles, appointed by the King, and of
the representatives of the people, sitting together.
' 4 ARTICLE 46. The legislative body shall assemble biennially in the
month of April, and at such other time as the King may judge necessary, for the purpose of seeking the welfare of the nation. This body
shall be styled-the Legislature of the Hawaiian Kingdom.
" 'ARTICLE 47. Every member of the legislative assembly shall take
the following oath: I most solemnly swear, in the presence of Almighty
God, that I will faithfully support the constitution of the Hawaiian
Kingdom and conscientiously and impartially discharge my duties as
a member of this assembly.
"4 ARTICLE 48. The Legislature has full power and authority to
amend the constitution as hereinafter provided, and from time to time
to make all manner of wholesome laws not repugnant to the provisions
of the constitution.
'4ARTICLE 49. The King shall signify his approval of any bill or
resolution which shall have passed the legislative assembly by signing the same previous to the final rising of the Legislature. But if he
shall object to the passing of such bill or resolution he will return to
the legislative assenbly, who shall enter the fact of such return on its
journal, and such bill or resolution shall not be brought forward thereafter during the same session.
" 'ARTICLE 50. The legislative assembly shall be the judge of the
qualifications of its own members, and a majority shall constitute a




HAWAIIAN ISLaMNa                    129 -quorum to do business; but a smaller number may adjourn from day -
to day, and compel the attendance of absent members in such manner
and under such penalties as the assembly may provide.
4 'ARTICLE 51. The legislative assembly shall choose its own officers
and determine the rules of its own proceedings.
" 'ARTICLE 52. The legislative assembly shall have authority to punish by imprisonment, not exceeding thirty days, every person not a
member who shall be guilty of disrespect to the assembly by any disorderly or contemptuous behavior in its presence, or who, during the
time of its sitting, shall make any false report of its proceedings or
insulting comments upon the same, or who shall threaten harm to the
body or estate of any of its members for anything said or done in the
assembly, or who shall assault any of them therefor, or who shall assault
or arrest any witness or other person ordered to attend the assembly
in his way going or returning or who shall rescue any person arrested
by order of the assembly.
"'ARTICLE 53. The legislative assembly may punish its own members for disorderly behavior.
"'ARTICLE 54. The legislative assembly shall keep a journal of its
proceedings, and the yeas and nays of its members, or any question,
shall, at the desire of one-fifth of those present, be entered on the
journal.
"'ARTICLE 55. The members of the legislative assembly shall, in
all cases except treason, felony, or breach of the peace, be privileged
from arrest during their attendance at the sessions of the Legislature
and in going to and returning from the same; and they shall not be held
to answer for any speech or debate held in the assembly in any other
court or place whatsoever.
"'ARTICLE 56. The representatives shall receive for their services
a compensation to be ascertained by law and paid out of the public
treasury, but no increase of compensation shall take effect during the
year in which it shall have been made; and no law shall be passed
increasing the compensation of said representatives beyond the sum of
two hundred and fifty dollars for each session.
"' ARTICLE 57. The King appoints the nobles, who shall hold their
appointments during life, subject to the provisions of article 53, but
their number shall not exceed twenty.
"'ARTICLE 58. No person shall be appointed a noble who shall not
have attained the age of twenty-one years and resided in the Kingdom
five years.
"' ARTICLE 59. Thenobles shall be a court, with full and sole authority
to hear and determine all impeachments made by the representatives,
as the grand inquest of the Kingdom, against any officers of the Kingdom for misconduct or maladministration in their offices; but, previous
to the trial of every impeachment, the nobles shall respectively be sworn
truly and impartially to determine the charge in question, according to
evidence and the law. Their judgment, however, shall not extend
further thon to removal from office and disqualification to hold or enjoy
any place of honor, trust, or profit under this Government; but the
party so convicted shall be, nevertheless, liable to indictment, trial,
judgment, and punishment according to the laws of the land. No minister shall sit as a noble on the trial of any impeachment.
"' ARTICLE 60. The representation of the people shall be based
upon the principle of equality, and shall be regulated and apportioned
by the Legislature according to the population, to be ascertained, from
time to time, by the official census. The representatives shall not be
S. Rep. 227-9




130                  HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
less in number than twenty-four nor more than forty, who shall be
elected biennually.
"' ARTICLE 61. Ng person shall be eligible for a representative of the
people who is insane or an idiot; nor unless he be a male subject of
the Kingdom; who shall have arrived at a full age of twenty-one years,
who shall know how to read and write, who shall understand accounts,
and shall have been domiciled in the Kingdom for at least three years,
the last of which shall be the year immediately preceding his election,
and who shall own real estate within the Kingdom of a clear value over
and above all incumbrances of at least five hundred dollars, or who
shall have an annual income of at least two hundred and fifty dollars
derived from any property or some lawful employment.
"'ARTICLE 62. Every male subject of the Kingdom who shall have
paid his taxes, who shall have attained the age of twenty years, and
shall have been domiciled in the Kingdom for one year immediately preceding the election, and shall be possessed of real property in this
Kingdom to the value over and above all incumbrances of one hundred
and fifty dollars, or of a leasehold property on which the rent is twentyfive dollars per year, or of an income of not less than seventy-five dollars per year, derived from any property or some lawful employment,
and shall know how to read and write, if born since the year 1840,
and shall have caused his name to be entered on the list of voters of
his district as may be provided by law, shall be entitled to one vote for
the representative or representatives of that district: Provided, however, That no insane or idiotic person, nor any person who shall have
been convicted of any infamous crime within this Kingdom, unless he
shall have been pardoned by the King, and by the terms of such pardon have been restored to all the rights of a subject, shall be allowed
to vote.
"'ARTICLE 63. The property qualifications of the representatives of
the people and of the electors may be increased by law.
"'ARTICLE 64. The judicial power of the Kingdom shall be vested
in one supreme court, and in such inferior courts as the Legislature
may, from time to time, establish.
"( I ARTICLE 65. The supreme court shall consist of a chief justice and
not less than two associate justices, any of who may hold the court.
The justices of the supreme court shall hold their offices during good
behavior, subject to remoual upon impeachment, and shall, at stated
times, receive for their services a compensation which shall not be diminished during their continuance in office: Provided, however, That any
judge of the supreme court or any other court of record may be removed
from office, on a resolution passed by two-thirds of the legislative assembly, for good cause shown to the satisfaction of the King. The judge
against whom the legislative assembly may be about to proceed shall
receive notice thereof, accompanied by a copy of the causes alleged for
his removal, at least ten days before the day on which the legislative
assembly shall act thereon. He shall be heard before the legislative
assembly.
"'ARTICLE 66. The judicial power shall be divided among the supreme court and the several inferior courts of the Kingdom in such
manner as the Legislature may from time to time prescribe, and the
tenure of office in the inferior courts of the Kingdom shall be such as
may be defined by the law creating them.
"' ARTILE 67. The judicial power shall extend to all cases in law
and equity arising under the constitution and laws of this Kingdom,
and ti aties made, or which shall be made under their authority, to all'




m


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


131 '


cases affecting public ministers and councils and to a'l cbses of admiralty tnd maritime jurisdiction.
'ARTICLE 68. The chief justice of the supreme court shall be the
chancellor of the Kingdom; he shall be ex officio president of the nobles
in all cases of impeachment, unless when impeached himself, and exercise such jurisdiction in equity or other cases as the law may confer
upon him, his decisions being subject, however, to the revision of the
supreme court on appeal. Should the chief justice ever be impeached
some person specially commissioned by the King shall be president of
the court of impeachment during such trial.
" C 'ARTICLE 69. The decisions of the supreme court, when made by
a majority of the justices thereof, shall be final and conclusive upon all
parties.
" 'ARTICLE 70. The King, his cabinet, and the legislative assembly
shall have authority to require the opinions of the justices of the
supreme court upon important questions of law and upon solemn
occasions.
"'ARTICLE. 71. The King appoints the justices of the supreme court
and all other judges of courts of record; their salaries are fixed by law.
" 'ARTICLE 72. No judge or magistrate can sit alone on an appeal or
new trial in any case on which he may have given a previous judgment.
" 'ARTICLE 73. No person shall ever hold any office of honor, trust,
or profit under the Government of the Hawaiian Islands who shall, in
due course of law, have been convicted of theft, bribery, perjury,
forgery, embezzlement, or other high crime or misdemeanor, unless he
shall have been pardoned by the King and restored to his civil rights,
and by the express terms of his pardon declared to be appointable to
offices of trust, honor, and profit.
"'ARTICLE 74. No officer of this Government shall hold any office
or receive any salary from any other Government or power whatever.
"' ARTICLE 75. The Legislature votes the appropriations biennially,
after due consideration of the revenue and expenditures for the two
preceding years and the estimates of the revenue and expenditures of
the two succeeding years, which shall be submitted to them by the
minister of finance.
"'ARTICLE 76. The enacting style in making and passing all acts
and laws shall be, "Be it enacted by the King and the legislative
assembly of the Hawaiian Islands in the Legislature of the Kingdom
assembled."
" 'ARTICLE 77. To avoid improper influences which may result from
intermixing in one and the same act such things as have no proper
relation to each other every law shall embrace but one object, and
that shall be expressed in its title.
" 'ARTICLE 78. All laws in force in this Kingdom shall continue and
remain in full effect until altered or repealed by the Legislature, such
parts only excepted as are repugnant to this constitution. All laws
heretofore enacted, or that may hereafter be enacted, which are contrary to this constitution shall be null and void.
"'ARTICLE 79. This constitution shall be in force from the twentieth
day of August, in the year one thousand eight hundred and sixty-four,
but that there may be no failure of justice or inconvenience to the
Kingdom from any change, all officers of this Kingdom, at the time this
constitution shall take effect, shall have, hold, and exercise all the
power to them granted until other persons shall be appointed in their
stead.
" ' ARTICLE 80. Any amendment or amendments to this constitution




132


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


may be.roposed in the legislative assembly, ald if the samae shall be
agreed to by a majority of the members thereof, such proposed amendment or amendments shall be entered on its journal, witl the yeas and
nays taken thereon, and referred to the next Legislature; which proposed amendment or amendments shall be published for three months
previous to the next election of representatives; and if in the next
Legislature such proposed amendment or amendments shall be agreed
to by two-thirds of all the members of the legislative assembly, and
be approved by the King, such amendment or amendments shall
become part of the constitution of this country.
" ' KAMEHAMEHA R? '
-(Pp. 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, and 33.)
Joint resolution of the Hawaiian Legislature of 1856.
" Resolvedt That whereas it is desirable to codify our existing laws,
His Royal Highness Prince Kamellameha, the honorable W. L. Lee,
chief justice, and the honorable George M. Robertson, associate
judge of the supreme court, are appointed a committee to prepare a
complete civil code, adding notes with reference to important decisions
of court under the laws, wherever they may think necessary, and to
report the same for the sanction of the Legislature of 1858, with an
appropriate index for facility of reference " (p. 39).
Comment on legislative provision for publication of Hawaiian law reports.
"'It may not be inappropriate in this connection to state that so
highly esteemed are some of the dicta of our Hawaiian courts abroad
that their decisions have in more than one instance been quoted in
some of the higher courts of the United States. This is no small honor
to be attained by a nation which, one generation only ago, had no law
but the "word of the chief' (p. 40).
XX. LIST SHOWING THAT A VERY SMALL PROPORTION OF THE
OFFICERS IN CHARGE OF THE CONDUCT OF THE GOVERNMENT
WERE NATIVE    HAWAIIANS, THE LARGER PROPORTION BEING
AMERICANS.
" The court, Government officers, etc.
"The court.-His Majesty Kamehameha V, born December 11,
1830. Ascended the throne November 30, 1863. Son of Kinau and
grandson of Kamehameha I.
" Her Majesty Queen Dowager Kalama, relict of His Majesty Kauikeaouli, Kaeamehameha III.
" Her Majesty Queen Dowager Emma, relict of His Majesty Alexander Liholiho, Kamehameha IV.
" Privy council of state.-His Majesty the King. Their excellencies
the ministers; the governors of Oahu, Kauai, and Maui. Her excellency the governess of Hawaii. His honor the chancellor of the
Kingdom.
"H. A. Kahanu, S. N. Castle, R. G. Davis, A. Fornander, C. Kanaina,
O. R. Bishop, P. Y. Kaeo, P. S. Kalama, W. Hillebrand, W. C. Lunalilo, T. S. Staley, J. W. Makalena, W. P. Kamakau, G. Rhodes, J. Mott
Smith, T. C. Heuck; secretary, D. Kalakaua.
"The cabinet.-His Majesty the King; minister of foreign relations,
his excellency C. de Varigny; minister of the interior, his excellency




HAWMI ImLANDS.                      133
F. W. Hutchison; minister of finance, his excellency C. C.'Harris:
attorney-general, Hon. S. H. Phillips.
"Bureau of public instruction.-President, Hon. W. P. Kamakan; -
members, C. 0. Harris, C. de Varigny, F. W. Hutchison, and Bishop
Staley; inspector-general of schools, A. Fornander; secretary, W. J.
Smith.
"Bureau immigration.-President, minister of the interior; members,
C. R. Bishop, C. C. Harris, D. Kalakaua, W. Hillebrand.
"4Supreme court.-Chief justice, E. H. Allen; first associate justice,
Hon. A. S. Hartwell; second associate justice, Hon. H. A. Widemann;
clerk, L. McCully, esq.; assistant clerk, W. Humphreys, esq.
" Circuitjudges.-First circuit, Oahu, Hon. W. P. Kamakau: second
circuit, Maui, Hon. A. J. Lawrence; third circuit, Hawaii, Hons. D.
K. Naiapaakai, C. F. Hart, and R. A. Lyman; fourth circuit, Kauai,
Hon. D. McBryde.
"Board of health.-President, minister of the interior; members, W.
Hillebrand, M. D.; Godfrey Rhodes, W. P. Kamakan, T..C. Heuck;
port physician, A. C. Buffum.
4Government officers.-Jailer, Cahu prison, Capt. J. H. Brown; collector-general of customs, W. F. Allen, esq.; postmaster-general, A.
P. Brickwood, esq.; registrar of conveyances, Thomas Brown, esq.;
superintendent waterworks, Capt. Thomas Long; superintendent public works, Robert Sterling, esq.; harbor master of Honolulu, Capt.
John Meek; pilots in Honolulu, Capts. A. McIntyre and C. S. Chadwick" (p. 75).
XXI. AND THE FOLLOWING STATEMENT OF ADMIRAL BELKNAP,
FROM THE BOSTON HERALD OF JANUARY 31, 1893..
To the Editor of the Herald:
The revolution in the Hawaiian Islands, resulting in the deposition
of the Queen and the establishment of a provisional government, is an
event not unexpected to diplomatic, naval, and consular officers who
have had any acquaintance or familiarity with the course of affairs in
that island Kingdom for the past twenty years.
To the people of the United States the present situation is of momentous interest and of vital importance. Indeed, it would seem that nature
had established that group to be ultimately occupied as an outpost, as
it were, of the great Republic on its western border, and that the time
had now come for the fulfillment of such design.
A glance at a chart of the Pacific will indicate to the most casual
observer the great importance and inestimable value of those islands
as a strategic point and commercial center. Situated in mid-north
Pacific, the group looks out on every hand toward grand opportunities
of trade, political aggrandizement, and polyglot intercourse.
To the north and northwest it beckons to the teeming populations of
China, Japan, Korea, and Russian coast of Asia; to the north and
northeast it calls to Alaska and British Columbia; to the east it bows
to the imperial domain of the western United States, holding out its
confiding hands for closer clasp and more binding tie; to the southeast
it nods to Mexico, Central America, Colombia, Bolivia, Peru, and Chile;
to the south and southwest it salutes the growing influence and tropic
opportunities of Australia, New Zealand, and the numerous island
groups constituting Polynesia.
Its chief commercial point, Honolulu, is already a port of call for our
lines of steamships to Japan and Polynesia, and for the British lines




134


HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.


to New Zealand and Australia from Vancouner. That port also stands
directly in the track of the commerce that will flow through the Nic:ragua Canal when that great commercial need is completed. Indeed, in
that coning day the enchanting coral, reef-locked harbor of Honolulu
will hardly suffice to take in the ships that will put in there.
The interests in the group are mainly American, or substantially
connected commercially with the United States. In the palmy days of
the whale fishery the ports of Honolulu and Lahaina used to be packed
at certain seasons of the year with the ships of that great and adventurous industry.
The advent of our missionaries at the islands in 1820, and the excellent work they did there, won the hearts of the natives and increased
American influence. The treaty of reciprocity made with King Kalakaua in 1875 welded in closest bonds the ties of friendship and trade,
and gave to the group its present wealth and prosperity.
The group now seeks annexation to the United States; the consummation of such wish would inure to the benefit of both peoples, commercially and politically. Annex the islands, constitute them a territory, and reciprocal trade will double within ten years. Let the islanders feel that they are once and forever runder the folds of the
American flag, as part and parcel of the great Republic, and a development will take place in the group that will at once surprise its people
and the world.
Not to take the fruit within our grasp and annex the group now begging us to take it in would be folly indeed-a mistake of the gravest
character, both for the statesmen of the day and for the men among us
of high commercial aims and great enterprises.
Our statesmen should act in this matter in the spirit and resolve
that secured to us the vast Louisiana purchase, the annexation of
Texas, and the acquisition of California. The administration that
secures to the United States the "' coign of vantage" in the possession
of those beautiful islands will score a great measure of beneficent
achievement to the credit side of its account.
But in the path of annexation England will throw down the gauntlet
of protest and obstruction. To that end she will bend all the powers
of her diplomacy; all the cunning of her foreign-office procedures; all
the energy, unwearied effort, and unvarying constancy that has ever
made her secretly hostile in her diplomatic methods and commercial
policies to the welfare, growth, and advancement of the United States.
She wants to gather the group under her own control; she would
like to Egyptianize that vital point in the Pacific; she burns to establish a Pacific Bermuda off our Western coast, to hold the same relation
toward the ports of Esquimalt and Victoria on Vancouver Island that
Bermuda bears toward Halifax, all strongly fortified, connected by
cable with Downing street, and stored with munitions of war.
Let the British lion once get its paw upon the group and Honolulu
would soon become one of the most important strongholds of Great
Britain's power. With her fortified port of Esquimalt dominating the
entrance to Puget Sound, constituting an ever-standing menace to our
domain in that region, she wants to supplement such commanding
advantage by another stronghold at Hawaii, where, within six days'
easy steaming from San Francisco, she could immediately threaten that
port with one of her fleets in the event of the sudden outbreak of war.
Great Britain will undoubtedly propose a joint arrangement for the
government of the islands, but we want none of that-no entangling
alliances. We have had enough of such business at Samoa.  *. e




HAWAIIAN ISLAND                    135
No; we want no joint protectorate, no occupation there.by any European power, no Pacific Egypt. We need the group as part and parcel
of the United States, and should take what is offered us, even at the
hazard of war.
Westward the star of empire takes its way. Let the Monroe doctrine stay not its hand until it holds Hawaii securely within its grasp.
In this matter the undersigned speaks from personal knowledge,
gained through official'visits to the islands in 1874 and 1882, and could
readily pursue the subject further and more into detail, but for the
present forbears.
GEORGE E. BELKNAP.
BROOKLINE, January 30, 1893.
^6








3   9015 R 01911 22
3 9015 01911 2286


~-:~ . aPI
-r
~p~ 5YI.~'.
';i v;~~~- ~~I~''.' c.
11
~$
i
"a;~-~..'t -Agf'-,


I


DO NOT REMOVE


OR


MUTILATE CARD


':






I


T- 
N
14